Docstoc

Quran_Dictionary_

Document Sample
Quran_Dictionary_ Powered By Docstoc
					Surah-1: Al-Fatihah                                        48                                             Part: 1



                         3
    In the name of Allah, Most Beneficent, Most Merciful
                                                                14


                                                                15
                                                                      judgment, religion, faith, creed

                                                                      Thee Alone
                                                                                                               ú óÈ
                                                                                                                  ¾¦
                                                                                                                È ŠÊ
                                                                                                                ½¢ ¤
                                                                      we worship                                ¾¦
                                                                                                                àû
                             ¨ Ç
                  ¨¸	«¢Šèó¦É È°
                                                                16                                  ® § ¸



                                                                16a   and                                           Â
                                                                                                                    È
                 The Opening
         Surah 1: Al-Fatihah                                    17    we ask for help,                      ú ଠû
                                                                                                             	 È
                                                                      assistance, support
1       to take refuge,                    ¯  ¸    ¯ß
                                                     Æ      18    to ask for help,            À Â ¸   È ¢ ÇÊ
                                                                                                             À ଠ¦
        to seek protection                                            succor, support
2       I take refuge, I seek protection             ¯ ߢ
                                                     É  È    19    im. guide, direct,              Ä ® Á   	 ÿÊ
                                                                                                                 ¾¦
3       prep. of, with, by, in                          §
                                                        Ê             lead on right course or way,
                                                                      show the way, make aware

4       prep. from, of, some of,                          ÷
                                                        ú	     20    pl. us, our, ours                              û
                                                                                                                    ¢
        since, then
                                                                21    path, way, course                      ¶ ÂÏ
                                                                                                             È ¦ 	
5       stoned, cursed, damned           ¿ « °    ö ³°
                                                    Ž È
                                                                22    straight, upright, erect,             ö 	  ÷
                                                                                                             ì¬È
6       name, noun                                    ö ¦
                                                       ÇÊ           correct, righteous, honest

7       xg. Beneficent,                       Àø ¦
                                              É ¢ · óÈ       23    pl. those, who                           ú Àó¦
                                                                                                                	 MÈ
        Compassionate
                                                                24    you have favored,           ¿ ¸ À    ª à¢
                                                                                                             ø ûÈ
8       xg. Merciful,                  ¿ ¬ °    ö ·Â ¦
                                                  	  óÈ           you bestowed grace
        Compassionate
                                                                25    prep. unto them, upon them                   ô
                                                                                                             öŽ Š ß
9       the praise, thanks,             ® ¿ ¬    ¾ ¸¦
                                                   ø ’óÈ
        commend, admire
                                                                26    other than                                    ã
                                                                                                                 Š
10      prep. for, because of, due to,                     ¾
                                                           Ê    27    those who earned      § µ ¹   Æ  ä÷
                                                                                                       §Ô
        for the sake of, for the sake of                              wrath
11      Sustainer of the worlds,         ú øó à §°
                                          	 Š¢ ’ó¦O È       28    not, no, do not, don't                         ó
                                                                                                                    ¢Š
        Lord of the worlds / creatures
                                                                29    who go astray, who       ¾ ¾ µ    ú ó Ô ¦
                                                                                                          O– óÈ
12      owner, king, master              ½ ¾ ¿    îó ÷
                                                   	 	¢             lose the way
13      day                                            ¿
                                                       È           (vn.:        KÓ
                                                                                   ò )
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                      49                                           Part: 1

 ^ Part :1                           C¦ Ä `
                                             ³                45   revealed, sent down            ¾ ± À    ¾Ä ¢
                                                                                                            È Ž ûÉ
                                                                   unto thee                                î ó¤
                                                                                                             ŠÊ
                           ¨ Ç
                 ʨŠì¦ó¦É È°
                                                              46
           ^                            `
                                                              47   which, whatever                                ÷
                                                                                                                 ¢
     The Heifer / The Cow
      Surah 2: Al-Baqarah                                     48   before thee                              îô ë
                                                                                                             	 ¦Š
30   this, (that)                               îó
                                                 	¯
                                                     ¦
                                                              49   life after death, hereafter,         Æ  	» ¦
                                                                                                        ¨Â        ¦




                                                                   life to come
                                            ¤° ó
                                             È ¢Š
                                                                                                       À ü	  
                                                                                                      È ë
31   no doubt, no suspicion
                                                              50   they are certain of,     À ¼ Ä

32   prep. in this, in, at, on, within              þ ç
                                                    	 	           sure, affirm

33   those who ward off evil, pious,            ú 	 ¬÷
                                                 ì        51   those / (these) people              îŸ ó ¢
                                                                                                        	–ŠÌÂÉ
     God-fearing                                              52   prep. on, upon, above                       ß
                                                                                                             ô
                                      À ü	
                              À¿¦È ÷š
                                                                                                             ¾ÿ
                                                                                                            Ã 
34   they believe
                                                              53   guidance
                                                 ¤ ã
                                                  Š
                                                                                                     À ¸	 ÷
                                                                                                    È  ô’è
35   unseen, secret, invisible
                                                              54   ap. pl. successful,    ¬ ¾ »

                                                      Â
                                                      È
                                                                                                                À¤
                                                                                                                MÊ
36   prep. and, and also
                                                              55   certainly, undoubtedly, doubtless
                                            À ø ì
                                            È  	 
                                                                                                           Š Š
                                                                                                       ¦Ì èï
37   they establish, they are
                                                              56   they disbelieved,         ° » ½
     steadfast
                                                                   they rejected
                                             ¨ ôÐ
                                             É ¢Š  ó¦
                                                                                                          Ç
                                                                                                        Æ ¡ 
38   prayer
                                                              57   equal, all the same
                                                   ¢ø÷
                                                   Š 	
                                                                                                                   
                                                                                                                  È
39   prep. of that, from that
                                                              58   whether (sign of interrogation)
                                                  ü ±°
                                                ¢’ëÈ È
                                                                                                       © À¢
                                                                                                      È Ì°Š ûÈ
40   we have provided,                ¼ ± °
                                                              59   you warned / frightened ° ¯ À
     bestowed, blessed, endowed with
     livelihood                                               60   or                                              ¢
                                                                                                                 Ì¿È
41   pl. we, us, our                                  û
                                                     ¢
                                                              61   not                                            ó
                                                                                                                öŠ
42   pl. them, they, their                            ÿ
                                                    ö
                                                              62   they do / will not believe      À ü	 ó
                                                                                                   È ÷š¢Š
43   they spend / distribute ¼ » À         À ì	
                                            È Œ èü
                                                              63   sealed, closed, concluded                  ö¬»
                                                                                                               
     which, with                                    ø¥
                                                   ¢ Ž
                                                                                                        § ôë
                                                                                                        Æ Œ Œ
44
                                                              64   hearts
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                      50                                             Part: 1

     (sr.:     ¤ë
                ’ôŠ )                                        82   increased                                 ®±
                                                                                                             È ¦È
65   their ears / hearing                      àÇ
                                           öŽ 	 ø          83   painful                                   ö ó¢
                                                                                                              	È
66   pl. eye-sight, eyes                     °Ð¢
                                             Æ ¢ ¥È         84   because                                      ø¥
                                                                                                               ¢ Ž
67   covering, dimness                     Æ È ¢ 	
                                           ¨Â Ìã              85   they were                                  û
                                                                                                           ¦¢ï
68   and for them                               óÂ
                                            ö ŠÈ           86   they tell a lie          § ¯ ½   È À’ð
                                                                                                       À ¥	
69   punishment, torment                    Æ ¦Š 
                                            § Àß              87   when, whenever                               ¯¤
                                                                                                               ¦È Ê
70   Great                                   ö Üß
                                              	            88   pv. is said / told, 73, 92, 579, 602, 616   ò ë
                                                                                                               Š 	
 Ruku'         1     v: 7      1              ¸ï°
                                                              89   unto them                                 ö Š
                                                                                                                 ó
                                             ²ü¦
                                             É ¢óÈ
                                                                                                        ¾È « ó
                                                                                                    ¦ÌÂ Ê ’袊
71   the men / mankind / people
                                                              90   ni. pl. make not       ® ² »

72   who                                           ÷
                                                 ú               mischief, act not wickedly /
                                                                   corruptly
73   he says / speaks / tells, 88, 92,        ¾ì
                                              É  Œ         91   on the earth                     µ˜ ç
                                                                                                    Ê Ì°Š’ó¦	
     579, 602, 616   (vn.:   ¾ë
                             Æ Š )                          92   they said, 73, 88, 92, 579,   ¾  ¼   ¦Œ¢Š
                                                                                                               óë
74   we believe, we have faith,                  ü÷
                                                ¢ ¦¦
                                                                   602, 616

     34, 62                                                   93   only, infact, verily                       øû¤
                                                                                                             ¢ Ê
75   they are not                                ó÷
                                             ö Š¢          94   we                                       ú
                                                                                                             ¸û
76   they beguile,           ¸ ® ­   È  Ê ¢ 
                                        À ß® ¼                95   ap. those who put      ¬ ¾ ´   È  ôÐ
                                                                                                     À ¸	 ÷
     they deceive
                                                                   things right, reformers
77   but, except                                   ó¤
                                                  ¢MÊ         96   be aware, be careful,                        ó¢
                                                                                                               ¢ŠÈ
78   their person / soul      ² » À         è¢
                                         ö Ȍ ûÈ                better understand

79   they don't perceive /             À Âà ÷
                                       È Ì  Ì¢         97   ap. mischievous,       ® ² »   È Ì ÊȒè
                                                                                                     À¾ ÷
                                                                   persons, disturbance creators
     realize
80   disease, illness, sickness              Æ 
                                             µÂ÷              98   but                                        ð
                                                                                                            ú	 ó
81   therefore, then                             »
                                                 È            99   im. pl. believe, become faithful,       ¦÷ ¦
                                                                                                              ü	 ¦




                                                                   34, 62, 74, 104, 580
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                        51                                             Part: 1

100   like, as, alike                              øï
                                                  ¢ Š                guided persons
                                                                118   example                                  ò°÷
                                                                                                               ˆ Š
101   what (sign of interrogation?)                    ¢
                                                       È
                                                                119   as, like                                   ½
                                                                                                                 È
102   pl. foolish/insolent/                     ŠÇ
                                              É – è
      stupid persons
                                                                120   relative pronoun one who                 Àó
                                                                                                             ÌÄ	 M¦
103   they met, 371                   Ä ¼ ¾        ì
                                                 ¦Œ óŠ       121   kindled, lighted          ® ¼ Â    Š ÇÊ
                                                                                                           ¾ë ¬ ¦
104   we believed / became faithful,               ü÷
                                                  ¢ ¦¦

                                                                122   fire                                      Æ ¢
                                                                                                                °û
      34, 62, 74, 99, 104, 580
                                                                123   when                                     øôç
                                                                                                              ¢ Š Š
105   they went in loneliness,        Â ¾ ­       ô»
                                                ¦Š 
      secluded in privacy, they are alone                       124   lighted                  Â µ         Ó¢
                                                                                                       Ì©È – È
106   devils, devil type behavior              × Ë
                                            ú	 ¢            125   around him, his surroundings           þ·
                                                                                                              óŠ
107   ap. those who           ± Á    À  Ä  ÷
                                      È É Ž  ¬È           126   took away, carried off                  È
                                                                                                             ¤ÿ¯
      scoff / sneer / laugh
                                                                      left, abandoned                         ½Â
                                                                                                              È  «
                                                    
                                                  ¾ø
                                                                127
108   grants leave, gives respite
                                                                      in, in between                              ç
                                                                                                                	
                                                 ×
                                              ÌÀ¢äŒ
                                                                128
109   contumacy, wickedness
                                                                      pl. darkness, gloom                 © øôÛ
                                                                                                          Æ ¢ Œ Œ
                                            À ø
                                           È   à
                                                                129
110   they wander                Á ¿ ¸


      blindly in confusion                                      130   they do not see    ° ´ §      À Â	 ó
                                                                                                     È Ì Ц¢Š
111   they purchased /           Ä ° ³        ¬ ¦
                                            ¦Ì ËÊ          131   pl. deaf                                 ö
                                                                                                               Ï
      bartered
112   deception, straying                      ¨ó ôÓ
                                               ˆ Š¢Š           132   pl. dumb (sr.:       öŠ ¢
                                                                                            ð¥È)             ’ð
                                                                                                              ö ¥

113   guidance, right way, 53                     ÿ
                                                þ             133   pl. blind (sr.:          ¢
                                                                                           øßÈ)             ß
                                                                                                               ø

114   so (it did) not                               øç
                                                   ¢ Š         134   therefore they                               ç
                                                                                                               ö Š

115   fg. profited, benefited ¬ § °          ¸¥°
                                            ª ŽÈ             135   they do / will not   ¸ « °   È  ³Â¢Š
                                                                                                      À àŽ ó
                                                                      return
      (did not profit:      ¸¥° ÷
                          ª ŽÈ ¢ )                          136   or                                           ¢
                                                                                                                 ÌÂÈ
116   commerce, trade, trafficking             Æ È ¢ 	
                                               ¨° ´«            137   like                                       ½
                                                                                                                 È
117   ap. rightly directed /                 ú ¾¬ ÷
                                              	  
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                     52                                          Part: 1

138    rain-laden cloud, rainy storm         ¤Ï
                                                          155   they stood still                          ֑
                                                                                                          ¦ ¢Š
139    sky                                      øÇ
                                              É –          156   if                                           ó
                                                                                                              Š
140    thunder                                  ¾°
                                                 ßÈ        157   willed, wished                Ä ³    È –
                                                                                                            Ë
141    lightening                               ¼¥
                                                Æ Â        158   everything                     Ë òï
                                                                                                Ç  O Œ
142    they thrust / put / place        À ô
                                        È Œ à´           159   omnipotent, command,                     ¾ë
                                                                                                            	 Š
143    fingers                                 ¥ Ï¢
                                             ގ¢ È               capable, skillful
                                                                                                          ¸ï°
                                                              Ruku'        2      v: 13   2
       (sr.:     Þ¦ ¤
                  ÏÊ)                                     160   O! mankind             ² ü ¢ 
                                                                                          É ¢ó¦¢ È–
144    ears                                    À¯
                                               Æ ¦È ¦
                                                    ¦


                                                             161   im. pl. worship, 16                  ¦Ì ßÉ
                                                                                                           ¾¦ ¦
       (sr.:     À¯¢
                 Æ É É)                                      162   Sustainer, Lord, Provider, 11            §°
                                                                                                            M È
145    pl. thunderclaps                 ê	 Ï
                                         ߦ                     (pl.:       Æ ¢°È)
                                                                               §¥ ¢
       (sr.:     ˆ Š 	 ¢ )
                 ¨ìß Ï                                       163   pl. your                                    ï
                                                                                                             öŒ
146    fear, danger                            Ɗ 
                                               °À·           164   relative pronoun one who                 Àó¦
                                                                                                          ÌÄ	 MÈ
147.   death                                  ©÷
                                              Æ           165   created, molded, shaped, 253            êô»
                                                                                                            Š
148    ap. one who surrounds,                ˆ ¸
                                             Ö	 ÷            166   so that you (pl.)                      ðô
                                                                                                        öŒ M àóŠ
       encompasses
                                                                                                         À ì¬
                                                                                                        È Œ «
                                               ®ð
                                               É ¢Š 
                                                             167   pl. you may                Ä ¼ Â
149    almost, nearly
                                                                   ward off (evil), you become
150    snatches /             » ¶ ­    æŠ
                                         ؼ                   righteous / pious, 33

       takes away                                            168   created, made, 179, 267, 859           òà³
                                                                                                          Š 
151    as often, whenever                       øôï
                                               ¢ M Œ        169   for you (pl.)                             ðó
                                                                                                           öŒ Š
152    they walked                 Ä ³ ¿       Ì÷
                                             ¦          170   earth                                  Æ Ì°È
                                                                                                          µ¢
153    when                                        ¯¤
                                                  ¦È Ê       171   couch, resting place, bed              Ë Âç
                                                                                                         ¢ ¦ 	
154    became dark                  ¿ ¾ ·    öô ¢
                                               Š ’ÛÈ       172   canopy, covering                         Æ –Ž
                                                                                                              ü¥
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                         53                                               Part: 1

173   sent down, revealed, 187           ¾ ± À    ¾Ä ¢
                                                   È  ûÈ            Qur'aan (pl.:        Æ  )
                                                                                            °Ç
174   water                                           Æ –
                                                       ÷         192   like it, similar to it / him                  þ	 ’°	
                                                                                                                     ¦
                                                                                                                      ô÷
175   brought forth                   « ° ­   È  »È
                                                 «Â ¢            193   im. pl. and call           ¸ ®   ¦ Ì®¦È
                                                                                                               ß Â
176   therewith, with it                                þŽ
                                                        ¦
                                                         ¥       194   witnesses (sr.:         Ž  )
                                                                                              ¾ Ë                ¾ Ë
                                                                                                                 É ¦  
177   prep. of, by, from                                ÷
                                                      ú	        195   apart from Allah            … À® ÷
                                                                                                   Ê ¦Ê ÌÂÉ ú	
178   fruits, gains, benefits, 219                 Âø¯
                                                Ì©¦  Š         196   ap. those who are         ¼ ® ´     	 Ê ¢
                                                                                                             ú ë® Ï
      (sr.:     ¨Âø¯
                Æ   Š)                                               truthful (sr.:       ¼® Ï
                                                                                            Æ Ê ¢ )
179   ni. pl. then do not      ¾ ¸ «       ô ô ç
                                         ¦Œ à´«¢Š Š        197   then                                              È
                                                                                                                         »
      set up / appoint, 168, 267, 859
                                                                 198   if                                                  ¤
                                                                                                                         ÌÀÊ
180   partners, equivalent                         ®¾¢
                                                  ¦Å ¦ ûÈ
                                                                 199   not                                                 ó
                                                                                                                         öŠ
181   pl. you                                          ¢
                                                     öûÈ
                                                                 200   pl. you can do              ¾ ¸ »           ô
                                                                                                                 ¦Œ à’è«
182   pl. you know / are             ¿ ¾ ¸    À øŠ
                                               È  ôà«
                                                                 201   never                                               ó
                                                                                                                         úŠ
      aware (vn.:          öß
                            ’ô	 )
                                                                 202   fg. whose, that which                           ¬ó¦
                                                                                                                     	MÈ
183   if                                                 ¤
                                                       ÌÀÊ
                                                                 203   fuel                                        ® ëÂ
                                                                                                                   Æ Œ È
184   pl. you are / were                              •
                                                    öüŒ
                                                                 204   fg. its, her                                       ÿ
                                                                                                                         ¢
185   in, within                                        ç
                                                       	
                                                                 205   pl. stones                                ¨° ´·
                                                                                                                 Æ È ¢ 	
186   doubt, suspicion                               È
                                                    ¤°
                                                                 206   prepared                        ® ® ¸      ¾ß¢
                                                                                                                 Ì© 	 É
187   we revealed, 173                   ¾ ± À     ü Äû
                                                   ¢’ó 
                                                                 207   ap. disbelievers,                         ú Âç ï
                                                                                                                  Ž 	 ¢Š
188   prep. upon, on, unto                            ß
                                                    ô                those who reject faith
189   slave, servant                                  ¦
                                                     ¾ß                (sr.:    Âç ï
                                                                                 	 ¢Š )
190   im. pl. so produce / bring                       «Š
                                                    ¦’˜ç      208   im. give glad tidings                           Ì¥
                                                                                                                     Â 
191   Surah, a chapter of the                    ¨° Ç
                                                 Æ È               (good news:         Æ È ¢ )
                                                                                           ¨° Ì¥
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                   54                                         Part: 1

209   they worked, did deeds                     ô	 
                                              ¦Œ øß      229   or ought above it               ë ç øç
                                                                                              ¢ Š Š ¢ Š
210   fg. pl. righteous deeds                ¸ó Ï
                                          Ì©¢ 	¢         230   then as                                ÷˜ç
                                                                                                       ¢ ŠŠ
      (mg. pl.      À¸Ï
                    È  ó	¢ )                           231   that it / he                           þû¢
                                                                                                         È
211   that                                         ˢ
                                                   MÈ      232   truth                                 
                                                                                                       ê·
212   for them                                       ó
                                                 ö Š     233   what                                  ¯÷
                                                                                                      ¦È ¢
213   gardens (sr.:        ¨ü³
                           ˆ  )             © ü³
                                              Ç ¢        234   desired, wished, intended            ® °¢
                                                                                                      È ¦È È
214   sr. fg. flows                             Â «
                                              ÌĎ ´      235   leads astray                        òÔ
                                                                                                     N 	 
215   underneath, under                        ª «
                                                ¸       236   guides                               ¾
                                                                                                    ÌÄ	  
216   rivers (sr.:      Âû
                          )                 Æ ¢ ûÈ
                                               ° ¢         237   many                                   °ï
                                                                                                      Z	Š
217   whenever                                  øôï
                                               ¢ M Œ      238   except                                  ó¤
                                                                                                        ¢MÊ
218   pv. they are provided with                 ëÊ °
                                              ¦Œ ±É      239   ap. transgressors    ¼ ² »     	 	 ¢Š
                                                                                                  ú ìÇ ç
219   fruit (pl.:      © Âø¯
                       Æ ¦  Š)                Æ  Š
                                                ¨Âø¯       240   they break          µ ¼ À    À Ôì
                                                                                               È  Œ ü
220   this                                        À
                                                 ¦Š ÿ      241   covenant                                ß
                                                                                                      ¾ 
221   pv. are provided, are given                   «¢
                                                 ¦É     242   after it                         ¾¥ ÷
                                                                                                  	 àú	
222   similar, similitude                      ¥ ̬÷
                                            ¢ Ž¢       243   ratification (of covenant)           ° ÷
                                                                                                    ¼¢Š	
223   spouses (sr.:      «±
                         Æ ÌÂÈ )              Æ ¦È ̱È
                                              «Â ¢         244   they cut off         ¸ ¶ ¼    À àŠ
                                                                                                È  ؒì
224   pp. fg. one who is purified            ¨Â Š ÷
                                             Æ   Ø      245   commanded                             Â÷¢
                                                                                                        È
225   ap. pl. abide forever                 À¾»
                                            È Ì ó	¢     246   pv. be joined         ¾ ´ Â   Œ Ï
                                                                                                  ò 
226   disdains not
                                      ¦
                                          ¸È¢Š
                                             ¬ ó           247   ap. losers          ° ² ­   È Ì Ǣ
                                                                                                À Â	 »
227   uses a similitude,            °÷ §Â 
                                    † Š É Ž Ô         248   how                                æ ï
                                                                                                     Š
      gives an example                                     249   pl. dead               © Â ¿      « ¢
                                                                                                  ¢¦ ÷È
228   gnat, mosquito                         ¨Ó à
                                             ˆ   ¥
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                        55                                                Part: 1

250   and (he) gave you life                  ï  ˜ç
                                            öŒ ¢·ŠŠ          270    blood                                     Æ –÷Ê
                                                                                                                   ®
251   then                                                Œ
                                                          ö¯    271    we proclaim (your)          ¬ § ²     È
                                                                                                               ¶¦ û
252   pv. pl. you'll be           ¸ « °    À à «
                                            È  ³Â                praise

      returned
                                                                272    we glorify / sanctify       ² ® ¼     ²¾ìû
                                                                                                              É  Š 
253   created                                        êô»
                                                      Š       273    for Thee, for You                          îó
                                                                                                                   Š
254   for you (pl.)                                    ðó
                                                     öŒ Š      274    taught                                    öôß
                                                                                                                  M
255   all                                        à ø³
                                                ¢ 	          275    names (sr.:        ö ¦
                                                                                           ÇÊ)                ø ¢
                                                                                                               È – ÇÈ
256   turned (towards)                           ¬ ¦
                                              Ã ÇÊ
                                                 ¦
                                                                276    all (of them)                            ¢ M Œ
                                                                                                                   ôï
257   towards                                          ¤
                                                      DÊ
                                                      ¦
                                                                277    presented                               È 
                                                                                                               µÂß
258   fashioned                                   Ç
                                                 à            278    im. tell me                   § À   ŽŒ¦ûÈ
                                                                                                                û  Ž ¢
259   fg. them                                        
                                                      úÿ        279    me                                            û
                                                                                                                   Ž
260   seven                                          ÞÇ
                                                      ¦      280    these                                     óš
                                                                                                               Ê –Š ÿ
261   skies (sr.:      Æ –  )
                         øÇ                 ©¦È ¢ 
                                              Â øÇ              281    Glory to You                      ¢ ¦
                                                                                                        îû ¸ Ç
262   knower, aware                   ¿ ¾ ¸     ö ôß
                                                 	         282    for us                                       ¢Š
                                                                                                                     üó
 Ruku'        3       v: 9        3              ¸ï°           283    You taught                              øM 
                                                                                                              ª ôß
263   your Lord                                      
                                                      È       284    in truth, You ..                          îû¤
                                                                                                                  Ê
264   to, for                                             ¾
                                                          Ê     285    You                                       ª¢
                                                                                                                  ûÈ
265   angels                                  ˆ Š 	–Š 
                                              ¨ðŸ ô÷            286    All Knowing                              ö ôß
                                                                                                                 	 
266   verily I                                          û¤
                                                      Ê      286a   All Wise                                 	 
                                                                                                               ö ð·
267   ap. one who creates / places              ˆ 	 ¢
                                                òß ³            287    and when                                   øôç
                                                                                                                 ¢ Š Š
268   viceroy, vicegerent, successor            ¨è ô»
                                                ˆ Š 	         288    Did I not tell?                   ë¢ ó ¢
                                                                                                       ’òŒ ÈöŠÈ
269   will shed / pour                        î	
                                               èÈ           289    I know                                    öŠ ¢
                                                                                                                  ôßÈ
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                 56                                           Part: 1

290   pl. you reveal                       À ¾«
                                           È Ì ¦     310   got (them) out /            « ° ­   È  »È
                                                                                                      «Â ¢
291   pl. you hide             ¿ © ½    À ø¬
                                         È  ’ð«          expelled
                                                         311   dl. they (two) were                      ¢ ï
                                                                                                        Šû¢Š
292   im. pl. bow down,        ® « ²      ¾´ ¦
                                         ¦Ì  ÇÉ
      prostrate
                                                               (sr.:   Àï
                                                                       È ¢Š )
293   Iblees, Satan                            ô¤
                                            Æ	 ¥Ê     312   im. pl. get down, alight,                ؎ ¦
                                                                                                     ¦Œ ¦ÿÊ
294   refused                                     ¢
                                                 9È            disembark
                                                         313   some                                    Ò¥
                                                                                                        à
295   became haughty           ° § ½    ¦ ¬ ¦
                                          ’ðÇÊ
                                                         314   enemy                                    K ß
                                                                                                        ¾
296   (he) became / was                        Àï
                                               È ¢Š
                                                         315   pp. destination,                      Š ÷
                                                                                                     Âì¬È
297   im. dwell, live           À ½ ²       ð ¦
                                           úŒ ÇÉ            dwelling place

298   im. dl. eat                                ôï
                                                ¢Š Œ     316   means of livelihood,                    Æ ¢
                                                                                                       ¸ ¬÷
                                                               provisions, goods
      plentifully                              ¾ã°
                                              ¦ Š È
                                                                                                        ú ·
                                                                                                         	
299
                                                         317   period, time
      wherever, anywhere                     ® ·
                                             Π
                                                                                                       ìô¬ç
                                                                                                       Š Š
300
                                                         318   thereafter (he) learnt
      dl. you desired / wished                ø¬ Ë
                                             ¢ ’ 	
                                                                                ¨øôï
                                                                                ˆ  	Š )           øôï
                                                                                                 ©¢ 	 Š
301
                                                         319   words (sr.:
      (sr.     Ë
              È – )
                                                         320   turned towards                   ôß § «
                                                                                               Š  È ¢
      ni. dl. do not go near               ¥Â « ó
                                         ¢ ’좊
                                                                                                      § «
                                                                                                      Æ ¦ 
302                            § ° ¼
                                                         321   ap. oft-returning, one who
303   this                                     ÁÀ
                                               Ê	 ÿ            forgives

304   tree                                  ¨Â´Ë
                                            Æ         322   and if, then whenever                      ÷œç
                                                                                                         ¢ ŽŠ
305   dl. you (will) become                  û «
                                            ¢Œð       323   comes to you (pl.)                  ðü«
                                                                                                 öŒ 	’˜
306   made (them) slip                         ¾±¢
                                               M ÈÈ      324   from me                                    ü÷
                                                                                                        	
307   dl. they both                             øÿ
                                               ¢       325   followed                                  Þ¦«
                                                                                                          
308   from                                       ß
                                                ú       326   my guidance                            Ä ¾ÿ
                                                                                                      È ¦ 
309   fg. it / her                                ÿ
                                                 ¢      327   fear                                   »»
                                                                                                      Æ 
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                       57                                                Part: 1

328   on them                                        ß
                                              öŽ ô               become
                                                               347   the first, prime                            ¾Â¢
                                                                                                                 È MÈ
329   grief, sorrow                            À·
                                               Æ Ä
                                                               348   ni. pl. do not sell   Ä ° ³        Â ó
                                                                                                     ¦Ì ¬Ì«¢Š
330   they rejected faith,      ° » ½         Š Š
                                           ¦Ì èï
      they disbelieved
                                                               349   my signs                                     «
                                                                                                                	¢ ¦
                                                                                                                      ¦




331   they belied                 § ¯ ½       ¥ÀŠ
                                            ¦M ï           350   price                                        ¢ Š
                                                                                                                   üø¯
332   our signs                                 ü«¢
                                               ¢	Š ¦¦

                                                               351   little, small                               ôë
                                                                                                                † 	 Š
333   companions of the          °ü §¸ ¢
                                 Ê ¢ó¦É ¢ ÏÈ               352   ni. pl. do not cover /               Ȏ ó
                                                                                                       ¦ ¦’ô«¢Š
      fire, inhabitants of the fire                                  confound
 Ruku'       4      v: 10       4              ¸ï°
                                                               353   falsehood                                  ò	 ¢
                                                                                                                 ×¥
                                                     
                                                    ¢
                                                                                                          ø¬ ó
                                                                                                       ¦ ’𫢊
334   O!
                                                               354   ni. pl. do not conceal,
                                    ò Ÿ  ¤ ü¥
                                    Š 	¡ ÇÊŽ
                                                                                      öï
                                                                                       ¬Š )
335   children of Isreal
                                                                     hide (vn.:
                                               Âï
                                            ¦Ì Œ ̯¦
                                                                                                                 ø ë¢
                                                                                                              ¦ 	 È
336   im. pl. remember, recall
                                                               355   im. pl. perform,
      call to mind
                                                                     be steadfast in
                                                  ç¢
                                               ¦Œ ÌÂÈ
                                                                                                                àŠ
                                                                                                             ¦ ïÌ°¦
337   im. pl. fulfill
                                                               356   im. pl. bow down,
338   covenant, promise                            ß
                                                ¾                  bend down

339   I (shall) fulfill                        Ê ¢
                                               »ÌÂÉ            357   those that bow down                    ú àï °
                                                                                                             	 	 ¦È
340   me alone                                  Ä ¤
                                                È ¢Ê          358   do? (what?)                                      ¢
                                                                                                                      È
341   im. pl. and fear me,     § Á °     À ¦ ç
                                         Ê ÿÌ°¢Š          359   pl. you enjoin             ° ¿ ¦   È Ì  ’˜«
                                                                                                            À Â÷
      and have awe of me,                                      360   right conduct, piety,                          Ž
                                                                                                                    ¥
342   I revealed / have sent down            ªÄ¢
                                              ’ó ûÈ               righteousness

343   ap. that which confirms                 ë¾Ð÷
                                             ¢†             361   pl. you forget             Ä ² À     È  ü
                                                                                                             À È«
344   (for) that which                             øó
                                                  ¢ 	         362   yourselves             ² » À    öŒ  ŒèûÈ
                                                                                                          ðÈ ¢
345   pl. with you                              ð 
                                              öŒ à÷           363   pl. you read / recite        ¾ ©     È Œ ¬«
                                                                                                              Àô
346   ni. pl. be not, do not                 û ð ó
                                          ¦Œ «¢Š         364   will then (you) not                           ôç¢
                                                                                                                  ¢Š Š È
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                     58                                              Part: 1

365    pl. you understand /    ¾ ¼ ¸     À ô	
                                          È Œ ìà«       381    intercession             ¸ » ³    ˆ  ¢Š 
                                                                                                         ¨ß èË
       think
                                                             382    pv. pl. they shall be   ° ´ À    À Â
                                                                                                      È ÌÂ Ðü
366    im. pl. seek help                    ü ଠ¦
                                         ¦	 ÇÊ                helped
367    indeed hard                          ¨Â ¦ðó
                                            Æ  ŽŠ Š       383    pv. shall not be taken             À ó
                                                                                                       Œ »š¢Š
368    ap. those who are      ¸ ³ ­    ú àË »
                                         	 	 ¢           384    compensation                              ¾ ß
                                                                                                              Æ ¾
       humble
                                                             385    pl. we delivered you    Â « À      ï ü ´û
                                                                                                      öŒ ¢ 
369    they bear in mind        À À ·     À üÜ
                                           È Œ 
                                                             386    people, followers                           ¾
                                                                                                                Ȧ ¦




370    that they                                   û¢
                                               ö È
                                                             387    Pharaoh (A cruel king               Àß ç
                                                                                                        È  Â	
371    ap. those who are going to               ë ô÷
                                             ¦Œ ¢Š               in the time of Prophet Moses             X)
       meet
                                                                    they afflict,                      À ÷ È
                                                                                                       È   
                                          À àŽ °
                                         È  ³¦È
                                                             388
372    ap. those who           ¸ « °
                                                                    they cause severe pains
       return
                                                             389    evil                                       Ç
                                                                                                              È 
                                              ¸ï°
 Ruku'          5     v: 7     5
                                                             390    punishment, chastisement                   Àß
                                                                                                             §¦Š 
 1st Part           1/4              C¦    Ä
                                              ³   Þ¥°        391    to slaughter                               ¶¥È
                                                                                                                  ¯
                                                             392    sons, male-children (sr.:     ú¦   ü¢
                                                                                                   ¥Ê ) È –¥È
373.   that I                                       û¢
                                                  È
                                                             393    they spare / let live         À ¬
                                                                                                  È ¸È
374.   I preferred,           ¾ µ »      ª Ԋ
                                           ’ô ç
       I gave preference                                     394    women                                       Èû
                                                                                                               – Ž
375    im. pl. and beware / guard              ì« Â
                                            ¦Œ ¦È         395    and therein, and in that     öŒ 	 ¯	 È
                                                                                                   ðó çÂ
                                                                                                         ¦




376    day                                      ÷ 
                                               ¢          396    trial                                        ô¥
                                                                                                               Æ –Š 
377    fg. shall not avail     Ä ± «      Ä «ó
                                         ÌÎ ´¢Š          397    pl. your Lord                            öŒ È
                                                                                                               ð¥°
378    soul                                    ’è
                                              Æû             398    tremendous, great                        ö Üß
                                                                                                              	 
379    with regard to, about                        ß
                                                  ú        399    when                                            ¤
                                                                                                                  ̯Ê
380    pv. shall not be        ¾ § ¼    Œ ¦’좊
                                           ò ó              400.   We divided / separated     ¼ ° »       ¢’ë Š
                                                                                                               ü Âç
       accepted
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                     59                                           Part: 1

401   pl. for you                                   ð¥
                                                  öŒ Ž      421    thunderbolt, thunder and         ˆ Š 	 ¢
                                                                                                     ¨ìß Ï
402   sea                                          ¸
                                                  Â ¥               lightning
                                                             422    raised up                           ˆ à
                                                                                                        ®¥
403   we drowned                                ü ¢
                                               ¢’ë ’ãÈ
                                                             423    we gave shadow           ¾ ¾ ·     ü ôÛ
                                                                                                       ¢’ôM Š
404   pl. you were seeing      ° · À     À ÂÜ
                                         È Ì Œ ü«
                                                             424    cloud                               ¿ øã
                                                                                                        Æ ¢ Š
405   We promised                              û ß
                                              ¢¾ ¦È
                                                             425    grains like those of                úø ¦
                                                                                                          ’óÈ
406   forty                                    ú ॠ¢
                                                	 Ì°È            coriander seeds

                       ó ó
                     	¢Š)                       ô ó
                                                  ¨Š Š                                                   Ç
                                                                                                     à ’ô
                                                                                                        ¦

407   night (pl.:                                            426    quails

408   then                                          Œ
                                                    ö¯       427    im. pl. eat                            ôï
                                                                                                        ¦Œ Œ
409   pl. you took              ¯ ­ ¦      « ¼«¦
                                          ö’À Ê        428    pl. good things        § Ä ¶   Ê ¢Š
                                                                                                      © ¦×
410   calf                                      ò ß
                                                ˆ ´	        429    they wronged                         øŠ Š
                                                                                                      ¦ ôÛ
411   after him
                                          ¦
                                            ¾¥ ÷
                                           Á	 àú	        430.   but                                  ú	 ó
                                                                                                           ð
412   evil doers,              ¿ ¾ ·     ÀøÛ
                                          È  ó	¢Š        431    this                                    Ê	 ÿ
                                                                                                            ÁÀ
      wrong doers
                                                             432    town, township                          ˆ Š
                                                                                                            ¨ ë
413   We pardoned                                û èß
                                                ¢Š 
                                                             433    wherever                           ® ·
                                                                                                       Π
414   after that                 îó ¾ ¥ ÷
                                  	 ¯	 àú	
                                     ¦



                                                             434    pl. you wished                        ¬Ë
                                                                                                        ö’ 	
415   The Scripture to differentiate               ëç
                                                ÌÀ¢Š Œ
      between right and wrong
                                                             435    plentifully                          ¾ã°
                                                                                                        ¦ Š È
416   im. pl. turn (in repentance)                 ¥ «
                                                ¦       436    gate                                 Æ ¢
                                                                                                         §¥
417   Maker, Creator                            Æ Ê ¢
                                                ¥° ¥         437    prostrating                        ¾´Ç
                                                                                                      ¦  
418   till, until                                 ¬·
                                                          438    im. pl. say                            ó ë
                                                                                                        ¦ŒŒ
419   we see                                        û
                                                 Ã Â
                                                    ¦
                                                             439    forgiveness                         ¨Ø·
                                                                                                        ˆM 	
420   openly, manifestly                        ¨Â ³
                                                Å         440    we (will) forgive                      èû
                                                                                                         Â	 ä
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                    60                                             Part: 1

441   pl. your faults /                   ï  Ø»
                                        öŒ ¢¢Š           460   drinking place, place for            Æ  Ì
                                                                                                       §Â ÷
      transgressions                                              water
442   soon, in near future                          ²
                                                    È       461   im. pl. eat                                ôï
                                                                                                          ¦Œ Œ
443   we will increase                ® Ä ±    ¾ Äû
                                                 Ž     462   im. pl. drink             § ° ³   ¦ÂËÊ
                                                                                                          ¥ ¦
444   ap. those who do good              ú üÈ ÷
                                          ŽÊ ¸          463   ni. pl. don't act          ª ¸   ¦Šà¢Š
                                                                                                          °« ó
445   but, then                                    »
                                                   È              corruptly
                                                            464   food                                    Æ ¢ Š
                                                                                                          ¿ à×
446   changed, substituted                       ¾¾¥
                                                 È 
                                                            465   one                                    ¾· Â
                                                                                                          	 ¦È
447   wrath, plague, scourge                     Ä °
                                                ¦ ³Ê
                                                            466   im. pl. thus call upon,      Â ¸ ®    ¸ ç
                                                                                                         É Ì®¢Š
448   they infringe /           ¼ ² »    À ìÈ
                                           È Œ  ’è          pray
      transgress
                                                ¸ï°
                                                            467   for us                                      üó
                                                                                                             ¢Š
 Ruku'        6      v: 13        6

449   asked / prayed for water               ¬ ¦
                                         ìÈÇÊ           468   brings forth, 310          « ° ­   Ì«Ž ¼
                                                                                                          Â
450   im. strike                              Â ¦
                                            ̧Ž ÓÊ         469   fg. grows, germinates      © § À      ¦ü
                                                                                                          ªŽ «
      (vn.:       §Ó
                  Æ Â )                                   470   herbs, vegetables                         ò¥
                                                                                                            ˆ ’ì
451   staff                                      Ðß
                                                ¢         471   cucumbers                                Æ –M	
                                                                                                             °ë
452   stone, rock                                 ´·
                                                Â        472   wheat                                     ¿ç
                                                                                                            Æ Œ
453   gushed forth           ° « »       Â´è ¦
                                        Ì©  Š ûÊ        473   lentils, a kind of pulse               Æ 
                                                                                                         ²¾ß
454   twelve                          ¨ÂÌß ¬ü ¦
                                      È    ¢’¯Ê       474   onions                                  òÐ¥
                                                                                                          ˆ 
455   spring, fountain (pl.:          Æ  ) ¢
                                      À ß ü ß             475   pl. you exchange    ¾ ® §   È Œ¾¦¬È«
                                                                                                 À ó	 
456   certainly                                       ë
                                                    ¾Š     476   lower (grade)                               ¢
                                                                                                           GÌ®È
457   knew                            ¿ ¾ ¸    öôß
                                                 	       477   good, (better)                            
                                                                                                           »
458   all                                         òï
                                                  NŒ        478   big city, metropolis                     ÷
                                                                                                           Ð	
459   people                                    Æ ¢É
                                                ² û¢        479   pl. you demanded / asked                 ¬ ˜Ç
                                                                                                         ö’óŠ
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                             61                                               Part: 1

480    pv. fg. (was) covered /§ ° µ                 ŽÓ
                                                 ª¥Â             499   we raised                   ¸ » °     ¢àŠ È
                                                                                                                     ü ç°
       struck / hit
                                                                     500   over, above, 690                              ¼ç
                                                                                                                         È Š
481    humiliation, abasement                              ¨ó¯
                                                           ˆ MÊ
                                                                     501   name of a mountain, 691                       Æ Œ
                                                                                                                         °×
482    poverty                                   ¨üð ÷
                                                 ˆ Š È
                                                                     502   pl. you turned back / away, 621           ¬ ó «
                                                                                                                   öM
483    they made themselves entitled                         ¥
                                                         ¦É –
                                                                     503   if                                                  ó
                                                                                                                             Š
484    they kill, 544, 666, 1072¾ © ¼           À ô¬
                                                 È Œ ’ì
                                                                     504   verily                                           ìó
                                                                                                                          ¾Š Š
485    prophets (sr.:          ¦û
                                Ž)                     ú ¦û
                                                          Ž
                                                                     505   they transgressed /                       ¾¬ ¦
                                                                                                                  ¦Ì ßÊ
486    they disobeyed                                   Ðß
                                                     ¦                 went beyond the limit
       (vn.:       À ß
                   Æ ¢Ð	 )                                         506   Sabbath, Saturday                     ªÈ¦
                                                                                                                  ¦ óÈ
487    they transgress                 Â ® ¸   À ¾
                                                 È Ì ¬à         507   apes, monkeys (sr.:      ®ë
                                                                                                    Æ Â	 )             ¨®Âë
                                                                                                                        ÆÈ  	
 Ruku'         7       v: 2        7                     ¸ï°
                                                                     508   pl. despised, rejected                		 ¢
                                                                                                                ú  Ç »
                                                        ®ÿ
                                                     ¦ÌÂÉ ¢
                                                                                                                     ðû
                                                                                                                    † ¢Š 
488    they became Jews
                                                                     509   deterrent, example
                                                     Ðû
                                                 Ã °¢ 
                                                     ¦

489    Christians
                                                                     510   before them, in their                 ¾ ú ¥
                                                                                                               ÌÄ  
490    Sabians                                   ú  ¥ Ï
                                                  	Ž¢                   presence

491    the last day                      ¨Â» ¿ 
                                         Ê  	 ¢’ó¦É 
                                                 ¦
                                                                     511   vn. succeeding, behind                   æ’ô
                                                                                                                       »
       (of resurrection)                                             512   lesson, admonition        · ¸ Â     ¨Üß ÷
                                                                                                                ˆ Š 	 
492    worked, acted                                     òøß
                                                         Š 	        513   commands, orders                   ° ¿ ¦     ’˜
                                                                                                                         Â÷
493    righteous, good                             ¸ó Ï
                                                  ¢ 	¢             514   that                                               ¢
                                                                                                                            ÌÀÈ
494    their reward / remuneration                 ÿÂ ¢
                                                 ö  ³È           515   cow                                           Æ Š 
                                                                                                                         ¨Âì¥
495    with Lord                              °¾ß
                                            Ì§È  ü	               516   to make fun                                   ÂÄÿ
                                                                                                                        ¦Å  
496    grieved, became sad, 814                          ÀÄ·
                                                         È Ž        517   I take refuge                                ¯ ߢ
                                                                                                                        É  È
497    we took                                        û »¢
                                                     ¢’À È         518   im. beseech, call upon, pray                  ¸¦
                                                                                                                         É Ì®É
498.   convenant, bond                               ¼ ° ÷
                                                     Æ ¢Š	
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                   62                                              Part: 1

519   make clear                                  ¦
                                                ú     538   field, farm                            Æ Â
                                                                                                        ª·
520   what she is like                       ÿ ÷
                                              	 ¢        539   pp. without any defect,               ¨ ô ÷
                                                                                                       ˆ øM È
521   says                                     ¾ì
                                               É Œ           physically fit, (sound)
                                                           540   without any scar,                      ¨Ë ó
                                                                                                        Š 	 ¢Š
522   not old aged                       µ° ç ó
                                         Æ Ê ¢Š ¢Š              unblemished

523   too young                                 Â ¥
                                                 ’ðŽ      541   now                                       ú¢
                                                                                                             ’óÈ
524   between, middle                        Æ ¦ 
                                             À ß          542   you came                                ª³
                                                                                                          ’ Ž
525   im. pl. do, act , perform                ô ¦
                                            ¦Œ à’çÊ      543   they almost did not               ®ï ÷
                                                                                                ¦ÌÂÉ ¢Š ¢
526   that which, whatever                          ÷
                                                   ¢       Ruku'        8      v: 10   8                 ¸ï°


527   pv. pl. you are          ° ¿ ¦    À Â «
                                         È Ì ÷š       544   pl. you killed             ¾ © ¼     ö’ôŠ
                                                                                                            ‘
                                                                                                        ¬ ° ®¦
                                                                                                     öÌ È ¦M Ê
      commanded
                                                           545   pl. you fell into a         ° ®
528   her / its color                             û ó
                                               ¢ Š            dispute
      (pl.:      ¢
               À¦ ’óÈ)                                    546   ap. one who brings forth              Æ Â¼
                                                                                                       «Ž ÷
529   yellow                               ÂÏ
                                          É ¡ ’è         547   pl. you hide / conceal¿ © ½    À ø¬
                                                                                                 È  ’ð«
530   bright                                    Þë ç
                                                 	 ¢Š     548   with some of it                         Ô ¦¥
                                                                                                      ¢ 	 àŽ
531   delights, gladdens             ° ° ²    ÂÈ«
                                                       549   thus, in this way                     	 ÀŠ
                                                                                                      îó ï
                                                                                                            ¦




532   ap. onlookers,           ° · À    ú ÂÛ û
                                          Ž 	 ¢       550   brings to life                          ̎ ¸
                                                                                                          
      beholders
533   became dubious, resembling,           þ¥ Ì«
                                             ¢         551   pl. dead                                     ÷
                                                                                                          «
      ambiguous                                                  (sr.:       ª÷
                                                                               )
534   willed, wished                             Ë
                                                È –       552   shows you (pl.)            Ä   °   öŒ Ž 
                                                                                                         ð Â
535   used for any sort of work              Æ ŒÈ
                                             ¾ ó¯          553   pl. signs                               Ì©¢ ¦
                                                                                                                ¦




536   fg. tills /         °  ª    µ ˜  	«
                                    È Ì°Š’ó¦ °       554   pl. you understand                    È Œ ìà«
                                                                                                       À ô	
      ploughs the earth
537   fg. waters (the field)                  ì «
                                            	 È        555   then, thereafter                               ö¯
                                                                                                                Œ
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                     63                                             Part: 1

556    fg. Hardened                                Èë
                                                 ª Š       572   desired, coveted                       Þø×
                                                                                                          Š
       (vn.:    ¨Â Èë
                Æ È ¢ Š )                                   573   that                                           ¢
                                                                                                                ÌÀÈ
557    hearts (sr.:      ¤ë
                          ’ôŠ )                 Æ Œ Œ
                                                 § ôë        574   surely                                         ë
                                                                                                                ¾Š
558    thus                                          »
                                                     È       575   a group, a party                       ê Âç
                                                                                                           Ž Š
559    fg. she, (they: used here as a               	
                                                    ÿ       576   they change / alter                À ç 
                                                                                                      È Œ  ¸
       pronoun referring to        § ôë
                                   Æ Œ Œ ,                 577   they understood                          ôŠ 
                                                                                                         ¦Œ ìß
       a broken plural)
                                                             578   they met                                   ì
                                                                                                           ¦Œ óŠ
560.   like                                           ½
                                                      È
                                                             579   they said / spoke                          óë
                                                                                                           ¦Œ¢Š
561    rocks, stones                           Æ È ¢ 	·
                                               ¨° ´
                                                                   (vn.:      ¾ë
                                                                              Æ Š )
       (sr.:    ´·
                  )
                                                             580   we believed, 34, 62, 74, 99, 104          ü÷
                                                                                                            ¢ ¦¦




562    or                                               ¢
                                                      ÌÂÈ
                                                             581   was in privacy, got privacy, 105          ô»
                                                                                                            ¢Š 
563.   worse, more severe                          ¾Ë¢
                                                    È
                                                                   (vn.:      Æ  ’ô )
                                                                              ¨ »
564    hard, 556                      Â ² ¼    ¨ ë
                                                Æ  Ȋ
                                                             582   pl. you tell / narrate             À ¯¾ «
                                                                                                      È Œ ¸
565    for indeed, verily                            øó
                                                    ¢ Š
                                                             583   that which                                 ø¥
                                                                                                             ¢ Ž
566    gushes out, bursts forth                 ´Š 
                                                  è¬
                                                             584   revealed, disclosed, opened              ¶¬ç
                                                                                                             Š
567    rivers                                           ¢
                                                  °¢ ûÈ
                                                             585   to / unto / on you (pl.)               ð ôß
                                                                                                        öŒ Š 
       (sr.:      )
                Âû
                                                             586   they argue / controverse          À ³ ¸
                                                                                                     È  – 
568    splits asunder                ¼ ¼ ³     êìÌ
                                                 M  
                                                             587   they hide / conceal                 À ÂÈ
                                                                                                       È ÌÂ Ê 
569    falls down                     ¶ § Á    ֎ 
                                                Œ ¦ 
                                                                   (secret:    Ç
                                                                               Â	 ;       secrets:     Â ¢
                                                                                                     °¦ ÇÈ)
570    fear of Allah                     þô ¨ »
                                         	 M ó¦Œ Ì
                                                             588   they proclaim                        À ü	
                                                                                                        È ôà
571    pl. do you then       ¸ ¿ ¶    À à Š ¢
                                       È  ø’جçÈ
       covet?, do you then have any hope?                          (vn.:      Àô ¦
                                                                              Æ ¢Š ßÊ)
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                     64                                             Part: 1

589    pl. illiterate / unlettered            À ÷¢
                                              È  É       605   or                                             ¢
                                                                                                                Ì¿È
       (people)
                                                             606   yes!, why not!                              ¥
                                                                                                             ô
590    except                                         ó¤
                                                     ¢MÊ
                                                             607   who                                          ÷
                                                                                                              ú
591    ambitions, desires                         û ÷¢
                                                   Ž¢ È
                                                             608   earned, gained            § ² ½    ¤Èï
                                                                                                         Š
592    if (if      ¤                  ó¤
                ÌÀÊ is followed by ¢MÊ then
                                                             609   evil, wrong                              ˆ Š
                                                                                                            ¨ Ç
       the meaning of         ¤
                            ÌÀÊ will be "nothing")
                                                                   (pl.:           Ç
                                                                                ©¢Š )
 1st Part                 1/2        C¦    Ä
                                              ³   æÐû
                                                             610   fg. surrounded,                     × ·¢
                                                                                                     ªŠ ¢ È
593    woe, destruction, ruin                      òÂ
                                                   ˆ È           encompassed (vn.:          ˆ Š ¢ Ê)
                                                                                              ¨× ·¤
594    they write                § © ½    À ¦¬
                                           È ’ð       611   error, mistake                         ˆ Š	 
                                                                                                          ¨  Ø»
595    their hands                                 ¾¢
                                             öŽ 	 È           (pl.:        Æ ¢Š	  )
                                                                                ©   Ø»
       (sr.:      ¾
                   )                                       Ruku'         9        v: 11   9             ¸ï°



596    price, cost, value                           üø¯
                                                   ¢ Š     612   parents                             ú ¾ó Â
                                                                                                       Ž  	¦È
597    they earn / gain         § ² ½    À ¦È 
                                          È Ê ’ð        613   relatives, kindred            9Œ ó¦ÌÃÊ
                                                                                                    ì ¯
598.   not, never                                      ó
                                                     úŠ     614   orphans, 1059                              ¬
                                                                                                           ÷¢
599    will touch us              ² ² ¿     üÈ «
                                            ¢ ø               (sr.:         	)
                                                                                ö ¬
600    days                                         ÷ ¢
                                                   ¢ ¢È    615   pl. poor, needy, miserable       ú ï È÷
                                                                                                     	 ¢ 
       (sr.:      Æ )
                  ¿                                         616   im. pl. say, speak                         ó ë
                                                                                                           ¦ŒŒ
601    a certain number                     ¨® ¾ 
                                            Å È ÌÂ à÷      617   polite manner, fair                     ü ·
                                                                                                          ¢È
602    im. say                                         ë
                                                     ’òŒ     618   im. pl. establish                         ø ë¢
                                                                                                          ¦ 	 È
603    covenant, promise                           ¾ß
                                                          619   im. pl. give                              ¦ ¦
                                                                                                                « ¦




604    will do against, will act             æ	
                                              ô¼         620   religious tax to purify the               ±
                                                                                                          ¨ïÈ
       contrary                                                    assets
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                     65                                         Part: 1

621   pl. you turned away                     ¬ ó «
                                            öM          640   does                                 ò
                                                                                                        Œ à’è
622   few, very few                                ô  ôë
                                                  ¢† 	 Š    641   disgrace                           û
                                                                                                      Æ Ä	
623   pl. amongst / of you                     ð÷
                                             öŒ ü	         642   life                                    ·
                                                                                                        ¨
624   pl. you                                       ¢
                                                  öûÈ     643   pv. they will be brought         À ® Â
                                                                                                    È ÌÂN  
625   ap. backsliders                    À ӎ ÷
                                         È  Âà                back
                                                             644   towards, to                              ¤
                                                                                                           DÊ
626   houses                                      ° ®
                                                  Æ ¢Ê
                                                             645   most severe                            È
                                                                                                         ¾Ë¢
      (sr.:     °®
                Æ ¦È )
                                                             646   and no / nor                            ÷Â
                                                                                                          ¢ È
627   pl. you have ratified                   « ¢
                                            öÌ° ’ëÈ
                                                             647   of what                                 øß
                                                                                                          ¢ 
628   pl. you witness                    À¾ «
                                         È ÌÂ  Ì
                                                             648   pv. will be lightened /          æè
                                                                                                     M ¼
629   these (folk / people)                  ó£ ÿ
                                           Ê –ŠÉ –                decreased

630   pl. you support         ° Á ·    À Â Ü«
                                        È Ì ÿ¢Š          649   pv. they will be helped        È Ì Ðü
                                                                                                  À Â
      one another                                             Ruku'        10     v: 4   10             ¸ï°

631   sin                                           ö¤
                                                     ’¯Ê    650   verily, assuredly, no doubt              ìó
                                                                                                          ¾Š Š
632   transgression, to exceed the         Æ ¦È ¾
                                           ÀÂ ß              651   we gave                              ¢ ¦
                                                                                                         ü «  ¦




      limits
                                                                                                          ü èë
                                                                                                        ¢M Š
                                             ï «
                                           öŒ ’¢
                                                             652   we followed up             Ä » ¼
633   they come to you (pl.)
                                                             653   son of Mary                         ÷ ú¦
                                                                                                 ö  ¥Ê
                                               Ǣ
                                           Ã °¢ É
                                              ¦

634   captives
                                                             654   pl. clear (signs)                 © ü¥
                                                                                                     Ç ¢
635   pl. you ransom             Ä ® »       ® è«
                                            ÌÂÉ ¢Š 
                                                             655   we supported / strengthened            û ¢
                                                                                                         ¢¾È
636   pp. unlawful, forbidden                ¿Â¸÷
                                             Æ  
                                                             656   Messengers                             Ç°
                                                                                                        ’ò É
637   so what                                       øç
                                                   ¢ Š
                                                                   (sr.:        Ç°
                                                                           ¾ É )
638   recompense, reward                       ij
                                             É ¡ 
                                                             657   The Holy Spirit             ¾ì ¬ °
                                                                                              ² Œ ó¦É ÌÂÉ
639   whosoever, who                                  ÷
                                                    ú            (i.e., the Angel Gabriel or Jibra'eel)
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                     66                                           Part: 1

658   is then?                                     Ȣ
                                                   È È       677   which they           » ° ¸   ¦Œ Âߢ
                                                                                                      ç  ÷
659   whenever                                    øôï
                                                 ¢ M Œ            recognised
                                                             678   evil is that which                   øÈ ¥
                                                                                                       ¢  ’ Ž
660   came                                         ³
                                                  È –
                                                             679   they sold                             ¬ ¦
                                                                                                      ¦Ì ËÊ
661   Messenger                                Ç°
                                            ¾ È
                                                             680   that                                        ¢
                                                                                                             ÌÀÈ
                                              « ó
                                         à  ¢Š
                                            ¦



                                                                                                        Âè
                                                                                                     ¦Ì Œ ’ð
662   desired not
                                                             681   they disbelieve, reject faith
                                            ðÈè ¢
                                         öŒ  Œ ûÈ
                                                                                                            ¥
                                                                                                           ¢ä
663   pl. yourselves,         ² » À
                                                             682   to rebel / revolt, insolence
      your hearts
664   pl. you became arrogant             «¦ ¬ ¦
                                        öÂ’ðÇÊ         683   they incurred / drew upon                 ¥
                                                                                                          É –
                                                                   themselves
                                                  ì Âç
                                                 ¢† Ž Š
                                                                                                         ú ÷
                                                                                                          Ž 
665   a group, a party
                                                             684   ap. humiliating, disgraceful
                                            À ô¬
                                           È Œ ’ì«
                                                                                                           °Â
                                                                                                         È ¡È È
666   pl. you slay / kill       ¾ © ¼
                                                             685   besides, after
                                                    óë
                                                 ¦Œ¢Š
                                                                                                             öó
                                                                                                             	
667   they said
                                                             686   why?
                                                   ôë
                                                §Œ Œ
                                                                                                  þô   ¦ ¢
                                                                                                  	 M ó¦È –ŽûÈ
668   hearts
                                                             687   Prophets of Allah
                 ¤ë
                  ’ôŠ )
                                                                           ¦û
                                                                            Ž)
      (sr.:
                                                                   (sr.:
                                                æã
                                                 ’ôŒ
                                                                                                        ò ß
                                                                                                        ˆ ´	
669   wrapping, covering
                                                             688   calf
                                                      ¥
                                                    ’ò
                                                                                                         ü ç°
                                                                                                       ¢àŠ È
670   nay, but
                                                             689   we raised                ¸ » °

                                                   úàó
                                                    Š
                                                                                                          ¼ç
                                                                                                          È Š
671   cursed
                                                             690   above, over
                                                      ÿ
                                                    ö
                                                                                                             ×
                                                                                                          °Œ
672   them, they
                                                             691   name of a mountain
                                                     øó
                                                    ¢ Š
                                                                                                           À»
                                                                                                        ¦ÌŒ 
673   when
                                                             692   im. pl. hold
                                           Æ  
                                           ¼¾Ð÷
                                                                                                          ¨ì
                                                                                                          Ç  Œ ¥Ž
674   ap. that which confirms
                                                             693   firmly, with strength
                                             à÷ øó
                                         ö   ¢ 	
                                                                                                      à Â
                                                                                                  ¦ øǦÈ
675   what was with them
                                                             694   im. pl. and listen   ¸ ¿ ²

                                       À ¸	 
                                      È  ¬’è¬È
                                                                                                        ü Ðß
                                                                                                       ¢ 
676   they ask for          ¬ © »
                                                             695   we disobeyed / denied
      victory
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                     67                                            Part: 1

696   pv. pl. they were     § ° ³         ¥ ¢
                                        ¦ŽÂËÉ           716    one thousand                              ’óÈ
                                                                                                             æ¢
      filled of, (they were made to drink)
                                                             717    year                                         üÇ
                                                                                                                ¨
697   gives command                   ° ¿ ¦    Â÷
                                                  ’˜
                                                             718.   not that / it                             ¢
                                                                                                            ÿ ÷
698   if it is                          ûï ¤
                                      ª¢Š ÌÀÊ
                                                             719    ap. one who can save,            ¬Ž  ÷
                                                                                                     Æ Ä·Ä
699   home of the Hereafter       ¨Â» ° ¾ ¦
                                  É  	 ¢’ó¦É ¦ óÈ
                                       ¦



                                                                    remover
700   with Allah                        þô ¾ ß
                                        	 M ó¦ ü	         720    beholder, one who sees                  Х
                                                                                                            	 
701   exclusively, specially               ¨Ðó »
                                           †  	¢            Ruku'         11      v: 10   11             ¸ï°


                                                                                                            K ß
                                                                                                            ¾
                                ²ü À ® ÷
                                Ê ¢ó¦Ê ÌÂÉ ú	
                                                             721.   enemy
702   not for others of
      mankind                                                722    leave, permission                           À¤
                                                                                                                Æ Ì¯Ê
703   im. pl. long for, wish for                 üø«
                                              ¦         723.   glad tidings                       Ã ÂÌ
                                                                                                            ¥
                                                                                                            ¦




704   always, ever, forever, eternal               ¾¥¢
                                                  ¦ È      724    the angel Gabriel       X          Š Ž ¦Ž
                                                                                                       ò³
705   fg. sent before                         ÷¾ë
                                            ª  Š          725    the angel Michael X                   ¾ ð ÷
                                                                                                          È ¢Š 	
706   their hands                                 ¾¢
                                            öŽ 	 È      726    ap. those who rebel              À ì	 ç
                                                                                                     È Œ Ç¢Š
707   Aware, Knower                             ö ôß
                                                 	               against Allah's commands, 448

708   you will indeed find, 803             À¾´¬ó
                                            M  Ž Š                (sr.:    êÇ ç
                                                                              	 ¢Š )
709   most greedy                          ´Â
                                           È  ·È¢          727    threw away, cast aside         ¯ § À      Š 
                                                                                                                 À¦û
710   life                                       ·
                                              ¨           728    pv. they were given                        «¢
                                                                                                            ¦ÌÂÉ
711   they associated (partners               ï ¢
                                           ¦Œ ÂËÈ         729    behind                                   °Â
                                                                                                           È ¡È È
      with Allah)                                            730    backs                                       Û
                                                                                                           Ì° Œ
712   wishes, desires                             N
                                                  ®               (sr.:    ÂÛ
                                                                              Š )
713   each one / everyone of them            ÿ¾ ¢
                                           ö  ·È          731    as if they                                û ˜ï
                                                                                                          ö ŠŠ
714   if                                               ó
                                                     Š     732    they do not know               À øŠ ó
                                                                                                   È  ôࢊ
715   pv. is allowed to live,       ° ¿ ¸     à
                                               Âø           733    they followed, 851          ¸ § ©   ¦ ¦Ê
                                                                                                              ૦
      given life
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                  68                                            Part: 1

734    that which                                  ÷
                                                  ¢      750   ni. pl. blaspheme not                è « ó
                                                                                                   Œ ’ð¢Š
735    recited, read                            ô
                                             ¦Œ ¬«    751   they learn, 182, 286              À øô 
                                                                                                  È  M à¬
       (vn.:     Æ È ¢Š 	)
                 ¨Â ô«                                          (vn.:     öôà«
                                                                           N  )
736    kingdom                               ’ô
                                            î÷            752   dl. from those two                     ø ÷
                                                                                                      ¢  ü	
737    but                                     ð
                                             ú	 ó        753   they sow discord /                  À ëŠ
                                                                                                    È Œ  è
738    they teach, 182, 274, 751        À ôà
                                        È øO              cause separation (vn.:          ê «
                                                                                                 Ž ’è)
       (vn.:     ö ô «
                  	 à)                                754   by which                                         ¥
                                                                                                                þŽ
                                                                                                                ¦




739    magic                                 ¸	
                                            Â Ç           755   between, among                                ú ¥
                                                                                                               
740    two angels                         ú ðô÷
                                          Ž Š Š         756   the man                                ø
                                                                                                      Ê Â ’ó¦
       (sr.:      Š )
                 îô÷                                      757   wife, (one of the two)                    «±
                                                                                                          Æ ÌÂÈ
741    name of the city of Babylon            ò¥ ¥
                                              Š Ž¢       758   they (were) not                         ÿ ÷
                                                                                                      ö ¢
742    names of two          © °÷© °ÿ
                             È ÂÉ ¢ È È ÌÂÉ ¢         759   ap. pl. those who harm /            ú°Ó
                                                                                                     O ¢
       angels
                                                                impair (sr.:         °Ó
                                                                                     K ¢ )
743    none (This word has different               ÷
                                                  ¢
       meanings depending upon the                        760   that which                                       ÷
                                                                                                                ¢
       context for e.g., see 734)
                                                                harms                                      ÂÔ
                                                                                                            
                                        ¾·¢ ÷
                                        
  Èú	
                                                          761                                 ° ° µ
744    to anyone
                                                                fg. vb. profits                            ފ
                                                                                                           èü
                                              ¬·
                                             
                                                          762                                 ¸ » À
745.   till, until
                                                                they knew / learnt                       ø	 
                                                                                                      ¦ ôß
                                             ó ì
                                            ¢ŠŒ 
                                                          763
746. dl. they say
                                                                verily who                                      øó
                                                                                                              ú Š
                 ¾ë
                 Æ Š )
                                                          764
       (vn.:
                                                                                                         ¦
                                                                                                  à ¬ËÊ
                                                                                                      ¦



747    in fact                                 øû¤
                                              ¢ Ê       765   bargained, bought, 348, 769


748    we                                    ú
                                              ¸û       766   nothing for him                           þŠ¢
                                                                                                          
                                                                                                           ó ÷
749    trial, test                            ˆ ¬	
                                              ¨ü ç        767   portion, share                        ¼ ô»
                                                                                                      Æ ¢Š 
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                        69                                             Part: 1

768   surely it is evil                             Æ ¦ó
                                                     ’ ŽŠ      783    do (you) not                                 ó¢
                                                                                                                  öŠÈ
769   they sold, 348, 765                              ÂË
                                                    ¦Ì       784    you know                                   ô«
                                                                                                                öŠ à
770   that they                                          û¢
                                                     ö È     785    besides Allah                    þô À ®
                                                                                                        	 M ó¦Ê ÌÂÉ
771   recompense, reward                            ˆ Œ÷
                                                    ¨¥ °      786.   patron, friend                            óÂ
                                                                                                                  	È
772   better                                          »
                                                                   (pl.:        ó ¢
                                                                                   ¢	ÌÂÈ)
 Ruku'       12      v: 7         12                ¸ï°
                                                                787    helper                    ° ´ À    	 
                                                                                                             Â Ðû
                                                     üß °
                                                    ¢	 ¦È
                                                                            Н  üÂ )
                                                                           Â û ÂÐ              Ðû
773   attend to us , listen to us
                                                                       (
                                               üß °
                                           ¢	 ¦È
                                                                                                       À ¾Ž« ¢
                                                                                                       È ÌÂ ÂÌ¿È
      (These two Arabic words
                                                                788    pl. do you desire? /
       û ܦ
      ¢Œ ûÉ have similar meanings.              But                intend?
      the Jews, by twisting their tongues,                      789    pl. you question                       ôŠ
                                                                                                           ¦Œ  È«
                      ü ß °
                     ¢	 ¦È which means our
                                                                                                                  øï
                                                                                                                 ¢ Š
      used to say,
                                                                790    as
      herdsman. Therefore, Muslims
      were forbidden to use this word and                       791    pv. was questioned                       Š 	Ç
                                                                                                                ò 
      advised to use       û ܦ
                          ¢Œ ûÉ )
                                                                792    exchanges                  ¾ ® §    ¾¾¦¬
                                                                                                            É  
774   im. look upon us                              û ܦ
                                                   ¢Œ ûÉ
                                                                793    plain road, even way        ¦È   Ç
                                                                                                òŽ ó¦È ¡ 
775   doesn't like/ love /, 794         ® ® Â    ® ÷
                                                  N  ¢
      wish
                                                                794    desired, wished, longed, 712               ®Â
                                                                                                                  MÈ
776   chooses                    ´ ´ ­       ά
                                               ¼          795    many                                      	Š
                                                                                                                Â °ï
777   whom (He) wills                       Ì ÷
                                          É – ú          796    that, if                                      ó
                                                                                                                   Š
778   of bounty / grace                  ò è ¯
                                         Ž Ԋ ó¦ÂÉ           797    became manifest,               À Ä §    
                                                                                                                 ú¦«
                                                                       evident, 519
779   great, infinite, 398                          ö Üß
                                                     	 
                                                                798    to forgive / pardon /          Â » ¸    ß
                                                                                                                 ’è
780   we abrogate                   ­ ² À          Èû
                                                  º ü             excuse

781   or                                                  ¢
                                                        ÌÂÈ     799    to look over, to pass over             ’è
                                                                                                             ¶Ï
782   we bring                                       ©û
                                                     Ê ’˜      800    brings about, sends                         «
                                                                                                                 	˜
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                      70                                          Part: 1

801   command, order                               ¢
                                                    ÷È      815    the Jews said           ®  ªó ë
                                                                                             É  ’ó¦	 Š¢Š
      (pl.:     ÷ ¢ ÷¢
               Â	 ¦È Èž° É)                              816    fg. not                            È ó
                                                                                                      ª Š
                                                                     (mg.:      Æó
                                                                                 Š)
 1st Part          3/4         C¦     ij          

                                            ¸¢¥°¦ ¨¯ ¯


                                                                                                      îó ï
                                                                                                       	 ÀŠ
                                                                                                           ¦

                                                              817    likewise
802   pl. you send forth                         ÷¾Š «
                                              ¦  ì       818    greater wrong-doer,       ¿ ¾ ·    ô’ÛÈ
                                                                                                          öŠ ¢
803   pl. you will find, 708                     ¾Ž
                                              ¦Ì ´«               more unjust, 412

804   with                                        ¾ß
                                                   ü	       819    forbade, prevented                    Þü÷
                                                                                                            
805   these (actual meaning is "that")           î«
                                                  ’ô	        820    mosques                         ¾³ È÷
                                                                                                      Ž ¢ 
806   their desires                               û ÷¢
                                              ö Ž¢ È             (sr.:     ¾´ ÷
                                                                                Ž È )
807   im. pl. bring                                «ÿ
                                                ¦¢        821.   pv. being mentioned                 Š
                                                                                                          ï’À
808   proof, evidence                          Æ ¢ Â
                                               Àÿ ¥           822    strived                                Ç
                                                                                                          à
      (pl.:    ú	 ¦ )
                  ÿ Â¥                                        823    ruin                                »
                                                                                                      ̧¦ 
809   nay, why not                                   ¥
                                                   ô        824    vn. to enter                        ò ®
                                                                                                         ˆ »È
810   surrendered, submitted        ¿ ¾ ²     öô ¢
                                                Š ÇÈ       825    ap. those who fear    »  ­    	 	–
                                                                                                      ú èŸ »
811   his face, himself                        þ Â
                                                 ³È        826    vn. disgrace                        Ä»
                                                                                                         Æ Ä	
      (pl.:    Æ  É )
               Á ³Â                                           827    whithersoever, wherever               øü ¢
                                                                                                          ¢ È
812   one who does good, 444                   Ê ¸
                                              úÈ ÷            828    pl. you turn                           ó «
                                                                                                         ¦N
      (pl.:     ŽÊ ¸ È Ê ¸ )
               ú üÈ ÷ À üÈ ÷                                 829    there                                     Š
                                                                                                               ö¯
813   reward, remuneration,                       Â ¢
                                                   ³È       830    face of Allah                þô þ Â
                                                                                                  	 M ó¦ ³È
      wage, 494                                               831    son                                   ¾óÂ
                                                                                                          ¦ ŠÈ
      grief, sadness, sorrow,                    À·
                                                 Æ Ä
                                                                               ®ó ¢
                                                                               Æ ¢ŠÌÂÈ)
814
                                                                     (pl.:
      gloom, 329, 496
 Ruku'        13      v: 9     13               ¸ï°
                                                              832    be He Glorified,                 û¢ ¦
                                                                                                     þ ¸Ç
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                    71                                               Part: 1
      Glory be to Him
                                                            849   with you                                 îß
                                                                                                            ü
833   ap. one who renders worship             ªû ë
                                               Ž¢Š
                                                            850   unless                                     ¬·
                                                                                                            
      to Allah (pl.:        ú ¬û ë À ¬ ë
                             	Ž¢Š È ûŽ¢Š )
                                                            851   you follow, 733                           Þ¦¬«
                                                                                                             Ž
834   The Originator, Innovator                Þ ¾¥
                                                	 
                                                            852   their form of religion                     ¨ô÷
                                                                                                             Š M	
835   when                                        ¯¤
                                                 ¦È Ê
                                                            853   desires                                  ¢
                                                                                                          Æ ¡ ÿÈ
836   decreed                                   ë
                                              Ԋ
                                                                               ÿ
                                                                            Ã  )
                                                                                  ¦



                   Óë
                 	 ¢Š )
                                                                  (sr.:
      (judge:
                                                                                                         î  ³
                                                                                                          È –
                                                 ¢
                                                  ÷È
                                                            854   came unto thee
837   matter
                                                                                                         îó ÷
                                                                                                          Š¢
                                                   ï
                                                 úŒ
                                                            855   you have no
838   im. be
                                                             Ruku'        14          v: 9   14            ¸ï°

839   it becomes                             À ð
                                             É Œ         856   compensation, 384                        Æ ¾
                                                                                                           ¾ ß
840   why (does) not                            ó ó
                                               ¢ŠŠ       857   tried, 396                                 ¬¦
                                                                                                           ô¥Ê
841   similar, alike, resembling              ¥ Ì«
                                          ª ¢                (vn.:        Æ ¢Š 	¥Ê)
                                                                                 ô¬ ¦
842   we have made clear                          ü¥
                                                 ¢       858   fulfilled                                   ö«¢
                                                                                                               È
843   ap. one who gives good tidings             ̥
                                              Â	         859   ap. maker, 179, 168, 267                òß ³
                                                                                                          ˆ 	 ¢
      (vn.:     ¨° Ì¥
                Æ È ¢ )                                   860   leader, Imam                              ÷ ÷¤
                                                                                                           ¢ ¢ Ê
844   ap. warner                                	 
                                               Â Àû         861   offspring, progeny                        ¨ °¯
                                                                                                            ˆ O É
845   pv. you will not be asked           òŠ « ó
                                          Œ  È¢Š               (pl.:   Æ ¢O É )
                                                                          © °¯
846   inmates of the        ö ¸´ § ¸ ¢
                            Ž 	  ’ó¦É ¢ ÏÈ            862   shall not reach             ¾ Ä À   É ¢¢Š
                                                                                                         ¾ü ó
      Hell
847   never                                            ó
                                                     úŠ    863   covenant, promise, 241, 338               ¾ß
                                                                                                            
848   will be pleased / satisfied                «
                                             ÓÂ          864   we made                                  ü à³
                                                                                                          ¢’ô 
      (ap.:     	 ¦È )
                 Ó°                                         865   the house (at Makkah)                   ª ¦
                                                                                                           ’ó¦
                                                            866   a place of resort / assembly             ¨¥ °÷
                                                                                                           † ¢Š
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                                     72                                              Part: 1

867   im. pl. take, adopt                    À	 «¦
                                          ¦ÌŒ ¼Ê           885    im. relent, turn (in mercy),                  «
                                                                                                                ¤
868   place where                  ö ÿ Â ¤ ¿ ì÷
                                    	 ¦ ¥ÊÉ ¢Š         416
                                                                    accept (our repentence), 320, 321,

      Prophet Ibrahim X stood                                886    im. raise up, 422, 1202                    à¦
                                                                                                             ’® ¥Ê
869   place of worship (prayer)               ôÐ÷
                                                         887    wisdom                             ¨ 	
                                                                                                       Œ ø’ð¸’ó¦
870   im. dl. purify, clean                     Â×
                                               ¦  Š        888    purifies, makes them           Ä ½ ±   O  
                                                                                                               ïÄ
871   ap. those who            »  ¶    ú èŸ ×
                                          	 	–Š                  grow
                                                              Ruku'        15       v: 8      15              ¸ï°
      go round (the Ka'ba)
872   ap. those who stay                 ú èï ß
                                          	 	 ¢           889    turned away                        ß ¤ã°
                                                                                                     ú  	 È
      (at mosques for worship)
                                                             889a   turned towards                     ¤ ¤ã°
                                                                                                      DÊ 	 È
873   those who               ® ´È ÞïÂ
                              Ê   ó¦Ž M  ó¦
      bow down and prostrate                                 890    be fooled                                  þèÇ
                                                                                                               	
874   peace, security                             ü÷
                                                 ¢	 ¦
                                                    ¦

                                                                    (stupids:       ŠÇ
                                                                                 ¢ è )
875   im. provide                   ¼ ± °      ±¦
                                              Ì¼É Ì°É       891    we chose                           ¢Š Š ÏÊ
                                                                                                        ü èØ ¦
876   people of                                 ò¢
                                                Œ ÿÈ        892    im. surrender, submit          ¿ ¾ ²   ö	 ÇÈ
                                                                                                                ô ¢
877   I will grant                  ¸ © ¿     Þ¬ ¢
                                                ÷É        893    enjoined                                  È
                                                                                                              ÏÂ
                               
                                                                                                                  ü¥
                                                                                                                Ž
      (them their) pleasure
                                                             894    sons
878   I shall compel /             ° ° µ    ÂØ ¢
                                              Š ÓÈ
      coerce                                                 895    O my sons                                ü¥ 
                                                                                                              Ž¢
879   raised                                     Þç°
                                                  ŠÈ        896    when (it) came                     ÂÔ· ¤
                                                                                                          ̯Ê
880   foundations (sr.:       ¨¾ß ë ¾ß ë
                              Æ  	 ¢Š )  	 ¦ Š            897    God                                           óÊ
                                                                                                                 þ¤
881   im. accept, 380                             ¦ì«
                                                ’òŠ        898    fathers (sr.:      Æ È)
                                                                                       §¢                       ¥
                                                                                                               È – ¦¦




882   group of people, (community)                ˆ É
                                                  ¨÷¢        899    fg. passed away                            ô»
                                                                                                             ªŠ 
      (pl.:    ö÷¢
                 É)                                        900    of what                                     øß
                                                                                                               ¢ 
883   im. show us                                 û°¢
                                                 ¢Ê È       901    im. pl. be, become                          û ï
                                                                                                             ¦Œ
884   ways of worship, rites              îÇ ü÷
                                           	 ¢
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                             73                                        Part: 1

902   pl. you will be                      ¾ «
                                        ¦Ì ¬     915   you, your                              ½
                                                                                                  È
      rightly guided
                                                     916   Allah will suffice   þô ö è
                                                                                 M ó¦  Šð	 ’ð
903   the upright                         è ü·
                                         ¢† Ž            you in defense against them
      (pl.:        èü·
                 É ¢Š  )                           917   color, dye                        ˆ  ¦	
                                                                                             ¨ä Ï
904   tribes, descendants             ¦ ˜
                                    ¶¢NJ’ó¦        918   who                                    ÷
                                                                                                ú
      (of Prophet Yakub X )
                                                     919   better                          úÈ ¦
                                                                                             ·È
905   pv. was / were given                « ¢
                                           	ÌÂÉ
                                                     920   ap. worshippers               À¾ß
                                                                                         È Ì ¥Ž¢
906   Prophets                           À ¦û
                                         È Ž
                                                           (sr.:     Ž¢ )
                                                                    ¾¥ ß
      (sr.:    ¦û
                Ž)
                                                     921   concerning Allah,              ô ç
                                                                                         þM ó¦	 
907   made distinction / separated, 753    ¼Âç
                                           È Š            regarding Allah

      (vn.:      êŽ ’è)
                     «                              922   ap. sincere (worshippers)   À Ð	 ÷
                                                                                       È  ô¼
908   between                               ú ¥
                                                  923   know better                        öŠ ¦
                                                                                               ôßÈ
909   anyone                               ¾·¦
                                           
 È      924   concealed                           ö¬ï
                                                                                                Š
910   they turned away                       ó «
                                          ¦M     925   testimony                       Æ È ¢ 
                                                                                           ¨® Ë
                                                                                             ¸ï°
911   schism, split, dissension, 1052   Æ ¢Š 	
                                        ¼ ìË          Ruku'        16   v: 12   16


912   so, then                               »
                                             È
913   shortly, in near future                ²
                                             È
914   suffices                             è
                                         	 ’ð
      (vn.:    ¨ èï
               ˆ ¢Š 	 )
Surah-1: Al-Baqarah                       74                                Part: 1

Masha-Allah you have completed almost 1/6th of this dictionary,
even though you have completed only one Part. In fact you have
covered perhaps more than 25% or 1/4th of the words of this
dictionary since many of them are repeated. So, keep on going and

there is no other book on the face of this earth which deserves more
attention th

Prophet Muhammad          U
            Uʅ¦ɾÇÈ°Ⱦ¢ŠëȾ¢ŠëWÈÀ¢Mèߎú¥ÊÀ¢ø°’ßúß
   þøôß             ì ô                   ïÂ
   M  ÈÂÈÀ¡Œ ’ó¦öM à«ú÷öŒ  »
                                           ¦ Á
                                     ÄÊ°¢¼ó’¦É ¦ÈÂÈ°

 relates that the messenger of Allah (peace be upon him) said:




                                    (Bukhari)


   
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                     75                                          Part: 2

 ^ Part :2                  ¾ìÇ Ä `
                            É Œ         ³                   944   your face                         È
                                                                                                    î ³Â
                                                                   now, we shall turn you          ü  ó Š Š
                                                                                                  îOüôç
                                                    È
                                                    ²
                                                             945
926   now, near, in near future
                                                                   (see the breakup of this word below)
927   what has turned them, 948                óÈ
                                           ö Â¢÷        946   so                                     È
                                                                                                          »
928   place towards                             ŠŠ 	
                                                ¨ô¦ë        947   verily                                     È
                                                                                                              ¾
      which one faces while praying
                                                                   we will cause you to turn ľÂ      ó
                                                                                                       Oû
                                            M ÷
                                         ¢†Ødž¨ ¢É
                                                             948
929   a group of people
      justly balanced                                        949   surely, verily                          M ¢È
                                                                                                           À
                                                ¦
930   thus                                  
                                            îó	 ÀŠï          950   im. turn, 967                          ¾È
                                                                                                          OÂ
931   we did not appoint / made                
                                          ¢ü’ôà³¢÷        951   towards                              
                                                                                                       ’ØË
932   who                                        ø	
                                               ú ÷         952   the sacred mosque     Ê  Ž 
                                                                                         ¿¦¸’ó¦	¾´Èø’ó¦
      (combination of        	       
                           ú÷ and ú÷ )                           (the mosque containing Ka'bah),
                                                                   inviolable place of worship

933   turns away (vn.:     § 	
                           Æ ¢Šôìû¦Ê)       ¤ôìü
                                               	Š            953   wherever, wheresoever               ®·
                                                                                                       Π
934   heel                                    ¤	 
                                               ìß           954   pv. were given the       È 	
                                                                                            §¢¬ð’󦦫̢É
                                              	 	 
                                              þ¦ìß
                                                                   Book (scripture)
935   dl. his two heels
                                                             955. not                                   ¢Èº÷
936   though it was                      ªû¢ŠïÌÀ¤Ê              (The meaning of this word depends
                                                                   upon the context. It is used as (i) an
937   verily                                            È
                                                        ¾          interrogative pronoun: what, why;
                                                                   (ii) a relative pronoun: that, which,
938   momentous, grievous, 367               ¨ Ž Š
                                             Æ Â¦ï               whatever, all that; (iii) negation: not;
                                                                   and (iv) conjunction: as long as,
939   lets (it) go waste                Þ 	 
                                ¸Äµ Ô                      whenever, as far as, etc.).

                                                             956   even if                                  	
                                                                                                          ú óŠ
940   full of kindness                      » ÉÈ
                                            Æ Ì£°
                                                             957   you brought                         
                                                                                                       ª«¢È
941   assuredly                                       Š
                                                    ¾ë
                                                    ¦        958   they recognize                   È Ž
                                                                                                    ÀŒçÂà
942   we see                                   Ã Âû
                                                                   (vn.:     ˆ çÂà÷)
                                                                             ¨Š Ž 
943   turning                            ¤N Š 
                                 §¾¼ ôì«
                                                             959   sons                                 É
                                                                                                         –ü¥¢È
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                              76                                             Part: 2

      (sr.:      ¥¦Ê)
                ú                                           (vn.:        ¨È
                                                                         Æ Â¢Šô«	)
960   concealed, 291, 354, 547             Š
                                          ö¬ï         977   remembrance, 1246                       Ê
                                                                                                    ’ï¯
961   ap. doubters,                    Ž
                                      ú¬ø÷       978   thanksgiving, gratitude                ’ðË
                                                                                                  Â 
      (those who) waver                                Ruku'        18         v: 5   2           ¸ï°
 Ruku'        17          v: 6   1       ¸ï°
                                                      979   with                                      
                                                                                                      Þ÷
962   direction, goal                   ˆ  ³Â
                                        ¨ Ê           980   way / path of Allah               ô  Ž
                                                                                             þM ó¦Žò¦Ç
963   ap. one who turns                    ó 
                                         O÷        981   pl. dead                            ©¦÷¢È
964   im. pl. compete,                     Ž
                                      ¦Œì¦¬Ç¦Ê           (sr.:      ª 
                                                                         ÷)
      vie with one another
                                                            pl. living, alive                     
                                                                                                 Æ –·¢È
                                             
                                      Ì©¦Â»
                                                      982
965   good deeds, works
                                                            (sr.:       ·)
                                                                       
966   wheresoever, wherever                  
                                          ¢øü¢È
                                                            we shall try / test                    ¦Œô¦û
                                            OÂ
                                            ¾È
                                                      983
967   im. turn
                                                            hunger                                ¸
                                                                                                  Æ ³
                                             ôŠ
                                            ¢M  ó	
                                                      984
968   so that (it may) not
                                                            loss                                  Î
                                                                                                   ’ìû
          ¢ŠóÌÀ¢Èʾ )
                                                      985
      (
                                                            pl. wealth, worldly goods            ¾
                                                                                                 Æ ¦÷¢È
                                         ˆ ·
                                         ¨´ 
                                                      986
969   argument
                                                            fruits, crops                       Æ ¦Âø¯Š
                                                                                                © 
                                            ö
                                             «	¢É
                                                      987
970   I (may) complete
                                                            (sr.:      ¨ 
                                                                       Æ Âø¯Š)
971   may, might                           ò
                                           M àóŠ
                                                            fg. struck, befall                 ª¥¢Ï¢È
                                      È 
                                      À̾¬ «
                                                      988
972   pl. you are / will be rightly
      guided                                          989   misfortune, calamity                 ¨ 	
                                                                                                 ˆ ¦Ð÷
973   even as, similarly                 ¢øŠï        990   blessings                         © Š
                                                                                              Æ ¦ôÏ
974   we (have) sent                        
                                       ¢ü’ôÇÌ°¢È     991   names of two                        
                                                                                          ¨ÈÂÂ÷È¢ŠèÏ
975   among you (pl.)                      Π	
                                         öðç              mountains in Makkah near Ka'bah
                                                            symbols, signs                              
                                                                                                 Ÿ	–àË
                                             Œ
                                          ¦ô¬
                                                      992
976   recites
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                        77                                          Part: 2

       (sr.:    Æ ¢àË)
                ° 	                                             1010   moving creatures, beasts            ¨¥
                                                                                                           ˆ ¡È®
993    performed Hajj (the pilgrimage)               ²
                                                     ·                (pl.:    § È
                                                                                K ¦È®)
994    performed Umrah (visited                   
                                                  Âø¬ß¦Ê       1011   vn. veering,                    ÂЫ
                                                                                                      æŽ
       Makkah to perform the pilgrimage                                to control the movement of
       in a period other than that of Hajj)
                                                                1012   winds                              É Ê
                                                                                                          ¬¢°
995    sin, wrong                                  ¬ 
                                                   Æ ¢ü³
                                                                       (sr.:     °)
                                                                                ¶Ê
996    did (more) good                            È Š
                                                  ¸ Ø«
       on his own accord                                        1013   clouds                               
                                                                                                       ̧¢¸Ç
997    responsive to gratitude,                    Â	
                                                    ï¢Ë       1014   pp. that which is made            ¼ 
                                                                                                        È÷
       bountiful in rewarding                                          subservient
998    aware, all-knowing                           ö 	 
                                                      ôß      1015   between                               
                                                                                                             ú¥
999    pl. combined, all                         	
                                                úàø³¢È       1016   besides Allah                	ô É
                                                                                                    þM ó¦ÊÀÌ®
1000    lightened                                   è
                                                   æM »         1017   pl. compeers, equals              ¦Å®¦¾û¢È
1001    pv. they will be                         È ÂŠ ü
                                         °·ÀÀÌ  Ü       1018   love                                ¤
                                                                                                            ·
        reprieved / granted respite
 Ruku'         19      v: 11             3         ¸ï°         1019   stronger, stauncher, 563, 645        Ë¢È
                                                                                                           ¾
1002    vn. creation, to create                     ê
                                                     ’ô»       1020   disowned, cleared                  ¢Â
                                                                                                   °§È ¦«
                                                                       oneself, exonerated
        vn. difference, alternation                  	
                                                Ì»¢Šô¬»¦Ê
                                                                                                              Ž«
                                                                                                         ¦à¦¦
1003
                                                                1021   those who were followed
        night       (pl.:   ó	¢óŠ)                Š
                                                      òóŠ
                                                                                                       à«
                                                                                              ¸§©¦  ¦¦
1004
                                                                1022   they followed
        day                                          °
                                                     Æ ¢ û
                                                                                                        Þ ØŠ 
                                                                                                ¸¶¼ M ì«
1005
                                                                1023   cut off, cut asunder
        ship                                        îŒ
                                                     ’ôç
                                                                                                       ̧¢¦Ç¢È
1006
                                                                1024   aims, ties, relations, means
        fg. runs, sails                             Ž
                                                  ÌÄ´«
                                                                                                          À
                                                                                                    ¢üóŠM ¢ÈóŠ
1007
                                                                1025   if it were for us,
1008    sea                                          Â
                                                      ¸¥            would that be for us

1009    spread, dispersed, scattered                  ®
                                                      M ¥      1026   (second / more) chance              ŠŠ
                                                                                                           ¨ ï
                                                                1027   pl. intense regrets               
                                                                                                    Ì©¦ÂÈ·
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                               78                                                      Part: 2

1028   ap. those who come out           ŽÊ
                                       ú³°¢»        1048   ap. transgressing                                Ç
                                                                                                               ®¢ß
1029   fire, hell fire                       °¢û      1049   sin, guilt (pl.:         ¿¢Š¯¡)                   ö
                                                                                                                 ’¯¤Ê
                                          ¸ï°
 Ruku'        20     v: 4        4                     1050   bellies (sr.:        ú
                                                                                    ’Ø¥)                  ÀŒ
                                                                                                            Æ Ø¥
                                              Š
                                           ¢¦×
                                                                                                              Š
                                                                                                  öÿ¦Ï¢È¢øç
1030   wholesome, good
                                                       1051   Then, how constant
1031   footsteps (sr.:      Æ ’Ø»)
                            ¨              Œ
                                       Ì©¦Ø»                are they? / How daring are they?

1032   evil                                 
                                           Æ Ç       1052   schism                                        ¼ 	
                                                                                                            Æ ¢ŠìË
1033   pl. indecent, shameful                 Š
                                       Ì –Ì¸ç        1053   far                                             ¾ 	
                                                                                                               à¥
                                                                                                             ¸ï°
1034   we found                              Š
                                          ¢üè’ó¢È     Ruku'         21    v: 9              5


1035   what even though                        È
                                           óŠÂ¢È      2nd Part              1/4                 É Œ
                                                                                                  ¾ìǠijޥ°
1036   to shout                             ê
                                             àû
                                                       1054   (it is) not                                      
                                                                                                              ÆóŠ
1037   to call                              É
                                          Æ –ß®
                                                       1055   righteousness, piety                               Â
                                                                                                                  ¥Ž
1038   to cry                             Æ ¡¾ûŽ
                                           
                                                       1056   towards                                          Š 	
                                                                                                               ò¦ë
1039   (to) him only / alone                É
                                            Á¢¤Ê
                                                       1057   gave (vn.:         Æ ¢¬¤Ê)
                                                                                                              « ¦    ¦



1040   forbade, made unlawful              È Â
                                           ¿ ·
                                                       1058   kinsfolk, kindred                       Œ       È
                                                                                                   9Âì’ó¦Ãʯ
1041   carrion, dead                       ˆ ¬÷
                                           ¨                relations, those who are near, 613

1042   blood                                  ¿È
                                              Æ®       1059   orphans, 614 (sr.:              ö 	
                                                                                               ¬)        ÷¢¬
1043   meat, flesh                          ¸óŠ
                                           ö           1060   needy, poor, 615                           	 
                                                                                                        úï¢È÷
1044   swine, pig                        Ž 	
                                          Äü»             (sr.:         ðÈ÷)
                                                                           ú	 	
1045   on which a name is invoked,         ò	
                                           M ÿ¢É       1061   wayfarers                             Ž  ŽÈ ú
                                                                                                    ò¦ ó¦ ¥¦Ê
       consecrated
                                                       1062   ap. those who ask, beggars                   	
                                                                                                          úôŸ	–Ç
1046   pv. is driven / forced            Œ
                                          ØÓ¦É
       by necessity
                                                       1063   slaves, (necks of slaves),                         Ê
                                                                                                            ̧¢Šë°
1047   ap. disobedient                      Ç
                                            ¹¢¥              those in bondage
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                              79                                                Part: 2

       (sr. neck   ¨Š È
                   ˆ ¦ ë°)                            1082   vn. alleviation, concession,          	輫
                                                                                                  æ
1064   ap. those who                    È Œ 
                                        Àç÷              act of making light
                                                                                                     ¦
       keep/fulfil (promise)                          1083   transgressed,                        à ¾¬ߦÊ
1065   suffering, tribulation            Æ –ǒ˜¥
                                                             exceeded the limit
                                                      1084   life                                   ¨
                                                                                                    Æ ·
1066   adversity, hardship              É Â
                                         ¡ Ó
                                                      1085   those (men) of                 Ê Š            ¢
                                                                                            §¢¦’ó˜’ó¦	óÂÉ
1067   time of stress / panic     Ê  	
                                  ²’˜¦’ó¦ú·              understanding or insight
1068   pl. sincere / true              ë 
                             ¼®´¦ Œ ¾Ï                 (sr.: mind, intellect      ¤
                                                                                         óŒ)
1069   pl. God-conscious,               È Œ ¬
                                        Àì÷        1086   approached                               
                                                                                                     ÂÔ·
       God-fearing
                                                      1087   left (behind)                           ½ 
                                                                                             ½°©È Â«
1070   pv. is prescribed,                 	
                                         ¤¬Œï
       ordained, 594                                  1088   wealth, goods, 1216, 1233                   Â
                                                                                                          »
1071   retaliation,                   ´ 	
                                      Æ ¢Ðë          1089   to make bequest, will                  ˆ Ï Â
                                                                                                    ¨ 	 È
       just retribution, law of equality
                                                                                                    Þ	 
                                                                                            ¸¿² øÇ
                                               Š
                                           ô¬ë
                                                      1090   heard, listened
1072   murdered, slain, 484, 544, 666
                                                                                                          ö
                                                                                                           ’¯¤Ê
                ˆ  ¬ ë)
                ò 	 Š
                                                      1091   sin, guilt
       (sr.:
                                                                                                     È
                                                                                                     »¢»
                                          Â
                                           ¸’ó¦
                                                      1092   feared, apprehended
1073   the free man
                                                                                                    Ç 
                                                                                                    ´÷
                                               
                                           ¾¦ß
                                                      1093   ap. testator
1074   slave
                                                                                                            
                                                                                                         ¢†èü³
                                           °û¢É
                                                      1094   unjust, mistake, partiality
1075   female
                                                       Ruku'        22      v: 6        6            ¸ï°
1076   pv. is forgiven / pardoned          	
                                         èß        1095   fasts (sr.:      Æ Ï)
                                                                              ¿                    ¿¢	Ï
1077   his brother                         		
                                           þ»¢È     1096   as                                             Š
                                                                                                         ¢øï
1078   vn. to follow, to adhere          ¸ «
                                         Æ ¢¦¦Ê     1097   days (sr.:       Æ )
                                                                              ¿                              
                                                                                                          Ì¿¢¢È
1079   according to usage, fair      » 
                                     Æ ÌÂÂà÷        1098   of a certain number                  ¨È 
                                                                                                  Æ ®Â¾à÷
1080   payment, compensations               
                                           Æ ¡È®¢È    1099   count, prescribed number                    Æ ß
                                                                                                         ¨¾ 	
1081   kindness, goodly manner        À
                                      Æ ¢È·¤Ê
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                     80                                                Part: 2

1100   pl. you magnify / glorify                 ¦ Š «
                                              ¦ÌÂ ð       1112    to go to wife, to cohabit               Š ŠÈ
                                                                                                             ® ç°
       / extol
                                                             1113    pl. your wives / women               ΃
                                                                                                        öð –ÈûŽ
1101   asked, questioned                           È Š
                                                   ¾ ˜Ç
                                                             1114    fg. they                                   ú
                                                                                                                ÿ
       (vn.:      Æ ¦šÇ)
                  ¾
                                                             1115    raiment, garment                        ²
                                                                                                             Æ ¢¦ó	
1102   concerning me, about me                      ü
                                                   ß
                                                             1116    that you (pl.)                            Ξ
                                                                                                             öð¢È
       (           
           Äúß )
                                                             1117    pl. you deceive /                   À   ¬ ¼
                                                                                                 À­È  û¢ «
1103   I answer / respond                      Ž
                                              ¤³¢É                 defraud
1104   prayer, call, 518                       ¨ È
                                               Æ ß®       1118    relieved, forgave, pardoned                  
                                                                                                               ¢Šèß
1105   suppliant, caller                           Ç
                                                   ¸¦È®      1119    now                                      
                                                                                                              ú ’ó¢È
       (   ¨ È                   È
           Æ ß®ß¾¢ß® )                        1120    hold intercourse, have                    	
                                                                                                          ¦ÌÂÂË¢¥
1106   calls unto me                           Ê È
                                               À¢ß®                 sexual intercourse
                                                                     (vn.:        Æ ÂË¢¦÷)
                                                                                  ¨  
       (In fact the word is             È
                                 ûŽ¢ß®    but
       short-form is used here by
                                                             1121    im. pl. seek                                
                                                                                                            ¦ä¬¥¦Ê
       removing      Ä of the end.      In                   1122    thread                                  Ö
                                                                                                             ˆ »
       Qur'an, you will find many words
                                                             1123    white                                    
                                                                                                            Ò¥¢È
       ending with     Ê         Ê
                       À , where À       stands
                                                             1124    black                                  ̮ǢÈ
       for   ûŽ , i.e. unto me, mine, my).
                                                             1125                                   ¦óŒ¾«
                                                                     pl. you present / inform ľ®
                                         Ž  È ôŠ
                             §Â«¦ ¦ ´¬ ’ ç
                                                                     / notify / convey / (to hang down) 
1107   so let them
       hear my call / respond to my call                      Ruku'          23      v: 6        7          ¸ï°
1108   for me, me                                    ó	    1126    new moons                                 ô	
                                                                                                              ¨M ÿ¢È
1109   led right way                               È
                                               ¾Ë°         1127.    marks, signs to mark                  	 
                                                                                                         ªë¦÷
1110   pv. is made lawful / permitted              ò	
                                                   M ·¢É             fixed periods of time (sr.:        Æ ¢Šì÷)
                                                                                                        © 	
1111   night of the                   Ê Ð Š
                                      ¿¢ 󦊨ôóŠ       1128.    houses (sr.:      ª
                                                                                         ¥)                  
                                                                                                            Ì©¥
       fasting days
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                 81                                               Part: 2

1129.   doors, gates (sr.:       §
                                 Æ ¢¥) §¦¥¢È         1147   pl. you are in security                  	
                                                                                                       ö¬ü÷¢È
1130. im. pl. fight                        ¦Œô«	¢Šë    1148                                          Þ¬ 
                                                                                               ¸©¿ ø«

1131.   found                                	
                                            æ쯊         1149   three                                   Š
                                                                                                        ¨¯Š¢Šô¯Š
1132. pl. you    found,                 ø¬è	 Š
                               »¼ª¦  ’ ì¯        1150   seven                                  ¨ 
                                                                                                       ˆ à¦Ç
        you came upon
                                                         1151   ten                                   ¨  
                                                                                                      Æ ÂÌß
1133.   they desist / cease                     
                                           ¦ ¬û¦Ê
                                                         1152   pl. you returned                   öà È
                                                                                           ¸«° ¬ ³°
        (vn.:   Æ ¢ ¬û¦Ê)
                  	
                                                         1153   family, relatives, people of             Œ
                                                                                                         òÿ¢È
1134.   hostility                        À 
                                         Æ ¦È¾ß
                                                         1154   those present, inhabitant            Ž	
                                                                                                   ÌÄÂÓ¢·
1135.   the forbidden            É  ÂÌ
                                 ¿¦¸’ó¦   ó¦
        month, the sacred month                                 (Actually it was        Ž	
                                                                                       úÂÓ¢· but
1136.   forbidden (things)                   
                                        Ì©¢÷·                 because it is used as         
                                                                                          »¢Ô÷
1137.   ruin, destruction                    Œ
                                          ¨Šðô «              here, the last    À   is dropped.)

1138. pv. you     are                 öÂ	 ·É
                              °´¬ « Ð ¢          1155   severe in punishment               	 ¾	
                                                                                              ̧¢Šìàó¦ ¾Ë
        besieged / held back                                                                           ¸ï°
                                                          Ruku'         24      v: 8      8
1139.   obtained with ease               
                                        ÂÈ¬Ç¦Ê        1156   months                                  ˢÈ
1140.   gift, offering                    É
                                          þ ’ó¦              (sr.:          Ë)
                                                                             Â
                                       ì	 ¸ ó
                              ¼¾¬¦ Œ ô «¢Š
1141.   ni. pl. shave not
                                                         1157   pl. well known                               
                                                                                                  Ì©¢÷Œôà÷
1142    heads                            É ÉÉ
                                         ²Ì£°           1158   enjoined, undertakes                   È Š
                                                                                                       µÂç
        (sr.:     Æ Ì¢°)
                  ²È                                     1159   pl. wickedness, abuses               ¼Œ
                                                                                                     Æ Èç
                                           âô¦
                                  ¹¾§Š Œ  
1143    reaches
                                                                (sr.:         Èç)
                                                                             ê 	
1144    its destination                      ô	 
                                           þM ¸÷        1160   angry conversation, quarrel           ¾ Ž
                                                                                                      Æ ¦¾³
1145    ailment, hurt                        Ãů¢È       1161   im. pl. make                           ÂÉ Â 
                                                                                              ®Â±¦Ì ®M Ä«
1146    act of worship, sacrifice,         
 Èû
                                           î                  provision
        offering
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                      82                                          Part: 2

1162    best of provisions              Ê Ä Â
                                        ®¦ ó¦ »           1176   delayed, stayed on                  »Š
                                                                                                         ˜«
                                            ¦
1163    piety, God-consciousness               ¬
                                          à ’ìó¦            1177   pleased, dazzled                ¤Ž 
                                                                                             §«¸ ´ß
        to ward off evil                                      1178   vn. conversation, talk, saying     Æ ë
                                                                                                        ¾Š
1164    return                              È
                                            µ¢Šç¢È
                                                                     (pl.:     ¾
                                                                               Æ ¦’ë¢È)
1165    name of the ground where               
                                          Ì©¢ŠçÂß
        Hajis assemble on the 9th day of
                                                              1179   most rigid of             Ê 	 ¾
                                                                                               ¿¢м’ó¦ óŠ¢È
        the Hajj month. It is a few miles                            opponents, most contentious
        away from Makkah.
                                                              1180   took charge, prevailed,             ó
                                                                                                        «
1166.   Sacred monument,        Ê   
                                ¿¦¸’ó¦ŽÂàÌø’ó¦                   turned away
        i.e., Muzdalifah, where Hajis stay
        for a night while returning from
                                                              1181   made effort                       àÇ
        Arafat
                                                                     (vn.:     
                                                                                àÇ)
1167    pl. you completed                      Š
                                           ö¬Ôë
                                                              1182   crops, tillage, tilth            ª
                                                                                                      Æ ·
1168    rites                               	 
                                          îÇ¢ü÷
                                                              1183   progeny, cattle                  Œ ü
                                                                                                      òÈó¦
        (sr.:      î 
                    ÊÈü÷)
                                                              1184   pride                               ¨Ä	
                                                                                                         Æ ß
1169    im. give us                             ¢ü«	 ¦
                                                     ¦



                                                              1185   enough                              
                                                                                                     ¤È·
1170    im. guard, save                           Ê
                                                  ¼
                                                              1186   resting place, bed                 ® 	
                                                                                                        Æ ¢ ÷
        (   ¨ Ê
            ˆ ¢Šë	ìëÈÂ)
                                                              1187   sells                            Ž
                                                                                                    ÌìÌ
1171    guard us, save us                           	
                                                 ¢üë
                                                              1188   seeking                          È 	
                                                                                                       –䬥¦Ê
1172    portion, share                    ¤ 	
                                           Ðû
                                                              1189   pleasure (of Allah)                 
                                                                                                   ©¢ÓÂ÷
1173    swift, quick                         ÂÇ
                                            ގ
                                                              1190   entered, came in                  ŠÈ
                                                                                                       ò »®
 2nd Part              1/2       É Œ
                                 ¾ìǠijæÐû            1191   submission, i.e., Islam           È
                                                                                                      ö’ô ó¦
                                                              1192   fully, completely                 ˆ M –Šï
                                                                                                       ¨ç
1174    hastened                            Š ´
                                            ò à«
                                                              1193   to slide back                          È
                                                                                                         òŠó±
1175    two days                            Ž 
                                            ú÷
                                                              1194   shadows                            òŠ Œ
                                                                                                        ˆ ôÛ
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                  83                                               Part: 2

1195   clouds                                 Æ ¢øã
                                              ¿ Š         1212   near kindred, relatives, 1058          
                                                                                                       ú¥ŽÂ’ë¢È
1196   the case is already              Š 	
                                       Â÷˜’ó¦ÔŒë      1213   warfare, fighting                        Æ ¢¬ë
                                                                                                          ¾ 	
       judged, decreed
                                              ¸ï°
                                                          1214   hateful dislike                           Æ Âï
                                                                                                           ÁŒ
 Ruku'         25      v: 14     9
1197   im. ask                                    
                                                ’òÇ       1215   (it) may happen, may be                 Èß
1198   many a, how many                           Š
                                                öï       1216   good, 1088, 1233                          Â
                                                                                                            »
1199   pv. beautified,                         ú É
                                      Àı ±       1217   bad                                        Â
                                                                                                            Ë
       fair-seeming                                        Ruku'         26      v: 6        10          ¸ï°

1200   made a jest, scoffed, °­²           
                                            ¼Ç
       mocked, ridiculed                                  1218   to prevent, to hinder                     ¾
                                                                                                           Ï
1201   one, single                          ¨ 	
                                            Æ ¾·¦È       1219   greater                                    
                                                                                                          ¦’ï¢È
1202   sent, raised, 422, 886                 Š 
                                              ®à¥        1220   they will not cease               È
                                                                                                   ÀóŒ¦Ä¢Šó
1203   pl. you thought                  ö  ¦È
                                §²¬ ¬ Ê ·          1221   they turn (you) back ®®°             ®
                                                                                                     ¦ÌÂN Â
1204   judges, decides                       ö Œ ¸
                                     ¿½¬ ð        1222   they could                           
                                                                                                  ¦ߢŠØ¬ǦÊ
       (vn.:        ö 
                     ’ð·)                                       (vn.:        ˆ ߢŠØ¬ǦÊ)
                                                                              ¨ 	
1205   not as yet                                ø
                                                ¢ óŠ     1223   turns back                               	
                                                                                                        Ì®¾«Â
1206   the like of                               Š
                                               Œò°÷              (vn to forsake the religion       ®
                                                                                                   Æ ¦¾«	Ì°¦Ê)
1207   befell, touched                         Æ
                                                ÷        1224   came to nothing,                         Š Ž
                                                                                                          Ö¦ ·
1208   they were shaken                          ŽÉ
                                            ¦ŒóÄ’ó±            became waste
                                                          1225   they emigrated /                     ÂÂ ÿ
                                                                                             °«Á¦Ì  ³¢
       (vn.:        ¨ È
                    ˆ óŠÄ’ó±)                                    suffered exile
1209   when                                     U÷       1226   they strove /                        ¾ ³
                                                                                             ®Á«¦Ì  ÿ¢

1210   Allah's help                      	ô
                                         þM ó¦ÂÐû            struggled
                                                          1227   they have hope,                      À Â
                                                                                              «°È  ³ 
1211   what                                    ¦È¯¢÷            they are hopeful
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                84                                            Part: 2

1228   wine, intoxicant                      ø»
                                            Â          1245   forgiveness                         ¨ 	 
                                                                                                   Æ Âèä÷
1229   games of chance, gambling           Â 
                                            ÊÈ÷       1246   they may remember /            È ïŠ 
                                                                                              ÀÌÂÂM À¬
1230   superfluous, surplus                   ’èß
                                                             recall, 977
                                                                                                    ¸ï°
                                                         Ruku'         27       v: 5   11
1231   pl. you may reflect /         È ðŠ 
                                     ÀÌÂÂM 謫
       ponder                                           1247   menstruation                      Ò	 
                                                                                                  ¸÷
1232   to put things right, 1236          ¬
                                          Æ ¢ŠôÏ¤Ê     1248   illness, ailment, 1145                Ãů¢È
1233   good, best, 1088, 1216                 »
                                             Â         1249   im. pl. so keep                   óŽ  ß ç
                                                                                       ¾±¸¦ ŒÄ¬ ¢Š

1234   pl. you mingle / mix           ¦ŒØó	¢¼«             away
                                                        1250   women                                 
                                                                                                    Æ –ÈûŽ
1235   ap. one who spoils,                 ¾ 
                                            ÊȒè÷
       foul-dealer                                      1251   they have cleansed / °Á¶     ÈÀ ’Ø
1236   ap. one who puts the                ôÐ÷
                                          ¶	                  purified

       things right, reformer, 1232                     1252   ap. those who turn in               
                                                                                                  ú¥Ž¦ «
1237   overburdened /                       
                                           ªüß¢È              repentance constantly

       put in difficulty                                1253   ap. those who have              Ž Š
                                                                                              úÂ ج÷
1238   ni. pl. wed /                     	
                                    ¦¸ðü«¢Šó             care for cleanliness

       marry not, 1242                                  1254   tilth                               Æ ·
                                                                                                   ª
1239   fg. idolatresses, those      Ç Ž 
                                    ©¢ŠïÂÌ÷            1255   as (when) you (pl.) will         	 û
                                                                                              ö¬’ Ë¢È
       (females) who ascribe partners
                                                                                                        ¾Š
                                                                                                   ¦÷ ë
                              ˆ ïÂÌ÷)
                              ¨Š Ž
                                                        1256   they sent before
       with Allah (sr.:
                                                                                                      Π
                                                                                                   ¦뢊ô÷
                                               ¨
                                               ˆ ÷¢È
                                                        1257   those who are to meet
1240   bond-woman, slave-girl
                                                                                                   
                                                                                              ¦Œôà´«¢Šó
                                       ¤  ßÈ
                               §«¸ ´ ¢
                                                        1258   ni. pl. make not
1241   pleased
                                                                                                  ¨ 
                                                                                                  ˆ ÓÂß
                                      ¸	 ü « ó
                            ¬½À¦  𠢊
                                                        1259   hindrance
1242   ni. pl. do not
       give in marriage, 1238                           1260   oaths                               Æ ¢ø¢È
                                                                                                   À
1243   slave                                  ¦ß
                                             ¾                (sr.:        ú	
                                                                             ø)
1244   they invite / call                 È 
                                          Àß¾      1261   pl. your being righteous, your          Â
                                                                                                    ¦ÌÂ ¦«
                                                               giving good treatment to others
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                85                                                Part: 3

1262   unintentional                          
                                               äóŠ           (sr.:        ˆ ³° )
                                                                            ò È
                                                                                                        ¸ï°
1263   clement, forbearing                ö 	 
                                            ô·         Ruku'         28       v: 7    12

1264   they swear                       È
                                        ÀóŒš       1278   divorce                                 ¼ Š
                                                                                                       Æ ¢Šô×
       (vn.:      
                 Æ ¢Šô¤Ê)                             1279   twice                                   Ê Â
                                                                                                       À¢« ÷
1265   to wait                            ¥
                                        Î«          1280   vn. retention,                         ½
                                                                                                      Æ ¢È÷¤Ê
1266   four months               ‰         
                                  ˢȌ¨à¥Ì°¢È             retaining, 1294
                                                               honorably                            » 
                                                                                                    Æ ÌÂÂà÷
                                             É
                                            –Šç
                                                        1281
1267   they go back / return
                                                               vn. to release                         ÂÈ«
                                                                                                     ¶Ž
                                         ÷ 
                                ¿±¸¦  Äß
                                                        1282
1268   they decided /
       resolved                                         1283   vn. kindness                          À
                                                                                                     Æ ¢È·¤Ê
1269   pp. pl. women who                  ôŠ 
                                     Ì©¢ŠìM Ø÷          1284   is not lawful                         N	
                                                                                                     ò¸¢Šó
       are divorced, divorcees
                                                                                                            ó
                                                                                            ¢ŠóÌÀ¢È ) ¢M¢È
                                           Š
                                           ¨¯Š¢Šô¯Š
                                                        1285   that                     (
1270   three
                                                               (they do / can ) not
1271   monthly menstruation periods         Œ
                                          Æ ÌÂÂë        1286   dl. they keep / abide                       	 
                                                                                                        ¢øì
       (sr.:     Æ Âë)
                   Œ                                          (vn.:        ¨
                                                                            ˆ ÷¢Šë¤Ê)
1272   wombs                             Æ ¢·Ì°¢È
                                         ¿              1287   limits imposed by                 	ô ®  
                                                                                                 þM ó¦É ̾·
       (sr.:     ö	 È
                  ·° )                                        Allah
                                                               blame, sin                              ¬ 
                                                                                                       Æ ¢ü³
                                          ¾
                                          Æ à¥
                                                        1288
1273   husbands
                                                               trespasses                                ¾ 
                                                                                                          à¬
                 òà¥)
                                                        1289
       (sr.:
                                                               other than him                           É Š
                                                                                                        ÁÂã
                                           ê
                                            ·¢È
                                                        1290
1274   more entitled
                                                               dl. they return to each                   
                                                                                                     ¢೦¬
                                               ®È
                                               M°
                                                        1291
1275   took back,
                                                               other, they come together again
       enforced a legal claim
                                          ¦             1292   fg. they reached                          Š
                                                                                                        úäô¥
1276   in that (case)                
                                     îó	 ¯	ç
                                                        1293   term, appointed time                      ò
                                                                                                         ˆ ³¢È
1277   men                                   Ê
                                         ¾¢³°
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                  86                                             Part: 2

1294   im. pl. retain, 1280                   Œ
                                           ¦ðÊÈ÷¢È     1310   pv. not be charged /             æôŠ «
                                                                                                   M ð¢Šó
1295   im. pl. release, let go, 1282             Â
                                            ¦· Ç             burdened
                                                          1311   her capacity                           É
                                                                                                    ¢ àÇÂ
1296   hurt                                   Æ ¦ÂÓ
                                              ° 	
                                                                 (   Æ
                                                                      ’èû or soul is feminine
1297   exhorts, admonishes                   Ú	 
                                     ·¸ÂŒ à                in Arabic)

       (vn.:        ˆ ßÂ)
                    ÚÈ                                    1312   pv. made not to suffer            °
                                                                                                   N ¢Ô«¢Šó
 Ruku'         29     v: 3      13            ¸ï°        1313   mother                                 Æ ¾ó	¦ÈÂ
                                                                                                        ¨
                                                          1314   child                                     óŠÂ
                                                                                                          ¾È
 2nd Part                É Œ
                     3/4 ¾ìǠij¸¢¥°¦¨¯
¯                                                  ¦
1298   ni. pl. place not ¾µ¸          ôÔ
                                     ¦Œ  à«¢Šó    1315   like of that, likewise       
                                                                                              îó	 ¯Œò’°÷
                                                                                                        	
       difficulties, prevent not from                     1316   to wean (from suckling)                      	
                                                                                                        ¢†ó¢Ðç
1299   more virtuous                          ï̱¢È      1317   consultation                         É
                                                                                                    ̰¢̫
1300   cleaner                                 
                                                ’×¢È    1318   pl. you gave out to nurse,        	 
                                                                                              ¦àӬȫ
1301   mothers                             Ê
                                           ©¦¾ó	¦È             you ask a women to suckle (your
                                                                 baby), 1302, 1305
                                        úà	 Â
                                ¸µ°  Ó 
1302   they suckle, give
                                                          1319   pl. you paid fully                    ô
                                                                                                    ö¬øM Ç
       suck (at mothers breast), 1305,1318
1303   dl. two years                         Ž 
                                             úóŠ·      1320   they die                           È Š  
                                                                                                    Àç ¬
1304   dl. two whole / complete             Ž Š	
                                            úô÷¢Šï      1321   they leave behind                  È Š
                                                                                                    ÀÌÂÉ°À
1305   vn. suckling at mother's               Â
                                           Œ¨ß¢Ó ó¦     1322   four                                   Š
                                                                                                        ¨à¥Ì°¢È
       breast, lactation, 1302, 1318                      1323   ten                                       
                                                                                                        ¦ÂÌß
1306   child                                 Æ óŒ÷
                                             ®          1324   pl. you made an                      Â
                                                                                                   ö¬Ó ß
1307   the one with child               ó® 
                                       þMÆ óŒ÷
                                       
                                                                 (indirect) offer
       (father)                                           1325   troth (marriage offer)    Ê ü  	
                                                                                            –Èó¦	¨¦’Ø»
1308   feeding, provision, sustenance          ¼Ê
                                               Æ Ì±°             with women

1309   clothing                              Æ Èï
                                             ¨ 	          1326   pl. you kept secret                  
                                                                                                    ö¬üü’ï¢È
                                                          1327   secret, confidential                      Â	
                                                                                                           Ç
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                               87                                                 Part: 2

1328   to resolve                           ¿
                                            Æ Äß      1345   on foot, standing                            Ê
                                                                                                      †¢³°
1329   wedding knot,              Ê ü ¨
                                  ¬¢Šðó¦É ¾’ìß      1346   pl. (those) with devotion                	
                                                                                                      ú¬ûŽ¢Šë
       marriage
                                                       1347   riding                                          É
                                                                                                      ¢û¢¦’ï°
1330   to be aware / cautious              Æ ’À·
                                           ° 
                                                       1348   provision, maintenance                         
                                                                                                       ¢ߢ¬÷
                                           ¸ï°
                                                       1349   the year                               É 
                                                                                                     ¾¸’ó¦
 Ruku'         30      v: 4     14
                                                       1350   without turning «°­                     Š
                                                                                                Ç«¦Â»¤ÊÂã
1331   to touch                             Æ
                                             ÷               (them) out, without expulsion

1332   appointed portion, (dower)        ˆ ÔÂç
                                         ¨ Ž Š
                                                                                                       ¸ï°
1333   rich, well to do                    Ç ÷
                                          Þ	          Ruku'         31       v: 7       15


1334   strained, poor                       Â	 
                                             ¬’ì÷     1351   Did you not see?                        
                                                                                                      «öóŠ¢È
1335   half                                ÐûŽ
                                          æ            1352   thousands                                »
                                                                                                       Æ óŒ¢É
1336   to forgo                             
                                             ’èß             (sr.:         ’ó¢È)
                                                                           æ
1337   nearer                            É
                                         §’ë¢È       1353   fear of death                    Ê  Š
                                                                                               ©ø’ó¦È°À·
                                            ¦
1338   piety, righteousness               à ’ì«      1354   im. pl. die                                
                                                                                              ©Â¿¦ «÷

1339   ni. pl. forget not                ü ó
                              IJÀ¦ È «¢Š      1355   who is he that                     	ó
                                                                                               ÌÃÀM¦¦È¯ú÷
                                                                                                           
1340   kindness, grace                     ò Š
                                           ˆ Ôç       1356   lends, offers loan                      É Ž 
                                                                                                      µÂ’ì
1341   im. pl. be                        Ü	 ·
                               ·»¬¦ Œ ç¢        1357   manifold                               ¢†ç¢àÓ¢È
       guardian, keep watch                                   (sr.: double            àÓ)
                                                                                     æ	
1342   prayers                             Š
                                       ©¦ôÏ
                                                       1358   many, much                              ¨ 	 Š
                                                                                                      Æ Â°ï
       (sr.:        ¨
                    Æ ôÏ)
                                                       1359   to straiten, give scantily                ¦ë
                                                                                                       Ҋ
1343   the mid most /              ¨ Ð
                              ØÇ’ó¦É ô ó¦
       middle prayer
                                                       1360   to amplify, to enlarge                   Ö
                                                                                                       ˆ È¥
1344   im. pl. stand up                       Œ
                                          ¦÷ë      1361   chiefs                                          
                                                                                                           ˜Šô÷
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                             88                                         Part: 3


1362   im. set up, raise,                  
                                         ’®à¥¦Ê     1379   has chosen                     èŠØϦÊ
       appoint, 1373
                                                     1380   has increased                        È
                                                                                                 ®¦È±
1363   king                                  	
                                          ¢†ðô÷
                                                     1381   abundantly,                      †Š
                                                                                             ¨ØÈ¥
1364   is?, would?                            
                                            ’òÿ             to be well to do
1365   pl. perchance (you)                 
                                       ö¬Èß        1382   the Ark of the Covenant         É
                                                                                            ©¥¢«
1366   if                                     ÌÀ¤Ê
                                                     1383   peace of reassurance,           ¨ 	 
                                                                                            ˆ üðÇ
1367   that not (   ¢ŠóÌÀ¢È)            ó
                                              ¢M¢È          inner peace

1368   Why should we not?             ¢üóŠ¢÷È   1384   remnant, relics                     ¨ 	
                                                                                                ˆ ì¥
1369   verily                                   Š
                                              ¾ë    1385   left behind                         È
                                                                                                ½Â«
1370   pv. we have been                    Ž
                                      ¢ü³Â»¢É     1386   carry                              	
                                                                                             Œòø¸«
       driven (out)
                                                     1387   angels                            Š 
                                                                                            Œ¨ðŸ	¢Šô÷
1371   children, sons                     È
                                           –ü¥¢È                                            ¸ï°
                                                      Ruku'         32        v: 6    16
1372   they turned away                      ó
                                          ¦M«
                                                     1388   set out                           Š Š
                                                                                              òÐç
1373   raised up,   1362                  Š 
                                          ®à¥
                                                     1389   armies, forces                    ® 
                                                                                              Æ ü³
1374   SAUL: A believing              È
                                      ©󌢊×
       and obedient leader in the time of
                                                     1390   one who will try /               Π	
                                                                                           öðô¬¦÷
       Prophet David X and Samuel.                          test you      
       Although poor, he was appointed
       as the king of Israel, because of his
                                                     1391   ap. one who tests / tries           	
                                                                                              ô¬¦÷
                                                                                                 Â
                                                                                                   û
       wisdom, personality, and
       knowledge of warfare bestowed to              1392   river, stream
       him by Allah
                                                            (pl.:        Æ ¢ û¢È)
                                                                         °
1375   whence, from where, how               û
                                            ¢È
1376   it would happen                  É Œ
                                        Àð
1377   pv. is given                       È
                                          ©š
1378   abundance                           †
                                           ¨àÇ
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                             89                                              Part: 3

1393   drank                           È Ž
                                       §ÂË           1412   routed out, vanquished,                 È
                                                                                                    ¿Äÿ
1394   not                                
                                         ÆóŠ               defeated
                                                     1413   repelled                                 ŠÈ
                                                                                                    Þ ç®
1395   to taste                           à×
                                         öŠ
                                                     1414   fg. corrupted                         Š
                                                                                               Ì©¾Èç
1396   scoop of handful                 ¨Š Œ
                                        ˆ çÂã
                                                     1415   earth                                 µ
                                                                                                  Æ Ì°¢È
1397   hand                                 ¾
                                             
                                                     1416   of kindness                      ‰ Š É
                                                                                             òÔç̯
       (pl.:        	
                  Ìľ¢È)
                                                     1417   these (actual meaning: that)            
                                                                                                    î’ô«	
1398   they drank                           Ž
                                       ¦¥ÂË
                                                     1418   surely you are                           û
                                                                                                    î¤Ê
1399   crossed                         ÈÈ
                                       ±Â¢³
                                                     1419   verily among / of                         	
                                                                                                    úøóŠ
1400   Goliath                       ©óŒ¢³
                                                     1420   messengers,                         	
                                                                                               úôÇÂ÷
1401   that they                             û
                                         ö ¢È            (those who are sent)

1402   ap. those who are to meet          Π
                                       ¦뢊ô÷             (sr.:        
                                                                    òÇÂ÷)
1403   how many                              Š
                                           öï        ^ Part : 3                Œ                ³
                                                                                òÇ ó¦î’ô«	 Ä `
1404   a little                         ¨Š 	 Š
                                        ˆ ôôë
                                                            messengers                               É
                                                                                                   ’òÇ°
                                         ŠŠ
                                        ¤ ôã
                                                     1421
1405   overcame, vanquished
                                                            spoke                                    ôŠ
                                                                                                    öM ï
                                           ¨Š	
                                           ˆ  ç
                                                     1422
1406   company, group
                                                            we supported /                        É
                                                                                                  Á¢û¾¢È
                                          É
                                       ¦Ì±¥
                                                     1423
1407   they came into the field,
                                                            strengthened him
       they came face to face
                                                            The Holy Spirit,             Ê Œ ¬ É
                                                                                         ²¾ì’ó¦É Ì°
                                        ¹Ž ç È
                                ¹°»Ì Â’ ¢
                                                     1424
1408   im. bestow, pour out
                                                            (Gabriel)
1409   im. make firm                   ª¦Š
                               ©§ª ¯          1425   fought with one another               Š 
                                                                                                  ò¬¬’ë¦Ê
1410   feet, foothold, steps            Ì¿¦¾’ë¢È    1426   does                                     
                                                                                                   Œòà’è
       (sr.:      ¿ Š
                  Æ ¾ ë)                             1427   wills, intends                           Ž
                                                                                                    ¾Â
1411   helped                            
                                         ÂÐû               (vn.:   Æ ®¦È°¤Ê)
                                                                    ¨È
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                  90                                              Part: 3
                                             ¸ï°
 Ruku'         33      v: 5     1                         1447   the religion,                         ¾
                                                                                                      ú ó¦
1428   im. pl. spend                             	
                                            ¦Œìèû¢È           [the system of life]

1429   bargaining                               Þ
                                                 ¥     1448   became distinct / clear                 
                                                                                                        ú¦«
1430   friendship                              ˆ M»
                                               ¨ô        1449   error                                    Š
                                                                                                          ã
1431   intercession                        ¨ 
                                           ˆ ߢŠèË        1450   false deities, idols or           É Œ
                                                                                                   ©㢊×
                                                                 whatever is worshipped
1432   the alive, the living                  ¸’ó¦
                                                               besides Allah

1433   self-subsistent, eternal                  Š
                                              ¿ë       1451   grasped, took hold                
                                                                                                 îÈø¬ǦÊ
1434   slumber                                 ¨	
                                               ˆ üÇ       1452   hand-hold                             Æ ÂÂß
                                                                                                       ¨È 
1435   sleep                                    Æ û
                                                ¿         1453   firm, unfailing                           É
                                                                                                       쒯Â
1436   who is                                     
                                            ¦È¯ú÷       1454   never breaking                  È
                                                                                                 ¿¢Ð	èû¦¢Šó
1437   he who (relative pronoun)               	ó
                                             ÌÄÀM¦        1455   protecting friend, patron               È
                                                                                                          ó	Â
1438   leave, permission                       À
                                               Æ Ì¯¤Ê            (pl.:         
                                                                              Æ ¢ó	Ì¢È)
1439   between, among                           
                                                ú¥     1456   pl. darkness                           ŒŒ
                                                                                                    ©¢øôÛ
1440   before them                        	
                                    öŽ ¾¢Èú¥    1457   light                                   Æ û
                                                                                                         °
                                                           Ruku'         34        v: 4      2         ¸ï°
1441   they encompass not,          È Œ 	
                                    Àظ¢Šó
       they cannot bound / encircle
                                                          1458   argued, disputed                      «
                                                                                                       M –·
       (vn.:        ¨Š
                    ˆ ×¢·¦Ê)                             1459   gives life                            Ž¸
1442   throne                             	
                                           ÇÂŒï         1460   causes death                          	
                                                                                                      ªø
1443   to weary, fatigue                        Æ Ì¢È
                                                ®         1461   I                                         ¢û¢È
1444   could not weary,                   É Œ
                                          ® ¢Šó      1462   fg. sun                             Æ
                                                                                                      øË
       fatigue, tire
                                                          1463   became dumb founded,                  
                                                                                                       ªŽ ¥
1445   most high, exalted, sublime            	 
                                               ôß               confounded

1446   compulsion                           Æ ¦’ï¤Ê
                                            Á             1464   or                                        Ì¢È
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                            91                                             Part: 3

1465   like                                 È
                                            ½              put together
                                                    1484   we clothe                          ¦Ȓðû
1466   passed by                           Â
                                           ÷
                                                    1485   flesh                                ¢ø¸óŠ
       (vn.:      ° 
                  Æ ÌÂÂ÷)
                                                    1486   im. show me                             Ê
                                                                                                Žû°¢È
1467   township, hamlet, town            ¨ Š
                                         ˆ Âë
                     ¦
                                                    1487   did (you) not                             È
                                                                                                 öóŠÂ¢È
       (pl.:         ë
                  à Œ )
                                                    1488   to be at ease                      ú	 
                                                                                                ø’Ø
       fg. she, it                          	
                                          ÿ
                                                                                     ¤Š
                                                                                      ’ôë)        ŽŠ
                                                                                                 ¦’ôë
1468
                                                    1489   my heart (heart:
       fg. overturned                  ¨Ê
                                       ˆ ¢»
                                                                                                    
                                                                                                  ’À»
1469
                                                    1490   im. take
       roofs, turrets                 Æ ÌÂÂß
                                      ³ 
                                                                                                Š
                                                                                                ¨à¥Ì°¢È
1470
                                                    1491   four
       fg. this                          Ê	
                                         ÁÀ ÿ
                                                                                                     Š
                                                                                                  Â×
1471
                                                    1492   bird
       made to die, caused death       È
                                       ©¢÷¢È
                                                                        ° Œ
                                                                        Æ ×)
1472
                                                           (pl.:
       one hundred                       ˆ ŸŠ¢	÷
                                         ¨
                                                                                                    
                                                                                                  ÂÏ
1473
                                                    1493   im. tame
       year                               ¿
                                          Æ ¢ß
                                                                                                 Š 
                                                                                                 ò¦³
1474
                                                    1494   mountain
       you tarried / remained thus       Ž
                                        ª’°¦óŠ
                                                                        ¾ Ž
                                                                        Æ ¢¦³)
1475
                                                           (pl.:
       food                             ¿ Š
                                        Æ ¢à×
                                                                                                  
                                                                                                 Æ ij
1476
                                                    1495   portion, part
       drink                          Æ ¦ÂË
                                      § 
                                                                                                     
                                                                                                ¢àÇ
1477
                                                    1496   with speed
1478   not rotten, untouched      þȬöóŠ
                                   ü               Ruku'         35       v: 3       3        ¸ï°
       by the passing of time
                                                    1497   grain, seed                            ¨¦ 
                                                                                                  ˆ ·
1479   im. look                           Œ
                                        ÂÜû¦É
                                                    1498   grows                                 
                                                                                               ª¬¦û¢È
1480   ass, donkey                     Æ ¢ø·
                                       ° 	
                                                           (vn.:        ©
                                                                        Æ ¢¦û¦Ê)
1481   bones                           ¿ 	
                                       Æ ¢ŠÜß
                                                    1499   seven                                  
                                                                                                 Þ¦Ç
1482   how                              Š
                                       æï
                                                    1500   ears (of corn)                      Š 
                                                                                               ò¥Ž¢üÇ
1483   we set up /                      Ä	 üû
                                ±³À Ì 
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                               92                                            Part: 3

       (sr.:     ¨Š ¦ Ç
                 ˆ ôü )                             1517   fell                               È
                                                                                                 §¢Ï¢È
1501   gives manifold,                   	
                                       æߢÔ        1518   rainstorm                            ò
                                                                                                   ˆ ¥Ž¦ÈÂ
       multiplies, increases
                                                       1519   smooth, bare                             
                                                                                                  ¦¾’ôÏ
       (vn.:      ¨Š  
                  ˆ èߢÔ÷)
                                                       1520   they have no control          È 	
                                                                                            ÀÌÂÉ°¾’좊ó
1502   they spend                        È 	
                                         ÀŒìèü
                                                       1521   in search of, seek                    	
                                                                                                  Æ –䬥¦Ê
       (vn.:      ¼
                  Æ ¢Šèû¤Ê)
                                                       1522   pleasure of Allah       	ô           
                                                                                      þM ó¦Ê©¢ÓÂ÷
1503   pl. wealth                         ¾¦÷¢È
                                                       1523   certainty, strengthening                Ž
                                                                                                   ¢¬¦’°«
       (sr.:     ¾
                 Æ ¢÷)
                                                       1524   garden                                 ˆ ³
                                                                                                     ¨ü 
1504   do not follow                  È Ž
                                      Àব¢Šó
                                                              (pl.:     © ü
                                                                        Æ ¢³)
       (vn.:     Æ ¢¦«¦Ê)
                 ¸
                                                       1525   on a height                          ¨ È
                                                                                                   Æ ¥°
1505   reminding (others) of generosity         ü
                                               ¢
÷
                                                       1526   fruits, yields (of harvest)           òŒ
                                                                                                    ˆ ï¢É
1506   hurt                                 Ãů¢È
                                                       1527   dl. two fold                      Ž Š	
                                                                                                úèàÓ
1507   kind word               » Â÷¾ Š
                               Æ Â à Æ ë
                                                       1528   showers, dew                           KŠ
                                                                                                     ò×
1508   forgiveness                        Æ Âèä÷
                                          ¨ 	 
                                                       1529   liked                                   ®È
                                                                                                      MÂ
1509   charity                           ¨Š
                                         ˆ ë¾Ï
                                                       1530   any of you                         ï¾ 
                                                                                               öŒ  ·¢È
1510   self sufficient, free of all wants     üã
                                             Ž Š
                                                       1531   pl. palm trees, date palms          ò 	
                                                                                                  ˆ ¼û
1511   forbearing                          ö 	 
                                             ô·
                                                       1532   pl. vines                          §
                                                                                                 Æ ¢üߢÈ
1512   ni. pl. void not, cancel not      ô	 «
                                      ¦Œ ئ¢Šó
                                                              (sr.:      ü	ß)
                                                                        ¤
1513   like him who                       	ó
                                        ÌÄÀM¢Šï
                                                       1533   old age                                Â	
                                                                                                      ¦ï
1514   to be seen (of)                      Æ –ŠŸ°
                                              Ê
                                                       1534   children                             ¨ ° É
                                                                                                   ˆ O ¯
1515   hard, barren / smooth rock              
                                        ÌÀ¦’èÏ
                                                       1535   pl. feeble, weak                  É 
                                                                                                 –èàÓ
1516   soil, dust                          §
                                           Æ ¦Â«
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                 93                                           Part: 3

       (sr.:        æ 	 
                     àÓ)                               1555   pl. you disclose                    Â ¦
                                                                                           ®§¦Ì ¾ «

1536   sr. whirlwind, hurricane        Æ ¢ÐߤÊ
                                       °                 1556   well, good                            ø	
                                                                                                     ¢ àûŽ
1537   fg. consumed by               ª Š   ·Ê
                             ¼°¬ ë¬ ¦            1557   pl. poor, needy                       Š
                                                                                                   ¡ÂìŒç
       fire, burnt
                                                         1558   atones, removes from                 èŠ
                                                                                                   ÂO ð
1538   pl. you may ponder,          È ðŠ 
                                    ÀÌÂÂM 謫
       you may give thought                              1559   ill deeds, evils                     
                                                                                                 ©–Š Ç
                                         ¸ï°
 Ruku'         36     v: 6     4                                (sr.:       ˆ   Ç )
                                                                            ¨Š
1539   good things                        ˆ ¦ ×
                                          ¨Š
                                                         1560   it is not                            
                                                                                                    ÆóŠ
1540   ni. pl. seek not                 ø
                                    ¦ø «¢Šó
                                                         1561   but                                   	
                                                                                                    úðó
1541   bad / vile things                   Ž
                                        ®¦»
                                                         1562   Allah's countenance,           	ô þ È
                                                                                               þM ó¦ ³Â
1542   pl. you would not                   
                                         ö¬ÈóŠ                Allah's face

1543   ap. takers, acceptors             		
                                       ÌÄÀ» ¦   ¦
                                                         1563   repaid fully,                      »
                                                                                                   M 
                                                                redeemed back, 1604
                                        Ô	 «
                                     ¦ øä
                                                                                                ÂÂ	 ·É
                                                                                       °´¬¦Ì  Ð ¢
1544   pl. you close eyes
                                                         1564   pv. straitened
1545   to close eyes                  Ò
                                       øŠã                    (restricted from travel)

1546   owner of praise                  ¾ 	 
                                          ø·           1565   to travel / move about                  
                                                                                                   ¢¥ÂÓ
1547   poverty                               ’ìç
                                            Š           1566   thinks, accounts               ¤  ¸
                                                                                       §²¬ È 

1548   obscenity                            Š
                                       –Ì¸ç            1567   pl. wealthy (people),                Ž
                                                                                                  –ü’ã¢È
                                                                those free from want
1549   gives, grants                          
                                          «	                (sr.:       Ž Š
                                                                             ü ã)
1550   wisdom                          ¨ 	
                                       ˆ ø’ð·            1568   restraint, modesty                  N
                                                                                                  æèà«
1551   receives admonition                ïÀ
                                         ÂM M          1569   you know / recognize»°¸       »Ž
                                                                                                 É Âà«
1552   almsgiving, spending                ¨Š Š
                                           ˆ ìèû        1570   mark                                  	
                                                                                                   ¢øÇ
1553   pl. you made vow                       Š
                                        ö«Ì°Àû        1571   importunity,                      ¢†ç¢¸’ó¤Ê
1554   if                                    ÌÀ¤Ê               (wrapped, covered)
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                                    94                                        Part: 3
                                              ¸ï°
 Ruku'         37      v: 7     5                           1588   guilty, sinner                      ¯	¢È
                                                                                                      ö
 3rd Part            1/4       Œ
                               òÇÂó¦î’ô«	 Ä Þ¥°
                                              ³             1589   im. pl. give up                  ¦Ì°¯
                                                                                                       ÉÈ
                                                                                                        	
                                                                                                      ì¥
                                                Â	
                                               ¦
 Ç
                                                            1590   remained, remnant
1572   in secret
                                                                                                  Ž	
                                                                                                 úü÷š÷
                                            ¨ 
                                            ˆ ûŽ¢Šôß
                                                            1591   ap. believers
1573   openly
                                                                                                       Ȋ
                                                                                                  ¦û¯’˜ç
                                                Â
                                             ¦¥ ó¦
                                                            1592   then be warned,
1574   usury, interest
                                                                   then take notice
1575   they will not stand /          È  Œ
                                      À÷ì¢Šó         1593   war                            §
                                                                                                  Æ ·
       rise up
                                                                                                        ÌÀ¤Ê
                                                  Š
                                               ¢øï
                                                            1594   if
1576   as, like
                                                                                                        
                                                                                                      ö¬¦«
                                             ¦ 
                                           ŒÖ¼¬
                                                            1595   pl. you repent
1577   driven to madness,
       confounded                                           1596   principal, capital sums       Æ Ì£°
                                                                                                 ² ÉÉ
1578   to touch                                Æ
                                                ÷          1597   the one with                           É
                                                                                                        ̯
1579   trade                                     Þ
                                                  ¥      1598   difficulty                     Æ ÂÈß
                                                                                                  ¨
1580   came                                    È
                                                –³         1599   to postpone, to grant time       ¨ 	
                                                                                                    Æ ÂÜû
1581   admonition                          ¨Š 	 
                                           ˆ Üß÷          1600   ease                          Æ ÂÈ÷
                                                                                                 ¨  
1582   refrained, desisted                      
                                              ¬û¦Ê       1601   that                                 ÌÀ¢È
1583   (that is) past, passed                 Š
                                             æô Ç           1602   pl. you remit the debt,           ¾
                                                                                                ¦Œë Ы
1584   repeated                                 È
                                                ®¢ß               you waive the amount
                                                                                                È à «
                                                                                                À ³Â
                    ®
                    Æ ß)
                                                            1603   pl. pv. you will be
       (vn.:
                                                                   brought back
1585   to blight, to deprive                  ê 
                                               ¸÷         1604   be paid in full, 1563             ç
                                                                                                     «
1586   increases                              ¥ŽÂ       Ruku'        38    v: 8       6        ¸ï°

1587   impious, ungrateful                    ° èŠ
                                              Æ ¢M ï        1605   pl. you borrow                  
                                                                                                 ö¬ü¦¾«
       (sr.:        Â	
                     碊ï)                                        from one another
Surah-2: Al-Baqarah                               95                                           Part: 3

1606   debt                                   úÈ
                                               ®    1625   will remind (the other)              ïŠ
                                                                                                  ÂO À«
                                                                                                    ¦
1607   fixed term                 ø ÷ ò 
                                 
 È ˆ ³¢È          1626   the other                         à »¢É
1608   and (he) should                 È
                                    ¤¬’ð’ó          1627   when they                     É
                                                                                         ¦ß®¢÷¦È¯¤Ê
       record / write                                         are summoned or called
1609   scribe, writer                   ¤
                                         «	¢Šï        1628   ni. pl. be not averse,            Š
                                                                                           ¦ø È«¢Šó
1610   equity, justice                   ¾ 
                                         Æ ¾ß                disdain not
                                                       1629   to averse, to disdain                     ¿
                                                                                                        Æ ’˜Ç
1611   should not refuse              È
                                      §’˜¢Šó
                                                       1630   small, short                          	
                                                                                               ¦ÂäÏ
1612   (he shall) dictate                Š	
                                         òôø
                                                       1631   great, big                               ŽŠ
                                                                                                  ¦Â¦ï
1613   diminish, lessen, decrease        
                                       Ƽ¦
                                                       1632   more equitable / just                
                                                                                                 ŒÖȒë¢È
1614   man of low understanding,             	
                                        ¢ èÇ
       mentally defecient                              1633   more upright                          É
                                                                                                    ¿’ë¢È
1615   weak, feeble, infirm                 	
                                       ¢†èàÓ         1634   testimony, witness                ¨È 
                                                                                                Æ ®¢ Ë
1616   guardian                               È
                                               ó	    1635   small                                 GÌ®¢È
1617   im. pl. call to /              
                                  ¦Ì¾Ž ̬Ç¦Ê        1636   ni. pl. you doubt not         ¦¥¢««¢Šó
       get witness
                                                                        ¤È
                                                                         °)
                                     Ž  
                                     ú¾Ž Ë
                                                              (vn.:
1618   dl. two witnesses
                                                                                              Æ ÂÓ¢·
                                                                                              ¨ 	
                        ò È
                        ˆ ³° )          ¾ Ê
                                        Æ ¢³°
                                                       1637   hand to hand, on the spot
1619   men (sr.:
                                                                                               À Â	 «
                                                                                       °Â®È Â  ¾
                                      Ž 
                                      ú«¢ÈÂ÷¦Ê
                                                       1638   pl. you transact /
1620   dl. two women
                                                              carry out
1621   pl. you approve / agree       È 
                                     ÀÓ«          1639   let no harm be done °°µ     °
                                                                                             M ¢Ô¢Šó
1622   witnesses                            
                                       ¡¾ Ë          1640   sin, unGodliness                  ¼Œ
                                                                                                Æ Èç
1623   fg. errs (through                 ò	
                                         M Ô«         1641   teaches                                 ô 
                                                                                                    öO à
       forgetfulness)
                                                                                                  À Ê
                                                                                                  Æ ¢ÿ°
                                       
                                    ¢øÿ ¾·¤Ê
                                          ¦
                                                       1642   pledge
1624   one out of the
       two (women)                                     1643   pp. taken in hand               ˆ Ó¦’ì÷
                                                                                              ¨ 
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                   96                                         Part: 3

1644    entrusted, trusted                     	
                                               ú÷¢È                 step by step)
                                                             1659   ap. confirming                     ¾ 
                                                                                                    ¢†ë Ð÷
1645    deliver up, discharge                  ®
                                               O š
                                                             1660   before it                     	
                                                                                                  þ¾ú¥
1646    sinful                                  ¯	 ¦
                                               ö    ¦




                                             ¸ï°
                                                             1661   avenger of retribution       Ç 	 ¯
                                                                                                 ¿¢Šì¬û¦ÂÉ
 Ruku'         39    v: 2      7
1647    pl. you make known /                    
                                             ¦Ì¾¦«        1662   is not hidden                 è¼¢Šó
        bring into open                                      1663   fashions, shapes                 ° 
                                                                                            °Â´É  Ð
                                      ¤ 	 ¸
                              §²¬ Ç¢ 
                                                                                                     Ì¿¢·Ì°¢È
1648    reckons,
                                                             1664   wombs
        accounts for
1649    we heard / listened                   	
                                         ¢üàøÇ             1665   as                                 Š
                                                                                                      æï
1650    we obeyed / followed                      Š
                                             ¢üà×¢È        1666   firmly constructed,         Æ ¢øð¸÷
                                                                                                © Š 
                                                                    clear
                                              Œ
                                       îû¦’èã
                                                                                               Ê 	 ¿
                                                                                               §¢¬ðó¦N ¢É
1651    (grant us) your
                                                             1667   foundation of the book,
        forgiveness
                                                                    substance of the book
                                             	 
                                          ÂÐ÷
                                                                                                          
                                                                                                        »¢É
1652    end of journey, return
                                                             1668   others
                                            ôŠ
                              ¢Šó »¾½æO ð
                                                                                                         
                                                                                               Æ ¢ ¥Ž¢̬÷
                                                                                               ©
1653    does not burden
                                                             1669   allegorical
1654    we forgot                               
                                             ¢üÊÈû               (not entirely clear)

1655    we fell into error,                   Š
                                         ¢û’˜Ø»¢È          1670   deviation, perversity                ˆ ±
                                                                                                         âÈ
        we did wrong unwillingly                             1671   seeking                               	
                                                                                                       –䬥¦Ê
                                         
                                         æߦÈÂ
                                                                                                         ˆ ü¬ç
                                                                                                         ¨ 	
1656    im. and pardon (us)
                                                             1672   confusion
                                               
                                         ¢û¢Šó÷
                                                                                                      òÊ
                                                                                                      ˆ ¢«
1657    our protector / master
                                                             1673   interpretation, explanation
 Ruku'         40    v: 3          8         ¸ï°
                                                             1674   pl. firmly                  À  ¼	 °
                                                                                        ­²°È   ǦÈ

       ^              ¾ ¨È 
             ÈÀ¦Âø	ßÊÊ ¡É °Ç       `
                                                                    grounded / sound (people)
                                                             1675   ni. cause not to               ¹Ž «
                                                                                           ¹Ä±Ì Ä¢Šó
       The Family of Imran                                          stray / deviate
       Surah 3: Aal-e-'Imran                                 1676   im. bestow, grant                     
                                                                                                        ¤ÿ
1658    revealed (sent down                    ÈÄ
                                               ¾ û         1677   from your side               ó 	
                                                                                                îû¾Mú÷
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                     97                                       Part: 3

1678   bestower, granter                          § ÿÈ
                                                  Æ ¢        1696   to see, to perceive               Æ Ì¢°
                                                                                                        ÄÈ
1679   ap. one who gathers                         Þ	
                                                    ÷¢³      1697   eye                               ú
                                                                                                         ß
       or assembles
                                                               1698   strengthens, supports             
                                                                                                       ¾
1680   promise, tryst                              ® 	
                                                   Æ ¢à÷
                                                   ¸ï°
                                                               1699   help                             Â
                                                                                                        Ðû
 Ruku'         1            v: 9      9
1681   fuel                                           ŒÈ
                                                   ®ë       1700   lesson                           Æ Â¦ß
                                                                                                       ¨ 	
1682   like                                             È
                                                        ½      1701   those (who have), those of       	óÂÉ
                                                                                                           ¢
1683   way of doing something                       §È
                                                    Æ Ì¢®      1702   pl. eyes (insight)             Æ ¢Ð¥¢È
                                                                                                     °
1684   sins (sr.:             û¯)
                             ¤È                   Æ û¯
                                                  § É          1703   pv. beautified                    ú±
                                                                                                         É
1685   severe, strict, terrible                    ¾	
                                                    ¾Ë      1704   love                             ¤
                                                                                                        ·
1686   retribution, punishment                    § 	
                                                  Æ ¢Šìß       1705   joys, worldly desires        Æ ¦ Ë
                                                                                                   © 
1687   pv. pl. you shall                         È ¦Š «
                                                 Àôä             pleasurable things (sr.:     ¨ 
                                                                                                   Æ  Ë)
       be overcome                                             1706   women                            Æ –ÈûŽ
                                                                                                        
       resting place                                ® 	
                                                    Æ ¢ ÷
                                                                                                         Ž
                                                                                                        úü¥
1688
                                                               1707   children, offspring, sons
         dl. two hosts / armies                    Ž Š	
                                                   ú¬ ç
                                                                                                        	 Š
                                                                                                     Â×¢üë
1689
                                                               1708   hoards, treasures
       (sr.:       ¨Š	
                   ˆ   ç)
                                                               1709   hoarded, heaped up            É Š Š
                                                                                                    ¨ÂØüì÷
       dl. they two met                            ¬ Š  óÊ
                                          ļ¾¢쬒 ¤
                                                                                                      ¤ È
                                                                                                       ÿ¯
1690
                                                               1710   gold
       fighting                                   ò	 ì
                                          ¾©¼Œ «¢Š «
                                                                                                       ˆ ç
                                                                                                       ¨Ô 	
1691
                                                               1711   silver
                                                    ¦
1692   another                                   à »¢É      1712   horses                           ò 
                                                                                                       ˆ »
1693   ap. fg. disbelieving,                      ¨ 	
                                                  Æ Âç¢Šï      1713   branded                       ¨ 
                                                                                                    ˆ ÷ È÷
       denying
1694   they see                                    È 
                                                   ÀÌ      1714   cattle                           Æ ¢àû¢È
                                                                                                       ¿
1695   dl. twice in their number                       Š	
                                                 öŽ ô’°÷    1715   land, tilth, cultivation       ª
                                                                                                     Æ ·
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                  98                                           Part: 3

1716   excellent abode,            § ¢ø’ó¦ È·
                                      ¦
                                            ú              1734   mighty, powerful                     Ď
                                                                                                         Äß
       best resort
                                                            1735   wise                               ö 	 
                                                                                                        ð·
1717   spouses                                «¦ÈÂ̱¢È
                                                             3rd Part           1/2     ŒÂ
                                                                                        òÇ ó¦î’ô«	 Ä æÐû
                                                                                                       ³
1718   pp. fg. purified                       ¨ Š
                                              Æ Â Ø÷      1736   swift in reckoning /        	 ގ
                                                                                          ̧¢ȸ’ó¦ ÂÇ
1719   goodwill, pleasure                    Æ ¦Ó°
                                             À Ê                   calling to account

1720   one who sees, beholder                   Â	
                                                 Ð¥     1737   I have surrendered,               Š
                                                                                                    ªøôÇ¢È
                                                                   submitted
       (vn.:     Æ °¢Ð¥)
                 ¨È                                         1738   myself, my face                   Ž ³Â
                                                                                                           È
1721   slaves, bondsmen, servants                Æ ¢¦ß
                                                 ® 	        1739   (those) who followed me        Ž  « 
                                                                                                  úদŽú÷
1722   im. guard us from, save us                      	
                                                    ¢üë    1740   they turned back / away                ó
                                                                                                       ¦M«
       (im. guard:   Ê
                     ¼;      us:    ¢û )                   1741   to convey, to deliver                Æ ¢Šô¥
                                                                                                        ¹
1723   pl. truthful, true (people)          ú뮢Ï
                                             	Ê             Ruku'        2     v: 11     10           ¸ï°

1724   pl. obedient, devout ones                	
                                               ú¬ûŽ¢Šë    1742   they enjoin                      È 
                                                                                                    ÀÌÂÂ÷’˜
1725   obedient, devout                         ª
                                                 ûŽ¢Šë     1743   have come to                   ªŠ Ž 
                                                                                          ¶§¬ ئ·
                                                                   naught, failed
       those who spend                         		
                                              úìèü÷
                                                                                                          Š
                                                                                                          ã
1726
                                                            1744   deceived, deluded
       those who pray                      Ž	 
                                          úÂèä¬È÷
                                                                                        È 
                                                                                        À̬’è¦û¢Šï¢÷
1727
                                                            1745   what they invent,
       for pardon
                                                                   what they forge / fabricate
       pl. dawn, later parts of               Æ ¢¸Ç¢È
                                              °
                                                                                                        Š
                                                                                                       æï
1728
                                                            1746   how
       night, early hours of morning
1729   bore witness                              
                                                ¾Ž Ë        1747   be in full                            çÉ
                                                                                                      ªO Â
1730   that he                                      û
                                                    þ¢È    1748   O Allah!                            öô
                                                                                                          ó¦
1731   men of learning,                   Ž 	 ó¢
                                          ö’ôà’ó¦ŒÂÉ      1749   owner, sovereign                    
                                                                                                       îó	¢÷
       learned
                                                            1750   sovereignty, dominion                   
                                                                                                        î’ô÷
1732   maintaining, standing firm                ö
                                                  Ÿ	–Šë
                                                            1751   you please / will                    –Ì«
                                                                                                       É
1733   justice, equity                         Ö 	
                                               ˆ Èë
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                 99                                         Part: 3

1752   you take off / strip off ¸±À     ¸Ž
                                            É Äü«      1771   pp. dedicated                      Â 
                                                                                                  ¦Å° ¸÷
1753   you bring low, you humiliate            ¾	
                                               N À«       1772   fg. delivered, gave birth     ªàÓÂ
                                                                                                      È
1754   hand                                       ¾
                                                        1773   gave birth, delivered             È
                                                                                                   ÞÓ Â
1755   verily you                               û
                                               î¤Ê        1774   the male                           ŠÀ
                                                                                                   ÂïM ó¦
1756   you make pass,                      ²	 
                                   «¾Â ó«           1775   female                             °û¢É
                                                                                                  ª  ø
                                                                                       ¿²   Ç
       you plunge
                                                           1776   I named
1757   night                                    ò
                                                ˆ óŠ
                                                           1777   I seek protection,                 À 	 É
                                                                                           ¯Â¸Œ ߢ
1758   day                                     Æ ¢ û
                                               °                  I commit to protection
1759   friends, allies                    –	óÌ¢È
                                         É                 1778   made (her) grow                    
                                                                                                    ª¦û¢È
1760   besides                                 È
                                               ÀÌÂÉ®       1779   growth                              ¢«¢¦û
1761   in anything                        	
                                       Ëç             1780   appointed guardian                Š èŠ
                                                                                                    òM ï
1762   to guard, to protect                     Æ ¢Šì«
                                                ¨          1781   sanctuary, chamber            § 	
                                                                                                Æ ¦Â¸÷
1763   warns, cautions                   °À 
                                °¯¬É O ¸            1782   whence, from where                    û
                                                                                                       ¢È
1764   himself, his self
                                           
                                            þȒèû        1783   there, that place                
                                                                                                  îó	¢üÿ
1765   confronted, presented               
                                        ¦ÂÔ¸÷           1784   prayed                              ¢ß®
                                                                                                         È
1766   a mighty space                   	 
                                     ¦¾à¥¦¾÷¢È        1785   im. bestow, grant                    
                                                                                                     ¤ÿ
       of distance, a great distance
                                                           1786   from Your (bounty /          ó 	
                                                                                              îû¾Mú÷
1767   full of pity, kindness            Æ Ì£°
                                         » ÉÈ                     presence)
                                            ¸ï°
 Ruku'         3     v: 10    11                           1787   ap. confirming,                    ¾ 
                                                                                                  ¢†ë Ð÷
1768   descendant, offspring                   ¨ ° É
                                               ˆ O ¯             one who confirms

       (pl.:       © ° É
                   Æ ¢O ¯)                                1788   word                              †  	Š
                                                                                                    ¨øôï
1769   woman, wife                        ¨È
                                          ˆ  ¦Â÷¦Ê       1789   leader, noble                        
                                                                                                    ¦¾Ç
1770   womb, belly                              ’Ø¥
                                               ú           1790   chaste                                
                                                                                                 ¦Å°з
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                   100                                        Part: 3

1791   son (pl.:       À 	
                       Æ ¢ø’ôã)                 Æ ¢Šôã
                                                 ¿ Œ          1811   those brought near              Š
                                                                                                    ú¥Ž ì÷
1792   old-age                                    Â	
                                                   ¦ï               (unto Allah)
                                                              1812   cradle                             ¾
                                                                                                        ÷
1793   barren                                    Â	
                                                  ë¢ß
                                                              1813   manhood, maturity                    Š
                                                                                                      † ï
1794   that not (   ¢ŠóÌÀ¢È )                   ó
                                                     ¢M¢È
                                                              1814   man                               Â
                                                                                                        ̥
1795   tokens, gestures                          ¦Ä÷°
                                                      È
                                                              1815   decreed, willed                  Ԋë
1796   im. praise, glorify                        ¦
                                                ¶Ç
                                                              1816   a matter, a thing                  ¦Â÷¢È
1797   evening, early hours of night            Ìß
                                               	 
                                                              1817   I fashion / create / make        Œ
                                                                                                      êô»¢È
1798   morning                                 °¢Šð¥¤Ê
                                                ¸ï°
                                                              1818   clay                               ×
                                                                                                       ú	
 Ruku'        4     v: 11        12
1799   im. be devout, be obedient                 	
                                                ¬ü’ë¦É     1819   like the shape / figure of     
 Š
                                                                                                    ¨Š  ï
1800   tidings, news (sr.:         ˜
                                   ˆ¦û)         Æ –¦û¢È
                                                              1820   bird (pl.:     Æ ×)
                                                                                    ° Š                 ×
                                                                                                        Š
1801   we reveal                                 	
                                               ·û         1821   to breathe into                     ’èû
                                                                                                        º
1802   you were not                         
                                            ªüŒï¢÷         1822   permission of Allah          	ô À
                                                                                                  þM ó¦É ̯¤Ê
1803   with them                                     
                                               öŽ ¾óŠ      1823   I heal                           Ɏ
                                                                                                      ¥Â¥¢É
1804   with                                        
                                                 ÌÄ¾óŠ        1824   blind by birth                   þ
                                                                                                       ø’ï¢È
1805   when they drew their lots           È Œ
                                           Àì’ô̯¤Ê       1825   leper                           ´
                                                                                                     Æ Â¥¢È
1806   pens (sr.:       öŠ Š
                         ô ë)                  Ì¿¢Šô’ë¢È     1826   pl. dead                         «÷
                                                                                                          
1807   which of them                                 
                                                 ö ¢È      1827   pl. you store up             È 	¾
                                                                                                  ÀÌ» «
1808   which                                        K ¢È
                                                    Ä         1828   perceived, became conscious      Æ
                                                                                                       ·¢È
1809   they quarreled /               È 	 
                                      ÀøЬ¼              1829   helpers                         Æ ¢Ðû¢È
                                                                                                     °
       disputed                                               1830   disciples                        Ê 
                                                                                                  ÌÀ°¦·
1810   illustrious, of great honour                ŽÈ
                                              ¢ ³Â                (companions of Prophet
                                                                     Jesus X)
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                      101                                           Part: 3

1831     we                                        ú¸û        1844     pl. you are                      
                                                                                                         ö¬û¢È¢ÿ
1832     to plot, scheme                            Â 
                                                     ’ð÷        1845     these, (those who)               –Šó£¢ÿ
                                                                                                          Ê É
                                                   ¸ï°
 Ruku'           5     v: 13       13                            1846     pl. you argued / disputed       
                                                                                                       ö¬´³¢·
                               ŒÂ
                               òÇ ó¦î’ô«	 Ä ¸¢¥°¦¨¯
¯
                                              ³
                                                                 1847     nearest of mankind         Ê ü
                                                                                                     ²¢ó¦ŠóÌ¢È
 3rd Part            3/4

1833     (I will) take you /                   ç 
                                              îO ¬÷            Ruku'           7      v: 8   15        ¸ï°
         gather you
                                                                          a party, a section               ¨Š
                                                                                                           ˆ èŸ	–Š×
                                                    ç¦È°
                                                   Þ	
                                                                 1848
1834     one who lifts, raises, ascends
                                                                          beginning of the day,      Ê ü È
                                                                                                     °¢ ó¦þ³Â
                                                     ç 
                                                   O 
                                                                 1849
1835     pays in full, recompenses
                                                                          daybreak
1836     rewards, wages,                             
                                                  °³¢É         1850     singles out,                    Î
                                                                                                           ¬¼
         remuneration                                                     specially chooses
1837     dust                                     §¦Â«
                                                  É              1851     you trust / entrust                  
                                                                                                             ú÷’˜«
1838     we pray humbly / earnestly                   
                                                  ’òŽ ¬¦û      1852     a treasure                             	
                                                                                                           °¢ŠØüë
1839     vn. to pray humbly/                  ¾ 	 ¥Ê
                                      ¾Á§Æ ¢ ¬ ¦          1853     will return / pay back              O š
                                                                                                              ®
         earnestly
                                                                          you kept constantly                É
                                                                                                            ª÷®
                                                  Š
                                                ÎÐ ë
                                                                 1854
1840     narrative, account
                                                                          ap. standing                      ¢øŸ	–Šë
             ˆ  ë ì ë )
             ¨Ð 	 Î Œ Î Š
                                                                 1855
         (
                                                                 1856     way, path                         ò Ž 
                                                                                                            ˆ ¦Ç
 Ruku'           6     v: 9        14           ¸ï°                      (pl.:       ˆ ¦ Ç)
                                                                                      ò 
1841     equal, equitable,                          
                                                  Æ ¡Ç         1857     kept, fulfilled                    >Ì¢È
         common terms
                                                                 1858     oaths                            ÌÀ¢ø¢È
1842     im. pl. come                             ¦óŠ¢à«
                                                                 1859     portion, share                   ¼ 
                                                                                                           Æ ¢Šô»
1843     lords, gods                               ¢¥¢¥Ì°¢È
                                                                 1860     they distort / pervert          È 
                                                                                                          ÀÌÂ ’ô
         (sr.:       K °)
                     §È
                                                                 1861     their tongues                     
                                                                                                        ö ¬üÊȒó¢È
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                       102                                         Part: 4

       (sr.:       Æ ¢Èó	)
                   À                                              1878   never, by no means                       úóŠ
1862   faithful servants of Allah                ¥È
                                               úûŽ¢°          1879   pl. you will attain               ¦óŒ¢ü«
1863   pl. you teach                          È øô «
                                              À O à           1880   vn. to attain                           ˆ û
                                                                                                                 ò
1864   pl. you study                        È ÇÉ
                                            À °¾«             1881   the piety / righteousness               Ž
                                                                                                                  ¦’ó¦
                                                  ¸ï°
 Ruku'         8       v: 9        16                             1882   food                               ¿ Š
                                                                                                            Æ ¢à×
                                                 Ž
                                               ÌÄÂϤÊ
                                                                                                             	
                                                                                                             ·
1865   my burden (of covenant)
                                                                  1883   lawful
                                                 È 
                                                 Àä¦
                                                                                                             È Â
                                                                                                             ¿ ·
1866   they seek
                                                                  1884   forbade, made unlawful
                                                    Š
                                                 ¢ß×
                                                                                  ¸«) 
                                                                                  öŽ
1867   willingly
                                                                         (vn.:
1868   unwillingly                                    Š
                                                 ¢ÿÂï                                                      ¦
                                                                  1885   invented (a lie), fabricated     à ¬’ç¦Ê
1869   seeks                                           Ž
                                                       ⬦
                                                                  1886   falsehood, lie                      Š
                                                                                                          §	Àï
1870   came, had come                               –³
                                                   È
                                                                  1887   spoke truth                      È 
                                                                                                          ¼¾ Ï
1871   pv. will not be lightened             è
                                           æM ¼¢Šó
                                                                  1888   upright, sane in faith            ¢†èü·
                                                                                                                Ž
1872   they put the things right /                Š
                                             ¦¸ôÏ¢È
       made amends
                                                                  1889   pv. is appointed / setup          	 É
                                                                                                           ÞÓ Â
1873   they increased                            É
                                              ¦Ì®¦È®Ì±¦Ê         1890   that, verily that                   	ô
                                                                                                           ÌÄÀM óŠ
1874   earthful, in quantum             Ê Š   	
                                        µÌ°˜’ó¦É ’ò÷             1891   Bakkah, Makkah                           ð
                                                                                                                 ¨M ¥
       of earth
                                                                  1892   place where              öÿ¦Â¥¤ÊÉ ¢Šì÷
                                                                                                   	 ¿ 
1875   gold                                           È
                                                   ¢¦ÿ¯                 Ibrahim X stood (for prayer), 868
                                                   ¦
1876   offered as ransom                       à ¾¬’ç¦Ê          1893   safe, secure                               	
                                                                                                                 ¢ü÷ ¦
                                                                                                                     ¦




1877   painful                                         ö
                                                        ó	¢È    1894   pilgrimage to the           ª¦’ó¦ ·
                                                                                                     	  ²	
 8

                                                  ¸ï°                   house (of Allah)
 Ruku'         9      v: 11        17
                                                                  1895   is able to undertake           È 
                                                                                                        ¸¢ŠØ¬ǦÊ
 ^ Part :4                    ¦óŒ¢ü«úóŠ Ä `
                                                   ³
                                                                  1896   why                                       
                                                                                                                   öó	
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                          103                                          Part: 4

1897   pl. you hinder / obstruct     È ¾
                                     ÀÌÂ Ы        1914   a band of people, a nation             ˆ  ¢É
                                                                                                   ¨÷
       (vn.:    ¾
                 Ï)                                 1915   whiten, lit up           µÄ§  «
                                                                                             Ò ¦ 
1898   pl. you seek                     À䦫
                                        È            1916   faces                             Æ ³Â
                                                                                              Á É
1899   crookedness                      ¢³ß
                                           	               (sr.:    þ È
                                                                      ³Â)
1900   (they will) turn /               ¦ÌÂN Â
                                           ®        1917   blacken, darken                    N È«
                                                                                               ®
       send (you back)
                                                     1918   pv. made to return                 Þ «
                                                                                                ³Â
       (vn.:        K° )
                    ®È
                                                     1919   all things, affairs, matters      °÷˜’ó¦
                                                                                              É Œ
1901   pv. are recited / rehearsed        ô¬«                                               ¸ï°
                                                      Ruku'         11        v: 8   2
1902   holds fast / firmly            öЬà
                                        	           1920   best community,                 ¨ ¦É»
                                                                                            
÷ 
1903   to hold fast / firmly              	
                                      ¿¢Ьß¦Ê             best of peoples

 Ruku'         10       v: 10   1       ¸ï°         1921   pv. fg. raised up,             ª³Â»¦É
                                                                                             Ž
1904   cable, rope, cord                  ˆ ¦·
                                          ò                evolved
                                                     1922   pl. you forbid                    À ü«
                                                                                              È
1905   all together                    ¢àø³
                                            	
                                                     1923   indecency, evil                      Š 
                                                                                               Âðü÷
1906   enemies                         Æ ¡¾ߢÈ
                                        
                                                     1924   trifling hurt                        Ãů¢È
1907   made friendship, joined             ó
                                          æM¢È
                                                     1925   backs                               °¢¥Ì®¢È
1908   pl. you became                   
                                     ö¬¸¦Ï¢È
                                                            (sr.:    ÂÉ
                                                                      ¥®)
1909   brothers, brethren              ¢û¦»¤Ê
                                                     1926   incurred, drew upon (himself)          È
                                                                                                    –¥
       (sr.:        ­
                    Æ ¢È)
                                                     1927   rebelled, disobeyed               ¦Ðß
                                                                                                  
1910   brink                                  
                                           ¢ŠèË
                                                     1928   used to transgress       À̾¬à¦¢Šï
                                                                                     È  û
1911   abyss, pit                       ¨
                                        Æ Â’è·
                                                     1929   to transgress                    Æ ¡¾¬ߦÊ
                                                                                               	
1912   saved, rescued                     ŠŠ
                                          Àìû¢È
                                                     1930   (they are) not                    ¦ÈóŠ
                                                                                                 
1913   let there be                      Œ È
                                       úð¬’óÂ
                                                     1931   alike, equal                       Æ ¡Ç
                                                                                                 
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                 104                                                Part: 4

1932   parts, hours                               –û ¦
                                                      ¦

                                                                   (sr.:    Æ ç)
                                                                            ÁŠ
1933   they hasten / vie with             Àß°¢È
                                          È Ê              1949   pl. you are those                	ÂÉö¬û¢È¢ÿ
                                                                                                   Ê ¢ 
       one another
                                                            1950   they bit (past tense of bite)           ¦ ß
                                                                                                              Ô
1934   good deeds, virtues                  ©¦Â»
                                                  
                                                            1951   to bite                                   Ò
                                                                                                              ß
1935   pl. righteous (persons)             ú¸ó	¢Ï
                                            	
                                                            1952   fingers, finger-tips                     Š	
                                                                                                            ò÷¢û¢È
       (sr.:   ¶
                ó	¢Ï)
                                                            1953   rage                                      ˆ ã
                                                                                                             ڊ
1936   pv. they will not be               Š 
                                     ¦ÌÂÂè’ðúóŠ
       denied / rejected                                    1954   im. pl. perish, die                      ¦«÷
                                                                                                                 
1937   will not avail /                    üä«úóŠ
                                             Ž              1955   with what is                   Ð
                                                                                               °Ì¾ ó¦Ê©¦ŠÀ¥Ž
       profit them                                                 in breasts (hearts)
1938   wind                                      °
                                                ¶Ê          1956   pl. befalls you,                  ö Œ È ø
                                                                                             ²²¿ ð È «

       (pl.:     Æ ¢° )
                 ¬Ê                                                happens to you
                                                            1957   grieves them,                             
                                                                                                          öÿšÈ«
1939   biting and icy, intense cold              Â	
                                                 Ï                is evil unto them
1940   harvest, tilth                         ª
                                              Æ ·         1958   to rejoice                                ¬Š
                                                                                                             Æ Âç
1941   intimate friend                         ˆ û¢ŠØ¥Ž
                                               ¨            1959   guile, cunning (idea)                       ï
                                                                                                              ¾ Š
                                                                                                            ¸ï°
1942   they will not fail /                À󌒘¢Šó
                                           È                 Ruku'         12        v: 11     3
                                                                   you went out early ®¹                 Š
                                                                                                         ȩ̾ã
                                
                                 óŒ¢É)
                                                            1960
       spare no pains (vn.:
                                                                   morning or at day break
1943   ruin, corruption                       †¢¦»
                                                           1961   you assign (positions)                   É 
                                                                                                            ¥ ¦«
1944   they loved / desired                       ®È
                                               ¦ÌÂN        1962   assigned                                    ¢È¥
                                                                                                                 
1945   pl. hamper /                      ö ¬Ž 
                                 ©À¸ üß              1963   positions                               	 
                                                                                                           ¾ß¢Šì÷
       distress you
                                                                            ¾ 
                                                                             à’ì÷)
                                                 
                                               Ì©¾¥
                                                                   (sr.:
1946   came into open, appeared
                                                                                                             Æ ¢¬ë
                                                                                                             ¾ 	
                                             É
                                              –Ôä¥
                                                            1964   battle
1947   vehement, hatred, malice
                                                                                                               ö
                                                                                                               ÿ
                                               Á¦’ç¢È
                                                            1965   meditated, intended
1948   mouths
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                       105                                          Part: 4

1966   two parties / sections              Ê Š
                                           À¢¬èŸ	–Š×             1984   they turn back / retire          ¦¦ôìü
                                                                                                               	Š
1967   dl. they fail cowardly                        
                                                  ¢Šô̒è«               (vn.:        	
                                                                                  §¢Šôìû¦Ê)
1968   to fail cowardly, 2041                      ò Š
                                                   ˆ Ìç          1985   pl. ap. disappointed,           ú¦Ÿ	–»
                                                                                                          Ž
1969   (battle of) Badr                                °¾¥             frustrated
                                                                                                            ¸ï°
                                                                   Ruku'         13    v: 9      4
1970   utterly weak, helpless                          ˆ M¯¢È
                                                       ¨ó Ê       1986   doubling, two-times             ¢†ç¢àÓ¢È
       (sr.:   ˆ ó	¯)
               ò È                                               1987   redoubling, multi-times        ¨Š  
                                                                                                        ˆ èߢÔ÷
1971   is it not?                                       úóŠ¢È    1988   pv. fg. is prepared                ¾	
                                                                                                          Ì© ߢÉ
1972   supports, reinforces                             ø
                                                       ¾	         1989   im. pl. vie with one ¸°²   ¦ß°¢Ç
                                                                                                            Ê
1973   three thousand                 Ç
                                      »¢Šó ¦	¨¯Š¢Šô¯Š
                                              ¦
                                                                         another, hasten
                                                                         width                            µ
                                                                                                          Æ Âß
                                              úó	Äü÷
                                               
                                                                  1990
1974   pl. ob those who are
       sent down                                                  1991   ease, prosperity                    Â
                                                                                                           Æ ¡ Ç
1975   nay, why not                                    ô¥       1992   adversity, time of hardship        Â
                                                                                                          Æ ¡ Ó
1976   immediately, all of a sudden                    Æ ç
                                                       °Š         1993   ap. those who control /        úøÛ¢Šï
                                                                                                         		
1977   five                                        
                                              ¨Èø»                     repress
                                                                         wrath, anger                        ˆ ã
                                                                                                             ڊ
                                           	 
                                          ú÷ È÷
                                                                  1994
1978   marked
                                                                  1995   ap. those who forgive /           úç¢ß
                                                                                                            	
 4th Part           1/4             óü
                                  ¦Œ¢«úóŠ Ä Þ¥°
                                                  ³                      pardon

                                                   ¦
                                                                  1996   fg. evil thing, indecency       ¨ 	
                                                                                                         ˆ Ì·¢Šç
1979   message of good cheer,                Ã ÂÌ¥              1997   sins                             Æ û¯
                                                                                                          § É
       glad tidings
1980   set at rest, get assured               ú	 
                                                ø’Ø«                   (sr.:     û¯)
                                                                                  ¤È
1981   cut off, destroyed                           ŠŠ
                                                    Þ Øë          1998   not                                     öóŠ
1982   a part, a fringe                               Š
                                                   ¢†çÂ×          1999   they persist / repeat            ¦ÌÂ Ð
                                                                                                             Â	
1983   abased, humiliated                          Š
                                                  ª¦ï             2000   excellent, bountiful                  
                                                                                                               öàûŽ
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                           106                                            Part: 4

2001   ap. workers                    úô÷¢ß
                                       		            2019   if                                       ÌÀ¤Ê
2002   pl. systems, ways                    
                                          úüÇ        2020   if it be that?,                          ŽŠ
                                                                                                    ÌÀœç¢È
2003   im. pl. travel, go about         ¦ÌÂÂÇ
                                           	                will (you) if ... then?
                                                      2021   died                                  È
                                                                                                   ©¢÷
2004   consequence, end                 ˆ ¦ë¢ß
                                        ¨	
                                                      2022   pl. you turned back/                  ŠŠ
                                                                                                ö¬¦ôìû¦Ê
2005   declaration, plain statement        Æ ¢¥
                                           À                 turned about

2006   admonition, guidance           ˆ Üß÷
                                      ¨Š 	           2023   heels (sr.:       ¤	 
                                                                                ìß)            §¢ŠìߢÈ
2007   ni. pl. faint not,             ¦üŽ «¢Šó
                                                     2024   term appointed,               † š ¢¥¢¬ï
                                                                                             ³ ÷ 	
       loose not heart                                       recorded time

2008   overcome, rise high             ÀôߢÈ
                                       È Š            2025   many a, how many                        Š Š
                                                                                                   ú˜ï
       (sr.:        ôߢÈ)                           2026   devoted men, Godly men              È  ¥Ê
                                                                                                 À°
2009   wound, distress                    ¬Š
                                          Æ Âë       2027   to loose heart                         ÿÂ
                                                                                                   úÈ
2010   touched, received                   Æ
                                            ÷        2028   for that                                 ¢øó	
2011   days                                    
                                            Ì¿¢¢È    2029   befell, met with                   È
                                                                                                §¢Ï¢È
2012   we change by turns                Ê
                                       ɾ¦¾û       2030   weakness                            æ
                                                                                                  àÓ
       (vn.:    ¾È
                Æ Ì®)                                2031   they did not demean           ¦û¢Šð¬Ǧ¢÷
                                                                                                   
                                                             themselves / give in
2013   purges, purifies               Î ø
                                        ¸
                                                      2032   excesses, wasted efforts          Æ ¦ÂǤÊ
                                                                                               »
2014   vn. to purify, to purge      θø«
                                       	
                                                      2033   im. make sure, make firm                 ¦
                                                                                                    ª¯Š
2015   vn. to wipe out, to blight        ê 
                                          ¸÷
                                                      2034   good, excellent                      È·
                                                                                                 ú 
2016   pl. you wish / long              Àø«
                                        È ü           Ruku'        15     v: 5        6          ¸ï°
                                         ¸ï°
 Ruku'         14      v: 14   5                      2035   we shall cast / put                   ì’ôû
                                                                                                     	
2017   will?                                   Ȣ
                                                      2036   terror, dread                        ¤É
                                                                                                   ß°
2018   so, then                              È
                                             »
                                                      2037   warrant, authority                         
                                                                                                ¢û¢ŠØ’ôÇ
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                              107                                            Part: 4

2038   hapless, evil                       
                                           ƒ ¥Ž         2055   met, came face to face               쬒ó¦Ê
                                            ¦
2039   abode, home                      à ’°÷
                                                        2056   dl. two parties / hosts            Ê 
                                                                                                   À¢àø³
2040   pl. you routed /annihilated   À ¸«
                                     È È                2057   caused (them) to backslide,        M ĬǦÊ
                                                                                                   ¾ 
                                                                made (them) slip
       (vn.:   Æ
                ·)
                                                         2058   forgave, pardoned                          
                                                                                                        ¢Šèß
2041   pl. you failed /              ö  ô	 Š
                             ¾³» ¬’ Ìç                                                         ¸ï°
                                                          Ruku'         16      v: 7     7
       flagged, 1967, 1968
2042   pl. you disagreed /              È
                                      ö¬ß±¢ü«        2059   traveled                           ¦¥ÂÓ
                                                                                                        
       disputed
                                                         2060   fighters                              Č
                                                                                                     Ã
 ã
2043   pl. you disobeyed               ö¬Ðß
                                           
                                                                (sr.:        Äʱ¢Šã)
       (vn.:   Æ ¢Ðßžˆ Ðà÷)
               À 	 ¨	 
                                                         2061   anguish, to sigh and regret        ¨ 
                                                                                                   Æ ÂÈ·
2044   turned, directed                 È 
                                        »ÂÏ
                                                         2062   surely, verily                            È
                                                                                                          ¾
2045   pl. you climbed             ÀÂ ¾ 	 Ð «
                           ®¸´È Ì  à 
                                                         2063   pl. pv. you shall              À ¸«
                                                                                       °³¬È Ì  Ì 
2046   pl. you paid no heed /        È 
                                     ÀÌ ’ô«¢Šó              be brought together /
       did not look back                                        gathered together
2047   that not                           ¢Šôðó	
                                               Š         2064   it was by the, it was then of             ŽŠ
                                                                                                       ¢ø¦ç
2048   missed                              È
                                           ©¢Šç          2065   you became lenient / gentle           
                                                                                                      ªüó	
2049   slumber                            ¢Ç¢àû              (   úôžÈÀ¢Šó)
                                                                     	
2050   overcome               ij¹Ì 
                                        ä               2066   harsh, severe                            ܊
                                                                                                        ¢ ç
2051   Have we any part? Have              ó 
                                        ¢üM’òÿ         2067   hard of heart                ¤’ôì’ó¦ŠÚôã
                                                                                             Ž Š         	Š
       we aught?
                                                         2068   they dispersed / broke away        ¦ èû¦Ê
                                                                                                      Ԋ
2052   here                                  
                                          ¢üÿ¢ÿ
                                                         2069   around you                         îó	·
                                                                                                    
2053   went forth                               È
                                                ±Â¥
                                                         2070   im. consult, counsel                   Ê
                                                                                                     ̰¢Ë
2054   places to lie down,            Ž 
                                      Þ³¢Ô÷
       death places                                             (vn.:      ¨È È 
                                                                           Æ °Â¢Ì÷)
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                108                                          Part: 4

2071   you resolved /                     
                                         ª÷Äß             2090   im. pl. fight                      ¦Œô«	¢Šë
       took decision
                                                           2091   im. pl. defend, push back         ¦àçÌ®¦Ê
                                                                                                         Š
2072   ap. those who place /           úôO ¬÷
                                        	ï 
       put their trust                                     2092   that day                           À ÷
                                                                                                     
 	
2073   forsook, withdrew help              È Š
                                           ¾À »            2093   nearer                             É 
                                                                                                     §Â’ë¢È
2074   deceives, acts dishonestly             M ä
                                              ò           2094   they sat                                Š
                                                                                                     ¦Ì¾àë
2075   deceived, acted dishonestly                òŠ
                                                  Mã       2095   if, had (they)!                          óŠ
2076   pv. is repaid in full                 «
                                             ç            2096   they had obeyed                  ¦ߢŠ×¢È
                                                                                                      
2077   condemned, displeased              Š
                                          Ö¼Ç              2097   im. pl. then avert,                ÉÈ
                                                                                                  ¦Ì£°Ì®¢Šç
                                              ¦                   then turn away, then ward off
2078   resort, abode                           
                                          à ’˜÷
                                                           2098   think not, reckon not        ú 
                                                                                                ¦È¸«¢Šó
2079   hapless, evil, woeful, vile          
                                            ƒ ¥Ž
                                                           2099   pv. (they are) given            Àë±Â
                                                                                                  È ŒÈ
2080   journey's end, destination          ÂÐ÷
                                              	                  provision / sustenance

2081   bestowed favor, showed grace               ú
                                                  ÷       2100   jubilant, rejoicing              ú·Âç
                                                                                                    	 ŽŠ
2082   sent, raised up                      Š 
                                            ®à¥           2101   they rejoice in            ÀÌÂÂ̦¬È
                                                                                             È 	 
                                                                  glad tiding
 4th Part      1/2       ¦óŒ¢«úóŠ Ä æÐû
                               ü           ³               2102   they did not join           ¦Œì¸’ôöóŠ
                                                                                                   
2083   what?                                         ¢È     Ruku'      17     v: 16      8            ¸ï°


2084   and                                          È
                                                          2103   they responded /              ¦¥¢´¬ǦÊ
                                                                                                        
                                                                  answered
2085   when                                        ø
                                                  ¢ óŠ    2104   sufficient for us                     
                                                                                                    ¢ü¦È·
2086   dl. twice (as great)                 ô’°÷
                                              Š	           2105   most excellent trustee/    òï’ó¦öàûŽ
                                                                                                	
2087   whence, from where, how                    ¢È
                                                   û              guardian
                                                                  they turned                       ¦¦ôìû¦Ê
                                                                                                         ŠŠ
                                           ¦Œìç¢û
                                                Š
                                                           2106
2088   they became hypocrites
                                                                  of bounty, grace               ‰ Š É
                                                                                                 òÔç̯
                                           ¦óŠ¢à«
                                                           2107
2089   im. pl. come
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                 109                                         Part: 4

2108   makes (you) fear, frightens       É 
                                         » ¼             2126   rich, wealthy                       –ü’ã¢È
                                                                                                          Ž
2109   partisans, friends, allies             –ó	ÌÂÈ¢            (sr.:   Ž Š
                                                                            ü ã)
2110   im. pl. fear me                       À碻
                                             Ê Œ            2127   im. pl. taste                      ¦ë̯
                                                                                                         Œ É
       fear (im. pl.):     ¦ç¢»
                              Œ      ; me:     Ê
                                               À            2128   burning, fire                       ·
                                                                                                      êŽ
2111   they vie with                   Àß°¢È
                                       È Ê                 2129   xg. oppressor, wrong-doer            ¿ ôŠ
                                                                                                        Æ ¢M Û
       one another, they hasten
                                                            2130   slaves, bondsmen (sr.:      ¦ß) ¾¦ß
                                                                                              ¾  Ž
2112   portion, share                            Ü
                                                ¢ ·
                                                            2131   offering, sacrifice                      Œ
                                                                                                      À¢¥Âë
2113   we give rein, we grant respite          ôøû
                                                 	
                                                            2132   devours, consumes, eats               Œ
                                                                                                       ’ò«
2114   shameful, ignominious                    Ž ÷
                                               ú 
                                                            2133   why then                               	Š
                                                                                                         ö ôç
2115   leaves, abandons                          °ŠÀ
                                                            2134   pv. were denied, were rejected     È ÀŒ
                                                                                                      §O ï
2116   separates, sets apart,                   Äø
                                                	
       discriminates                                        2135   ap. giving light,                   Ž ÷
                                                                                              °ÂÀÂ ü

2117   wicked, bad, evil                     ®¦»
                                                Ž                 of enlightenment
                                                            2136   fg. taste                          ˆ ìŸ	¡È¯
                                                                                                      ¨Š
2118   good, pure                               Š
                                               ¤×
                                                            2137   pl. pv. you will be paid in full   ÀM «
                                                                                                      È ç
2119   lets (you) know                           	 
                                               Þô’Ø
                                                            2138   wages, recompense (sr.:       ³¢È)Æ ³¢É
                                                                                                Â °
2120   chooses, elects                       ¦¬´
                                               Ž
                                                            2139   pv. is removed, drawn away      Ȏ É
                                                                                                   ¬Ä·±
2121   they hoard up /                 À ô  ¦ 
                               ¾­§È  Œ ¼ 
       niggardly cling to                                   2140   succeeded, became triumphant           È
                                                                                                          ±¢Šç
2122   pv. be hung around                È Œ Š 
                                         Àë Ø                  (vn.:   Æ ç)
                                                                           ±Š
       (their) necks
 Ruku'      18      v: 9         9             ¸ï°         2141   comfort, enjoyment, goods           Æ ¢¬÷
                                                                                                       ¸ 
                                                                   and chattels
2123   heard                                   	
                                               ÞøÇ
                                                            2142   illusion, deception                   Œ
                                                                                                      °ÌÂÂã
       poor, indigent                            ìç
                                                 	Š
                                                                                                °÷˜’ó¦Ê¿Äß
2124
                                                            2143   matter of great resolution      Π
2125   we                                       ú¸û
Surah-2: Aal-e-'Imran                                      110                                               Part: 4

2144   flung, threw away                               Š
                                                       À¦û      2161   im. remit, efface                           èŠ
                                                                                                                  ÂO ï
2145   behind                                           È
                                                     ¡È°Â        2162   evil deeds, misdeeds                  ©¢Š Ç
                                                                                                                  
2146   backs (vn.:             Û)
                             Š                    ° Û
                                                        Œ        2163   im. make us die,                         ¢üM «
                                                                                                                    ç
2147   they have given / brought                      ¦«¢È           take our souls back
                                                                 2164   with                                           
                                                                                                                       Þ÷
2148   pv. pl. be praised             (®¿¬   ¦Ì¾ø¸
                                                      
                                                                 2165   pl. righteous, truly virtuous            °
                                                                                                                 Æ ¦Â¥¢È
2149   to be safe, to be successful                 ¨È 
                                                    Æ ±¢Šè÷
                                                    ¸ï°
                                                                 2166   male                                      Š È
                                                                                                                   ï¯
 Ruku'         19      v: 9           10
2150   those who have                                	óÂÉ
                                                         ¢       2167   female                                    °û¢É
2151                                               §¢¦’ó¢È      2168   pv. were persecuted,                       É
                                                                                                                ¦Ì¯Ì¢É
                                                                        suffered hurt
       (sr.:   ¤
                óŒ)                                             2169   movements to and fro                      NŠ
                                                                                                                ¤ôì«
2152   they remember / recall                   ÀÌÂÂï’À
                                                È Œ             2170   lands, cities                              ®¢Šô¥Ž
2153   standing                                      ¢÷¢ë
                                                           	            (sr.:     ô¥)
                                                                                 ¾Š
       sitting                                      ¦Å®àë
                                                         Œ                                                        ¦
                                                                                                                    
                                                                                                               à ’˜÷
2154
                                                                 2171   habitation, abode
       sides, reclining                           §ü³
                                                     
                                                                                                                  ® 	
                                                                                                                  Æ ¢ ÷
2155
                                                                 2172   resting place
       (sr.:        ¤
                     ü³)
                                                                 2173   gift of welcome                            †Äû
                                                                                                                     
2156   they contemplate / reflect           ÀÌÂÂM è¬
                                            È ðŠ 
                                                                  4th Part 3/4              ¦Œ¢ü«úŠó Ä ¸¢¥°¦¨¯
¯
                                                                                               ó              ³
2157   in vain, without meaning and                 †×¢¥
                                                      	          2174   ap. those who                      úàË¢»
                                                                                                            		
       purpose                                                          humble themselves
2158   Glory be to Thee                                
                                                îû¢¸¦Ç        2175   im. pl. endure,                           Ž
                                                                                                             ¦Ì¦ϦÊ
2159   you humiliated /               ı­ Ä ¢
                                              ª   »È                  persevere in patience

       covered with shame                                        2176   im. pl. outdo others in              ¦ÌÂÂ¥Ž¢Ï
2160   ap. caller, announcer                        ¢®¢ü÷
                                                       Ê               endurance, excel in patience
Surah-3: An-Nisaa                                  111                                           Part: 4

2177   im. pl. strengthen                 ¦ŒØ¥Ž¦È°     2192   became the owner,                   Š Š
                                                                                                  ªðô÷
       each other                                               possessed (women taken in
 Ruku'         20      v: 11    11          ¸ï°                bondage, or made prisoners of
                                                                war, or purchased are called
                                                                malaket-aiman or captives)
          ^            ¨È 
                     –Èüó¦É °Ç   `                  2193   right hands                         À¢ø¢È
                The Women                                       (vn.:    ø)
                                                                        ú	
       Surah-4: An-Nisaa
                                                         2194   more likely, suitable                 GÌ®¢È
2178   spread, scattered                      ®
                                              M ¥       2195   that you (pl.) will not             ó
                                                                                              ¦óŒà«¢M¢È
2179   men                                 †¢³°
                                                Ê               do injustice

       (sr.:        ˆ ³° )
                    ò È                                 2196   dower, marriage portions,           
                                                                                               Ì©¢Šë¾Ï
2180   pl. you demand                 È ŒÈ
                                      Àô –È«                Mahr (sr.:         Æ ¦¾Ï)
                                                                                   ¼
                                                                (According to Islamic law, it is
       from one another
                                                                incumbent on husbands to offer
2181   ties of kinship, wombs              ¿¢·Ì°¢È             gifts in cash or kind to their wives
                                                                by way of contract of marriage. It
2182   watcher, observer                       	È
                                            ¢¦ë°              is known as Sadaqah, Ujr or Mahr)
                                                                willingly                            ˆ ô¸ûŽ
                                                                                                     ¨Š
                                           ÷¢¬
                                                         2197
2183   orphans
                                                                with pleasure                         † Ž
                                                                                                      ˜ ü ÿ
                                               
                                            ¢¥·
                                                         2198
2184   sin
                                                                with good cheer                           Ž
                                                                                                     ¢† Â÷
                                                ŽŠ
                                           ¦Â¦ï
                                                         2199
2185   great
                                                                means of support                           	
                                                                                                     ¢÷¢ë
                                           Ö 	
                                           ˆ Èë
                                                         2200
2186   deal fairly / justly
                                                                im. pl. cloth                        
                                                                                                  ¦Ȓï¦É
                                            §¢Š×
                                            È
                                                         2201
2187   seemed good, pleased
                                                                to clothe                         Æ Èï
                                                                                                  ¨ 	
                                                
                                             X’°÷
                                                         2202
2188   twos
                                                                im. pl. test, make trial                 
                                                                                                    ¦Œô¬¥¦Ê
                                            ª¢Šô¯Œ
                                            È
                                                         2203
2189   threes
                                                                orphans (sr.:       ö 	
                                                                                     ¬)         ÷¢¬
                                            ¸¢¥°
                                                É
                                                         2204
2190   fours
                                                                they reached / attained                   Š
                                                                                                     ¦äô¥
                                            Æ ¾ß
                                            ¾ 
                                                         2205
2191   justice
                                                         2206   found, perceived                     
                                                                                                     Æû ¦  ¦
Surah-3: An-Nisaa                               112                                           Part: 4

2207   sound judgment, discretion        ¦¾Ë°
                                              É       2227   one-half, 1/2                      ÐûŽ
                                                                                               æ
2208   im. pl. deliver, hand over            Š
                                        ¦àçÌ®¦Ê    2228   one-sixth, 1/6                    ² 
                                                                                               Æ ¾Ç
2209   squandering, extravagantly      ¢†ç¦ÂÇ¤Ê     2229   one-third, 1/3                      ˆ ô¯Œ
                                                                                                 ®Œ
2210   in haste                          ¦Å°¦¾¥Ž     2230   brothers (or sisters)              Æ »¤Ê
                                                                                                ¨
2211   (let him) abstain              	 
                                    æèà¬Èó	       2231   debt, dues                            ®
                                                                                                  úÈ
2212   pl. you delivered /                 ŠÈ
                                        ö¬àç®              (pl.:       Æ ®)
                                                                         À É
       handed over
                                                      2232   pl. you know not              ÀÌÂÉ°¾«¢Šó
                                                                                           È
2213   portion, share                   Ðû
                                       ¤ 	
                                                      2233   child, son                           ¾È
                                                                                                   óŠÂ
2214   parents                         À¦¾ó	¦ÈÂ
                                       Ê
                                                      2234   one-fourth, 1/4                      ÞÉ
                                                                                                   ¥°
2215   pl. those nearest               È 
                                       À¥Â’ë¢È
       in relationship                                2235   one-eighth, 1/8                      ú
                                                                                                   ø¯Œ
2216   be little, small                      òŠ
                                             Më       2236   deceased man or woman              ˆ 󊢊ôï
                                                                                                ¨ Š
2217   be much, large                      Š
                                           Œ°ï              having left neither parent nor
                                                             children
2218   allotted, ordained                     
                                     ¢ÓÌÂ’è÷       2237   brother                               ­
                                                                                                   Æ ¢È
2219   division, distribution          ¨
                                       ˆ øÈ	ë        2238   sister                              »¢É
                                                                                                ª
2220   near of kin, relatives        Œ
                                  9Âì’ó¦óŒÂÉ
                                               ¢      2239   each one, everyone           ¾·¦ÈÂN ï
                                                                                          
 	 òŒ
2221   (let them) fear / beware         
                                       ʼó	         2240   sharers, those who share            
                                                                                              –ŠïÂË
2222   justly, appropriate                  	
                                       ¦¾¾Ç        2241   not causing any              °  Š
                                                                                          Ë ¢Ô÷Âã
2223   blazing fire                          	
                                        ¦ÂàÇ              harm / loss

                                         ¸ï°
                                                      2242   limits imposed by Allah          ® 
                                                                                          ʅ¦É ̾·
 Ruku'      1     v: 10      12
2224   portion                             K
                                           Ú·         2243   transgresses                        ¾ 
                                                                                                  à¬
                                                                                                ¸ï°
2225   dl. two females                   Ž 
                                         ú¬ü’¯¦Ê     Ruku'         2       v: 4    13
                                                      2244   those of (women) who                     ó
                                                                                                 «	¢M¦
2226   dl. two thirds                          Œ
                                            ¢Š°ô¯Œ
Surah-3: An-Nisaa                               113                                                 Part: 4

2245   four                              ˆ à¥Ì°¢È
                                         ¨           2263   solemn, firm, strong                         	Š
                                                                                                     ¢†Üôã
2246   im. pl. confine                  Œ
                                     ¦ðÊÈ÷¢È       2264   past, passed                             Š
                                                                                                     æô Ç
2247   dl. two persons                   Ê ó
                                         À¦ŠÀM¦       2265   abomination, hateful                           
                                                                                                       ¢¬’ì÷
                                                                                                      ¸ï°
2248   im. pl. punish                        É
                                          ¦Ì¯¡        Ruku'         3           v: 8      14

                                                                                                        ÷
                                                                                                    ©¢  ¢É
                                          Ž
                                     ¦ÓÂߢÈ
                                                      2266   mothers
2249   im. pl. leave them (alone)
                                                                         K ¢É)
                                                                         ¿
                                    	 M 
                                 ¢ø·°¢¥¦ «
                                                             (sr.:
2250   oft-returning,
       most merciful, acceptor of                     2267   daughters                                ©¢ü¥
       Repentance, dispenser of Grace
2251   ignorance                        ˆ óŠ¢ ³
                                        ¨                   (sr.:       ª
                                                                          ü¥Ž)
2252   forcibly, against will                 Š
                                         ¢ÿÂï       2268   sisters                                   
                                                                                                   ©¦»¢È
2253   ni. pl. don't              ôÔà ó
                         ¾µ¸¦ Œ   «¢Š
                                                             (sr.:       ª
                                                                          »¢É)
       keep under constraint                          2269     pl. sisters of father                  ø
                                                                                                    ©¢ ß
2254   so that you (pl.) may                
                                      ¦¦ÿ’À¬ó	            (sr.:       ¨ø 
                                                                         ˆ  ß)
       take away
2255   open, manifest                     
  
                                          ¨ü¦÷      2270   pl. sister's daughters          	 Œ ©
                                                                                             ª»˜’ó¦É ¢ü¥
2256   im. pl. live or consort             	
                                      ¦ÌÂÂ袧       2271   fg. they gave suck                       
                                                                                                  úàÓÌ°¢È
       with them                                      2272   foster                	  	 Œ 
                                                                                   ¨ß¢Ó ó¦ú÷ö𫦻¢È
2257   may happen,                       Èß                sisters (sisters from suckling)
       may be possible                                2273   pl. step daughters                     ¤Ÿ	–¥°
                                                                                                           È
2258   vn. to replace                       	
                                     ̾¦¾¦¬Ç¦Ê     2274   (under) protection,                       
                                                                                                    °´·
2259   place                                 
                                         À¢Šð÷               guardianship

2260   sum of money, treasure            ° 	
                                         Æ ¢ŠØüë     2275   under your                       ŒÊ   	
                                                                                            öï°´·ç
                                                             protection / guardianship
2261   gave oneself to another,         Ԓç¢È        2276   wives, spouses,                              
                                                                                                    ò	Ÿ–Šô·
       gave in unto each other
2262   covenant, pledge, bond           Æ ¢Š°÷
                                        ¼ 	                 (sr.:       ¨Š 	 
                                                                         ˆ ôô·)
Surah-3: An-Nisaa                                     114                                            Part: 5

2277   loins                               Æ ¢ŠôÏ¢È
                                           §                2287   fg. not fornicators           	  Š
                                                                                             ©¢¸ç¢È÷Âã
       (sr.:    ¤
                 ’ôÏ)                                      2288   to debauch,                       À¦¾»¢È
2278   dl. two sisters                       Ž 
                                             ú¬»¢É              secret paramour
                                                            2289   pv. be married,                   ú	
                                                                                                      з¢É
       (sr.:    ª
                 »¢É)                                            taken in wedlock
                                                            2290   fg. they commit / come               
                                                                                                        ú«¢È
 ^ Part :5                                  ³
                          Ì©¢üиø’ó¦ÈÂ Ä `
                                                            2291   commit sin, doing wrong               
                                                                                                       ªüß
2279   married women, those             ©¢üи÷
                                                           Ruku'         4        v: 3     1         ¸ï°
       who have husbands                                    2292   ways, systems                        ú 
                                                                                                         üÇ
       those who seek honest                Ž	
                                         úüи÷
                                                                               ¨ü 
                                                                               ˆ Ç )
2280
                                                                   (sr.:
       wedlock, desiring chastity
2281   fornicators                          		 
                                         ú¸ç¢È÷          2293   vain desires, lusts                     
                                                                                                    Ì©¦ Ë
2282   dowers, portions                          
                                              °³¢É        2294   incline, turn away                    ò 
                                                                                                         ˆ ÷
      (that is incumbent on husbands to
      pay to their wives as per
                                                            2295   with mutual consent,                   
                                                                                                 µ¦«úß
                                                                                                 Ç
agreement                                                          with mutual agreement
      at the time of marraige or Nikah).
                                                            2296   aggression, malicious intent      Æ ¦È¾ß
                                                                                                     À 
2283   to afford, have means                      Š
                                               ¢†ó×
                                                            2297   we shall cast in                   		
                                                                                                      þôÐû
2284   believing free women                  ÷
                                        ©¢üи
                                                                   (vn.:       Æ ¢ŠôϦÊ)
                                                                                
2285   maids, slave-girls                        Š
                                             ©¢¬ç
                                                            2298   pl. you avoid, shun                   Ž
                                                                                                    ¦¦ü¬´«
       (sr.:    ¨ Š
                Æ ¢¬ç)
                                                                   (vn.:       § 	
                                                                               Æ ¢ü¬³¦Ê)
2286   honest, chaste and modest              
                                         ©¢üи÷
       women, well fortified
                                                            2299   great sins, most heinous            Š
                                                                                                      Ÿ	¢¦ï
       (   ©¢üи÷ is derived from  з
                                  ú 	                            (sr.:       ¨ Ž Š
                                                                               Æ Â¦ï)
       which means to enter into fort.
       The above three words numbered                       2300   pv. pl. you are forbidden          À ü«
                                                                                                      È
       2279, 2284, and 2286 are the same
       but their use conveys the                            2301   we will remit / efface / expiate      èŠ
                                                                                                       ÂO ðû
       appropriate meanings).
Surah-3: An-Nisaa                                115                                           Part: 5

2302   gate, entrance                     
                                        †»¾÷        2320   boastful, vainglorious                   Š
                                                                                                ¦Å°¼ç
2303   noble, respectable, honorable         ŽŠ
                                        ¢øÂï        2321   companion, intimate                         ŽŠ
                                                                                                     ¢üÂë
2304   ni. pl. covet not,               ü 
                                     ¦ø¬«¢Šó      2322   what would be?                          ¦È¯¢÷
       do not desire
                                                       2323   if                                         óŠ
2305   heirs, inheritors                        
                                         ó	¦÷
                                                       2324   so much as the weight of                     	
                                                                                                    ̾¢Šì’°÷
2306   made covenant, pledged             Š
                                       Ì©¾ìß
                                                       2325   if                                        ÌÀ¤Ê
2307   pl. your right hands             Œ
                                      öðû¢ø¢È
                                          ¸ï°
                                                       2326   there be                                 î«
 Ruku'        5     v: 8      2
2308   in charge, overseers,           È  Š
                                       À÷¦ ë        2327   from His own self                ó 	
                                                                                              þû¾Mú÷
       caretakers                                      2328   we brought                                   Ž
                                                                                                      ¢ü’ ³
       good / righteous women       ©¢¸ó	¢Ï
                                                                                                    Ê 
                                                                                                     –Šóšÿ
2309
                                                       2329   these
       fg. pl. obedient,               ©¢¬ûŽ¢Šë
                                                                                                 
                                                                                                Ã È«
2310
                                                       2330   be leveled
       fully devoted
2311   rebellion, refractory conduct        
                                         ±Ìû        2331   discourse, fact                            	
                                                                                                    ¢†°¾·
                                                                                                    ¸ï°
2312   beds                           Ž 
                                      Þ³¢Ô÷            Ruku'         6       v: 9     3
                                                              ni. pl. draw not                ¥ ì ó
                                                                                     §°¼¦ ’ «¢Š
                                            	 
                                           ¢
ôß
                                                       2332
2313   high, exalted
                                                              near, approach not
                                                                                                ¦
2314   arbitrator, umpire                  Š
                                        ¢øð·          2333   intoxicated, drunken                 
                                                                                             à °¢ŠðÇ
2315   neighbor                            Æ ¢³
                                           °           2334   vn. state of pollution                     
                                                                                                      ¢¦ü³
2316   neighbor not of kin,       Ž ü´
                                  ¤ ’ó¦Ê°¢³               caused by ejaculation or
                                                              intercourse
       distant neighbor
                                                                                                  Ž
                                                                                                ÌÄÂ¥Ž¢ß
                            Ž          	
                            ¤ü´’󢎥Ž¤·¢Ï
                                                       2335   journeying, passers by
2317   companion,
       fellow traveler                                 2336   pl. you take bath                Œ È ä
                                                                                     ¾²¹¦ ôÊ ¬ «
2318   traveler, way farer           ŽÈ ú
                                  ò¦ ó¦ ¥¦Ê      2337   ill, sick                            
                                                                                               ÓÂ÷
2319   proud, arrogant                          
                                        ¢†ó¢¬¼÷             (sr.:       Ҏ
                                                                           Â÷)
Surah-3: An-Nisaa                              116                                                     Part: 5

2338   closets, (toilets)               Ö
                                        ˆ Ÿ	¢Šã      2357   backs                                           °¢¥Ì®¢È
2339   pl. you touched,                  
                                      ö¬È÷¢Šó             (sr.:       ÂÉ
                                                                         ¥®)
       (did intercourse)
                                                     2358   people of Sabbath          	 È §
                                                                                       ª¦ ó¦É ¢¸Ï¢È
2340   pl. you make tayammum              ø
                                      ¦ø «
                                                     2359   executed, carried out                             
                                                                                                          ¢†óà’è÷
2341   soil, sand                        	 
                                      ¦¾àÏ                                                          ¦
                                                                                                 
                                                                                                 îó	 ¯ÈÀÌ®
                                                                                                           É
                                             Š
                                          ¢¦×
                                                     2360   save that, besides that
2342   clean (good)
                                                                                                             ¦
2343   im. pl. rub therewith             
                                    ¦¸È÷¦Ê       2361   invented, fabricated                          à ¬’ç¦Ê
2344   pl. faces                        Á É
                                        Æ ³Â       2362   husk of a date-stone,                                 	Š
                                                                                                             ¢Šô¬ç
                                                            i.e., the least
2345   benign, pardoning                  
                                           Œèß       Ruku'         7       v: 8          4         ¸ï°

2346   they change /                È Â
                                    ÀŒç ¸       2363   idols, superstitions                           	 Ž
                                                                                                           ª¦³
       pervert / displace                            2364   groove on a date-stone,                              	
                                                                                                            ¦Âìû
2347   context, (places)                    
                                      Þ	Ó¦÷               speck, farthing

       (sr.:     Ó÷)
                Þ	                                  2365   fg. consumed,                              	
                                                                                                     ª´Ôû
                                                            burnt up, roasted
       we disobeyed                        
                                       ¢üÐß
                                                                                  ’ô³)
                                                                                 ¾Ž                        ® Œ
                                                                                                           Æ ô³
2348
                                                     2366   skins (sr.:
2349   im. hear                           
                                        ÞøǦÊ
                                                                                              ø
                                                                                     Ì©¢üи ’ó¦ÈÂ Ä Þ¥°
                                                                                                         ³
2350   not made to hearing         ‰  Š
                                   ÞøÈ÷Âã         5th Part 1/4

2351   vn. twisting, distorting               
                                             ¢
óŠ    2367     forever                                            ¦¾¥¢È
2352   tongues                          ˆ üÊȒó¢È
                                        ¨           2368   shadow, shade                                        	
                                                                                                                 Û
2353   vn. slandering, taunting               Š
                                         ¢üà×      2369   plenteous shadow,                                  	Š
                                                                                                           †ôÛ
2354   more upright, more proper          ¿’ë¢È
                                          É                 dark shade
                                                     2370   pl. you restore / render back                     ®
                                                                                                           ¦ÌÂN š«
2355   we will destroy /               Æ 	 Ø
                               ²¿¶ ø’ û
       efface                                        2371   excellent                                         ø	
                                                                                                             ¢ àûŽ
2356   we turn (them)                      ®Â
                                   ®®°M  û     2372   those in authority                     Ž Š ¢
                                                                                                   Â÷˜’ó¦	óÂÉ
 Surah 4: An-Nisaa                                     117                                          Part: 5


2373   vn. interpretation                  «
                                           † Ê ’˜         2392   im. pl. take                             À»
                                                                                                          ¦ÌŒ 
 Ruku'      8       v: 9     5             ¸ï°              2393   precautionary measures                 Æ ’À	
                                                                                                           ° ·
2374   they claim / assert   ¿ ¸ ±    À øß
                                       È   Ä                for security

2375   they go / resort               øŠ ¸¬
                                   ¦ ï¢               2394   im. pl. advance,          ° » À   ¦Ì èûÊ
                                                                                                            Â	 ¦
                                                                    go forth, proceed
       together for judgment
2376   aversion, to turn away             ® ¾Ï
                                         ¦Å Ì             2395   in detachment, separately             © ¦¯
                                                                                                          Æ ¢Œ
2377   they swear                       À è	
                                        È Œ ô¸          2396   lags behind, tarries behind          ú Ø¦
                                                                                                          ŠO 
2378   not, (if)                                  ¤
                                                ÌÀÊ          2397   vn. to delay / lag behind             ¨ Ø «
                                                                                                          ˆ Š	 ¦
2379   concord, harmony                     ì ç «
                                           ¢† 	           2398   unto me, upon me                        Š
                                                                                                           ôß
2380   im. leave (them) alone               ¢
                                          ̵Ž ßÈ            2399   friendship, love, affection           ¨®÷
                                                                                                          ÆM  
2381   im. admonish                             ß
                                              ’Ú	            2400   Oh! would that I had been             ü¬ ó 
                                                                                                        ŽŠ¢
2382   effective word               ä ô¥  ë
                                   ¢ 	 † Š             2401   vn. success, achievement                ±ç
                                                                                                            Æ Š
2383   but nay! by Your Lord        ôç
                                   È È ¢Š Š              2402   they sell / trade               ÀÂ
                                                                                                    È ÌÂ Ì
2384   disputed, disagreed                  ´Ë
                                                          2403   what ails you,                        ðó ÷
                                                                                                        öŒ Š¢
                                                                    what happened to you
2385   dislike, resistance, bar             ³Â·
                                           ¢              2404   pp. those who are made      èàÔ¬È
                                                                                               ú 	      ÷
2386   you decided / decreed              ª Ôë
                                            Š                    feeble / weak / utterly helpless
                                                                    children                             À¾Â
                                                                                                         Æ ¦ ’óÊ
                                            øô
                                         ¦ O È
                                                             2405
2387   they submit / surrender
                                                                    its inhabitants                          ô¢
                                                                                                          ¢ Œ ÿÈ
                                           ø ô «
                                          ¢ 	 È
                                                             2406
2388   with entire submission
                                                                    from Thyself                   ¾ó ÷
                                                                                                  îû Mú	
                                              ¬ ¦ «
                                             ¢Ž’°
                                                             2407
2389   firmly, strongly
                                                                    strategy, craft                         ¾ ï
                                                                                                             Š
                                        ú ì ¾Ï
                                         	  	
                                                             2408
2390   truthful (people)
                                                              Ruku'        10      v: 6   7              ¸ï°
       companion                             ì ç°
                                            ¢† 	 È
                                                                                                             èï
                                                                                                          ¦N Œ
2391
                                                             2409   im. pl. withhold, hold back
 Ruku'      9      v: 11     6             ¸ï°
                                                             2410   fear                                 ˆ Ì
                                                                                                         ¨ »




                                                                                                          117
 Surah 4: An-Nisaa                                       118                                                Part: 5


2411   why not                                  ó ó
                                               ¢ŠŠ          2431   very strong, hard enough                    È
                                                                                                                 ¾Ë¢
2412   respite, a term, a while                ò³¢
                                               ˆÈ             2432   battle, conflict                           ²¥
                                                                                                                 Æ ’˜
2413   equivalent to a piece                    
                                               † 	Š          2433   stronger in                            † 	 ü
                                                                                                             ð«
       of thread, least                                               inflicting punishment
2414   wheresoever                              øü ¢
                                               ¢ È         2434   portion, part                              òï
                                                                                                                 ˆ ’è	
2415   overtakes, finds out        ½ ° ®      °
                                             Ì½Ê ¾         2435   greetings                                  ¨¸«
                                                                                                                 ˆ 	 
2416   towers, fortresses                     « Â¥
                                              Æ Ì            Ruku'      11     v: 11          8           ¸ï°

2417   lofty, high, fortified             Æ  Ì
                                          ¨¾ ÷                5th Part    1/2            ©¢иøó¦È
                                                                                           Ì ü   ’     Ä
                                                                                                             ³   æÐû




2418   so what ails,                          ¾ øç
                                              Ê ¢ Š           2436   turned back, overthrown                Æï ¢
                                                                                                              Š Ì°È
       so what happened
                                                               2437   they join / meet /                    À ô	
                                                                                                            È Œ Ð
2419   they do not                  È ®ð ó
                                    ÀÌÂÉ ¢Š ¢Š                     seek refuge
       come near to
                                                               2438   fg. restricting, restraining           Âз
                                                                                                           Ì© 	 
2420   they understand (vn.:    ¨ç À ì
                                ˆ ’ì	 ) È  Š ’è
                                                               2439   gave power / dominion                      ÖôÇ
                                                                                                                 Š M
2421   obedience                              ¨ß ×
                                              ˆ  ¢Š                                                         ¸ï°
                                                                Ruku'      12       v: 4         9
2422   planned at night time                    ª¥
                                                            2440   to set free                            ÂÂ «
                                                                                                              Ž ¸
2423   they plan at night                    À ¬¦
                                             È          2441   neck, (slave)                              ˆ Š È
                                                                                                                 ¨¦ë°
2424   they ponder / think deeply      À Â¥  
                                       È Ì ¾¬             2442   blood money paid as                         ¨®
                                                                                                                  ˆ Ê
2425   verily they would                   ¾  ó
                                        ¦Ì ³Š                      compensation to victim's relatives
       have found                                              2443   (paid) fully                          ¨ ô ÷
                                                                                                            ˆ øM È
2426   they propagate / spread                  ß ¯¢
                                             ¦ ¦È È         2444   dl. two months (sr.:      ÂË ÂË
                                                                                                   ) ú  
2427   they elicit / investigate     À ؎ 
                                     È Œ ¦ü¬È            2445   dl. consecutive, continuous             ॠ¬¬÷
                                                                                                           ú Ž¢
2428   im. persuade, urge                      ·
                                             ̵              2446   purposely, intentionally               ¾øà¬÷
                                                                                                            ¦   
2429   it may be, perchance                     ß
                                              È              2447   pl. you went forth (to fight)           ¬ ÂÓ
                                                                                                            ö¥ 
2430   will restrain / withhold                ð
                                             æŒ                    marched forth




                                                                                                              118
 Surah 4: An-Nisaa                                    119                                              Part: 5


2448   offered                                  ¢
                                            ì’óÈ                  for safety, 2393
                                                            2467   your baggage                      ð	 	 ¢
                                                                                                   öŒ ¬à¬÷È
2449   you are not                        ª ó
                                           Ȋ
                                                            2468   to attack, swoop                          ˆ Š 
                                                                                                             ¨ô ÷
2450   profits, perishable goods         µÂß
                                         Æ 
                                                            2469   at once, suddenly                     ¾· Â
                                                                                                        ¨ 	 ¦È
2451   plunders, gains                     öû ä÷
                                            Ž¢ 
                                                            2470   rain                                     Š 
                                                                                                            ÂØ÷
2452   equals not                     ¬ ó
                                    ÌĎ È¢Š
                                                            2471   that you lay down                à ¢
                                                                                                 ¦ Ô«ÌÀÈ
2453   other than those    °ÂÔ ó ¢ Â ã
                           Ê   ó¦	ÂÉ Š
       who have a disabling hurt
                                                            2472   pl. you are secure,               ¬ûø ¦
                                                                                                   öü’˜ ’×Ê
 Ruku'     13       v: 5    10           ¸ï°                      you feel safe from danger

2454   caused to die, gave death            ç«
                                                        2473   pl. you are               ¿ ¾ ¦   È  󊒘«
                                                                                                        Àø
                                                                   undergoing sufferings, hardships
2455   in what state, in what manner          ø ç
                                             ¢ 	          2474   pl. you hope                         À³
                                                                                                        È  «
2456   strategy, devise a plan             ¨ô ·
                                           ˆ Š 	            Ruku'        15     v: 4    12               ¸ï°

                                         øã Â÷
                                        ¢ Š ¦                                                                    ¢
                                                                                                                   °È
                                                                                                               ¦

2457   spacious area                                        2475   showed

2458   to get                               Æ Ì°È
                                            ½®              2476   ap. breachers of trust,              ú üŸ »
                                                                                                         Ž	¢
2459   became due / incumbent                ÞëÂ
                                              ŠÈ                  treacherous

                                         ¸ï°
                                                            2477   quarrel, supporter, pleader          ø л
                                                                                                       ¢ 	 
 Ruku'     14       v: 4    11

2460   pl. you shorten /    ° ´ ¼       ÂÐ
                                      ¦Ì  ’ì«          2478   ni. do not dispute / plead    Ì¾Ê ¢ ¢Š
                                                                                                   ® ´« ó
       curtail                                              2479   they deceive / defraud          À û¬
                                                                                                   È ¢¼
2461   puts in distress          À © »    ú¬
                                            	’è         2480   disloyal, trust breacher               ¢¦ 
                                                                                                           û »
2462   you were                             ï
                                           ªüŒ             2481   sinful, sinner                            ø ¯¢
                                                                                                            ¢ 	È
2463   let it stand up / stand by              ì«
                                             öŒ           2482   they hide / feel ashamed     Àè ¬
                                                                                                È Œ ¼È
2464   arms, weapons                    ˆ  	 ÇÈ
                                        ¨¸ô ¢               2483   they make conspiracy                  À ¬¦
                                                                                                         È 
2465   let it come up                       ©«
                                            Ê ’˜                  by night

2466   precautionary measures               ° ·
                                            Æ ’À	           2484   blames, accuses                            ¿
                                                                                                              Ê Â




                                                                                                          119
 Surah 4: An-Nisaa                                                      120                                          Part: 5


2485   innocent                                           Â¥
                                                       ¢†Ž                 2503   friend                             † 	 
                                                                                                                         ô»
2486   carried (burden),                          òø¬ ¦
                                                  Š  ·Ê                     Ruku'         18    v: 11       15       ¸ï°
       accepted blame                                                         2504   they consult / ask for decree    À¬¬
                                                                                                                      È ’èÈ
 Ruku'      16      v: 8         13                ¸ï°
                                                                              2505   pl. you desire                   À ¦Š
                                                                                                                      È ã«
2487   fg. resolved, intended                        øÿ
                                                   ª 
                                                                              2506   husband                                 ò¥
                                                                                                                             ˆ à
2488   taught                                              öôß
                                                            M
                                                            

                                                                              2507   fg. made to be present /         ÂÔ ¢
                                                                                                                    Ì© 	 ·É
 5th Part     3/4          © üиøó Â
                           Ì ¢   ’ ¦È    Ä ¸¢¥°¦
                                               ³           ¨¯   ¯


                                                                                     swayed
                                                      û
                                                 Ã ´
                                                       ¦

2489   secret conference                                                      2508   greed, miserliness, selfishness     ¶Ì
                                                                                                                           ó¦
2490   opposes, contends                          ê	 Ì
                                                   ë¢                     2509   pl. you wished/ desired/          ¬ ·
                                                                                                                     öÏ 
2491   we will make him enter                        ô û
                                                    þ	 Ð                           coveted
                                                                                                                        ¨Š ô ÷
                                                                                                                        ˆ ìM à
                                                   ¦


                                                                              2510   pp. hanging, in suspension
 Ruku'      17      v:3          14                ¸ï°
2492   besides that,                   îó À ® ÷
                                        	¯È ÌÂÉ ¢                          2511   you also / too                       ï ¤
                                                                                                                        öŒ ¢Ê
       other than that                                                        2512   praise worthy                      ¾ ø·
                                                                                                                       ¦ 	 
2493   female idols, goddesses                              ¯ û¤
                                                           ¢†¢Ê              2513   produces, brings forth                  ©
                                                                                                                             Ê ’˜
2494   rebellious                                   ¦ Ž 
                                                     ¾ Â÷                      Ruku'         19     v: 8       16       ¸ï°
2495   they will cut (slit)                        úð¬¦
                                                    Œ                    2514   nearer                                     ¢
                                                                                                                             DÌÂÈ
2496   ears (sr.:      À¯¢
                       Æ É É)                          Æ ¦È ¦
                                                       À¯           ¦


                                                                              2515   the passion, the lust            à  ’ó¦
                                                                                                                         ¦




2497   pl. cattle (sr.:    öû
                            à)                      Æ ¢ ûÈ
                                                       ¿à¢                    2516   pl. you lapse / incline               «
                                                                                                                         ÌÂ ’ô
2498   deception, beguile,                         ° Âã
                                                  ¦Å Ì Œ                    2517   they increased / exceeded          ®® ¦
                                                                                                                     ¦ÌÂÉ ¦È ̱Ê
       vain desires
2499   escape, refuge                             Ð ¸÷
                                                 ¢ 	                      2518   they engage in talk               Ó ¼
                                                                                                                    ¦  
2500   more true                                  ¼¾ ¢
                                                  É  ÏÈ                     2519   conversation, talk               ˆ 	 
                                                                                                                      ® ¾·
2501   words, speech                                       ë
                                                           † 	                     (pl.:           ® ·¢
                                                                                                  ®Ê ¢ È)
2502   little bit, least                                Â ìû
                                                       ¦ 	                2520   they wait and watch            À Ð¥ 
                                                                                                                    È  ¬




                                                                                                                        120
 Surah 4: An-Nisaa                                       121                                           Part: 6


                                                               2536   we forgave / pardoned                û èß
                                                                                                          ¢Š 
2521   we overcome / protect                ¬ û
                                         ̯Ž ¸È
                                                               2537   ni. pl. transgress not,             ¾ ó
                                                                                                       ¦Ì ૢŠ
2522   we defend /              ¸ À ¿      ðü û
                                          öŒ àø                 violate not the limit, do not exceed
       guard you
                                             ¸ï°
                                                               2538   to crucify                           ’ô
                                                                                                          ¤Ï
 Ruku'     20      v: 7        17

2523   languidly, lazily, reluctantly         Èï
                                            D¢ Œ              2539   pv. made doubtful /           Á § ³    
                                                                                                               þ¦Ë
                                                                      dubious
2524   those who sway / waver             ú Š Š ÷
                                           ¥ŽÀ¥À           2540   ap. those who give or pay          À«÷
                                                                                                         È š
2525   authority, warrant, proof           Æ ¢Š ’ô
                                           ÀØÇ                  Ruku'     22       v: 10        2         ¸ï°
2526   clear proof,                  ü ¦÷ û Ø Ç
                                    ¢Ž ¢¢Š ’ô           2541   Book of Psalms                             ¥±
                                                                                                              °È
       manifest authority                                             of Prophet David X
2527   the rank                             ½¾
                                            É Ì° ó¦           2542   we mentioned /       ´ ´ ¼     ¢Ð Š
                                                                                                         ü Ðë
2528   lowest, deep                          òŠ ¢
                                             Œ èÇÈ                   narrated
                                                               2543   vn. to speak                        ø ô «
                                                                                                         ¢ 	 ’ð
2529   made pure / sincere                   Њ ¢
                                          ¦ ô»È
                                                               2544   ap. those who give               ú Â̦÷
                                                                                                        Ž  
2530   what will (he) do? / gain?        ò ÷
                                         Œ à’è¢                  good news or glad tidings
 (Note: A verb has different meanings
depending upon the context. To acquaint                        2545   ap. warners                       ú °	 ÷
                                                                                                         Ê Àü
the readers with different meanings, we
have repeated the words in this Lughat.)                       2546   argument, plea                       ¨´·
                                                                                                           ˆ 
 ^ Part:6                … ¤
                         É ¦ 	¸¢Šó Ä `
                                            ³                  2547   road, way                            ê Â×
                                                                                                            Ž Š
2531   to say loudly, to shout                 ³
                                                            2548   easy                                 Â È
                                                                                                          ¦ Ê 
2532   powerful                                 ¾ë
                                              ¦ 	 Š         2549   ni. pl. don't exaggerate /           ô ó
                                                                                                        ¦Œ ä«¢Š
                                                                      exceed
2533   truly, in truth                           ì·
                                                ¢            2550   word                                 ˆ  	Š
                                                                                                           ¨øôï
                                             ¸ï°
                                                                                                                  ¢
                                                                                                              ì’óÈ
 Ruku'     21      v: 11        1
                                                               2551   conveyed, bestowed, cast
2534   manifestly, plainly, openly           ¨Â ³
                                             Æ  
                                                               2552   three                                   ¨¯ ô¯
                                                                                                              ˆ Š¢Š Š
2535   storm of lightening,                 ˆ Š 	 ¢
                                            ¨ìß Ï
       thunderbolt
                                                               2553   im. pl. cease, desist                    ¬¦
                                                                                                          ¦ ûÊ




                                                                                                           121
 Surah 5: Al-Maaidah                                       122                                            Part: 6

 Ruku'     23        v: 9        3            ¸ï°               2565   ni. pl. do not violate /         ¦N 	 ¢Š
                                                                                                            ô¸« ó
2554   he will not       » ½ À    æð ¬ ó
                                    	 üÈúŠ                     profane
       disdain, will not feel too proud to                       2566   monuments, symbols                   àË
                                                                                                             Ÿ	– 
2555   vn. to disdain,                  Æ ¢Š ü	ÇÊ
                                        »ð¬ ¦                    2567   the sacred month        ¿ ¸  Ì
                                                                                                É ¦  ’ó¦   ó¦
       to regard with contempt
                                                                 2568   offerings, animals                  Ä
                                                                                                            É ¾ ’ó¦
2556   proof, argument                        Àÿ ¥
                                              Æ ¢ Â                  brought for sacrifice

2557   they ask for a legal decision,        À¬¬
                                             È ’èÈ        2569   collars or garlands put                Ÿ ôë
                                                                                                              ¾	–Š Š
                                                                        around the necks of the animals
       they seek a decree
                                                                        meant for sacrifice.
2558   two-third, 2/3                            °ô¯
                                               À¢ŠŒ Œ            2570   ap. those resorting /                   ¦
                                                                                                              ú ÷  ¦




       (sr.: one-third or 1/3:        ô¯
                                     ®Œ Œ)
                                                                        intending to go
                                              ¸ï°
 Ruku'     24        v:6         4
                                                                 2571   the sacred house,          ¿ ¸ ª ¦
                                                                                                   É ¦  ’ó¦ ’ó¦
                         ¨ Ç
                ¨¾	Ÿ¢Šm¦É È°
                                                                        the inviolable house, (Ka'bah)
          ^                          `
                                                                 2572   you put off Ihram,                    ¬ ô·
                                                                                                            ö’ôŠ 
         The Table Spread                                               you went out of sacred territory
       Surah 5: Al-Maaidah                                       2573   im. pl. you may hunt               ®Ø ¦
                                                                                                        ¦ÌÂÉ ¢Š ÏÊ
2559   obligations, undertakings,              Æ Œ 
                                               ® ìß              2574   vn. to hunt             ® Ä ´   Æ ¢Š ÏÊ
                                                                                                           ®Ø ¦
       covenants (sr.:      ¾ß
                             ’ì )                              2575   let (it) not                   ðü Ž ó
                                                                                                     öŒ ÷´¢Š
                                                                        provoke you
       beast                                   ˆ  Ž 
                                               ¨ø ¥
                                                                                                             À üË
                                                                                                             É ¢
2560                                                                                                            ¦


                                                                 2576   hatred, malice, enmity
       cattle                                   Æ ¢ ûÈ
                                                ¿à¢
                                                                                                              ûÂ à«
                                                                                                           ¦È ¢ 
2561
                                                                 2577   im. pl. you help one another,
2562   unlawful, forbidden              ô¸÷ Â
                                      O 	   Šã                   you cooperate

2563   hunting                                  ¾ Ï
                                                              2578   transgression, enmity              ÀÂ ß
                                                                                                           Æ ¦È ¾
2564   be in the state of pilgrimage            ¿Â·
                                                Æ               6th Part     1/4          …¦ 	 ¢Š Ä Þ¥°
                                                                                               ¤¸ ó ³
       (Hajj or Umrah) under Ihraam.
       In this state, two unstitched sheets
       of white cloth are worn by male                           2579   dead, carrion                          ¨¬ ÷
                                                                                                               ˆ 
       pilgrims.




                                                                                                             122
 Surah 5: Al-Maaidah                                123                                              Part: 6


2580   blood                                 ÆÈ
                                             ¿®                  an inclination
                                                          2598   those who cause injury,              ° ³
                                                                                                     ¬Ê ¦ 
2581   flesh, meat                         ö ó
                                            ¸Š                 inflict wound

2582   swine, pig                        Ž ü	
                                        ÂÄ»               2599   animals trained for,                ú ŽôŠ ÷
                                                                                                      ¦O ð
                                                                 hunting hounds
       over which a name                   òÿ¢
                                           M 	É
                                                                                                     ú È¢
                                                                                                      ’ð ÷È
2583
                                                          2600   they held / caught
       is invoked, dedicated, consecrated
2584   pp. strangled                   ¨Š Ž ÷
                                       ˆ ìü¼ü           2601   virtuous / chaste women        © üÐ ÷
                                                                                                Ç ¢ ¸
2585   pp. beaten to death             Æ È Œ 
                                       ¨¯ ë ÷            2602   those who take                        	 	 ¬÷
                                                                                                     ÌÄÀ¼
2586   pp. dead after falling           ¨ ®  ÷
                                        ˆ O ¬                (Actually it was       ú 	 	 ¬÷
                                                                                         À¼ ,
       from height
                                                                 but because it is        Ô÷
                                                                                        Ȣ  ,
2587   killed by goring of horns        ¨¸ Øû
                                        ˆ  	 
                                                                 the last    À is dropped.)
2588   the beast, the wild animal       Þ¦È
                                          ó¦                                                        ¸ï°
                                                           Ruku'         1       v: 5       5
2589   pl. you purified / cleaned         ¬ ï¯
                                        öM È           2603   you stand / prepare                      ¬ë
                                                                                                        öøŒ
       (made lawful by slaughtering in
       the name of Allah while                            2604   both the hands                          ¾¢
                                                                                                       ÌÄ	 È
       it is still alive).
2590   slaughtered,                        ¶¥¯
                                            ŽÉ           2605   pl. elbows                           êç Â÷
                                                                                                       	 ¦ 
       slit the throat of an animal                       2606   pl. heads                            Æ É É
                                                                                                      ²  °
       place of idols, altars             
                                        ¤Ðû
                                                                                                       ò³ ¢
                                                                                                       ˆ  Ì°È
2591
                                                          2607   feet
       pl. you try the luck           øÈ ¬ «
                                   ¦ Ê ’ìÈ
                                                                             ò °
                                                                             ˆ ³Ê )
2592
                                                                 (sr.:
       divination devices (dices,         Æ ¢ŠÌ±È
                                          ¿ó ¢
                                                                                                      ú ¦ ï
                                                                                                      Ž àŠ
2593
                                                          2608   dl. ankles
       arrows, etc., to know one's
       luck or fortune)
                                                          2609   state of pollution caused by             ¦ü³
                                                                                                         ¢
2594   despaired, lost all hopes          Æ 
                                           	                  ejaculation or intercourse

2595   is driven / forced to             Œ ÓÉ
                                        ÂØ ¦              2610   privy, toilet                         ֟ ã
                                                                                                       ˆ 	–Š
2596   extreme hunger                 ¨Ðø ÷
                                      ˆ   ¼           2611   you touched,                          ¬ ÷ó
                                                                                                     öÈ ¢Š
                                                                 (did intercourse)
2597   one who has                    æû ´¬÷
                                       Ž¢ 




                                                                                                       123
 Surah 5: Al-Maaidah                                124                                         Part: 6


2612   ratified (covenant)                ê¯ Â
                                           Š¦È           2630   destroys                          îô 
                                                                                                    	 
2613   blazing fire, (hell)            ö ¸³
                                        	              2631   we                                 ú
                                                                                                     ¸û
2614   intended                             öÿ
                                                        2632   sons (sr.:        ¥Ê)
                                                                                  ú¦                   ü¢
                                                                                                     É –¥È
2615   they stretch out                  ØÈ
                                      ¦Œ  ¦         2633   beloved ones                      £ ¦·¢
                                                                                                   É –	 È
2616   withheld, held back                 Š
                                          æï              2634   so why, why then                     öôç
                                                                                                       	Š
 Ruku'         2     v: 6     6         ¸ï°              2635   mortal, man                          
                                                                                                     ÂÌ¥
2617   twelve                      ÂÌß ü ¦
                                      ’¯Ê          2636   an interval                         ¨Â ç
                                                                                                     Æ  ¬Š
2618   chiefs, wardens                     ¦ ìû
                                          ¢	                  (between two messengers)

2619   pl. you support (it) with        ø« Äß
                                     ¦ Ì°            Ruku'        3        v: 8      7       ¸ï°
       might, you strengthen (it)                         2637   pv. was not given              © ó
                                                                                                Ê šöŠ
       to breach / break                  ’ì
                                         Òû
                                                                                                    ¾ì÷
                                                                                                  ̲ Š 
2620
                                                          2638   holy
       you will not cease to          ¾ Ä« ó
                                      É ¦ ¢Š
                                                                                                  ¾« « ó
                                                                                               ¦ÌÂ ¢Š
2621
                                                          2639   ni. pl. do not turn back
       you will get information,         Þ	 Ø
                                          ôM «
                                                                                                     ¦	 Š
                                                                                                  ¦ôìü«
2622
                                                          2640   pl. you will be overthrown
       you will find / discover
2623   im. overlook                      è ¦
                                       ¶Š ÏÊ            2641   those of exceeding strength     ú ° ¦³
                                                                                                  Ê ¢
2624   we have stirred up,               ü ¢
                                        ¢ ’ãÈ         2642   dl. two men                      À ô³°
                                                                                                  Ê ¢Š  È
       we have caused
                                                          2643   the gate, the door                §¦
                                                                                                   É ¢’ó¦
2625   nearly, soon                     Ȃ
                                        È 
                                                          2644   never, forever                        ¾¥¢
                                                                                                      ¦ È
2626   they do, handiwork            À à
                                     È  üÐ
                                                          2645   till they remain,                ÷® ÷
                                                                                               ¦ ¦È ¢
2627   paths, ways                        ò¦Ç
                                          ˆ                    as long as they remain

       (sr.:       ò ¦Ç
                   ˆ Ž )                                2646   im. go                             ÿ¦
                                                                                                  ¤ ̯Ê
2628   peace, salvation                    ôÇ
                                         ¿¢Š             2647   im. dl. fight                        ô« ë
                                                                                                     ¢Š 	¢Š
2629   who has power                î	 ÷
                                     ôøú           2648   here                               üÿ ÿ
                                                                                                   ¢ ¢




                                                                                                   124
 Surah 5: Al-Maaidah                                      125                                            Part: 6


2649   I have no control / power           î	 ¢ ó
                                            ô÷È¢Š            2666   your hand                                ½¾
                                                                                                                È  
2650   myself                                  Èû
                                             Ê ’è            2667   ap. one who stretches                  ÖÇ ¥
                                                                                                              ˆ 	 ¢
2651   my brother                                Ȣ
                                               	 È            2668   you draw on yourself                      ¦
                                                                                                                È «
2652   im. separate                             ¦
                                              ̼ ’çÉ           2669   you would be,                          Àð
                                                                                                              É Œ «
2653   pp. forbidden                        ¨ Â ÷
                                            ˆ ÷ ¸                    you will become
                                                                2670   fg. induced, made pleasant          ß ×
                                                                                                         ª Š
2654   forty                                 ú ॠ¢
                                              	 Ì°È
                                                                2671   became                                ¶¦ ¢
                                                                                                              ÏÈ
2655   year                                     ˆ 
                                                ¨üÇ
                                                                2672   sent                                    ®à¥
                                                                                                               Š 
2656   they shall wander / roam             À ¬
                                            È  	
                                                                2673   raven, (crow)                         Æ ¦ Œ
                                                                                                             § Âã
2657   ni. grieve not, sorrow not           ²« ó
                                            È ’˜¢Š
                                                                2674   scratches                             ®
                                                                                                             Œ ¸¦
 Ruku'         4        v: 7       8         ¸ï°
2658   im. and recite, and convey              òÂ
                                               Œ «¦È           2675   hide, conceal                           ° 
                                                                                                             ÌÄÊ ¦ 
2659   tale, story (news)                           ¦û
                                                   ¢          2676   corpse, dead body                       ¨ Ç
                                                                                                               É ¢È
       (pl.:       Æ ¢ûÈ)
                    ¦¢                                          2677   woe unto me                        ôÂ
                                                                                                         UŠ È ¢
2660   two sons                                   ü¦
                                                ¥Ê          2678   am I unable /                    © ´ß¢
                                                                                                        É Ä  È
                                                                       too weak to
       (sr.:        ¥Ê )
                   ú¦                                           2679   I become                               À ï¢
                                                                                                              È Œ È
2661   dl. they offered                          ¥Âë
                                                ¢ Š           2680   I may hide / conceal                  Ä° ¢
                                                                                                             È Ê ¦È É
2662   sacrifice, offering                     û¥ ë
                                              ¢¢Œ           2681   ap. those full of regrets,            ú ÷® û
                                                                                                              	 Ê ¢
2663   pv. was accepted                        ò¦ì«
                                               Š Œ                   remorseful (sr.:     Æ Ê ¢)
                                                                                            ¿® û
                                                                                                      îó ò ¢
                                                                                                       	 ¯Ž ³È
                                                                                                         ¦

  th
 6 Part        1/2                ¤¸ ó ³
                               …¦ 	 ¢Š Ä æÐû             2682   (for) that cause / reason

                                                                2683   as if                                   øû˜ï
                                                                                                              ¢ ŠŠ
2664   you stretched                        ª È¥
                                             ’Ø 
                                                                2684   ap. those committing            À çŽ ÷
                                                                                                       È Œ ÂÈ
2665   towards me                                 ŠÊ
                                                 ó¤                   excesses




                                                                                                              125
 Surah 5: Al-Maaidah                                     126                                      Part: 6


2685   they wage war          § ° ¬    À ¥° ¸
                                        È Ê ¢           2702   priests, rabbis, scholars     °¦ ¢
                                                                                                    Æ ¢·È
2686   they strive / endeavor              Àà
                                           È  È          2703   eye                             ú ß
                                                                                                       
2687   pv. are crucified                  À ¦ô
                                          È M Ð           2704   nose                             ûÈ
                                                                                                      æ¢
2688   pv. are cut off             ¸ ¶ ¼    Þ؊ «
                                              M ì           2705   ear                              Æ ÉÉ
                                                                                                       À¯¢
2689   opposite side, alternate             » ô»
                                            È ¢Š 	             2706   tooth                            Ç
                                                                                                       ú	
2690   pv. are expelled, exiled                 è
                                             ÀŠ ü         2707   pl. wounds                  ¬ ³
                                                                                                  Æ ÌÂ 
2691   pl. you get power,                     °¾ «
                                           ¦ÌÂÉ 	 ’ì          2708   just retribution,           Æ ¢ 	
                                                                                                  ´ Ðë
       you overpower                                                  law of equality

                                             ¸ï°
                                                               2709   expiation, atonement          ¨° èï
                                                                                                    Æ È ¢M Š
 Ruku'         5       v: 8    9

2692   way of approach, means                ¨ô ÇÂ
                                             Š Š 	 È          2710   we caused to follow,             ü èë
                                                                                                      ¢M Š
                                                                      we sent (after)
2693   mg. thief                             ¼° Ç
                                             Æ Ê ¢            2711   footsteps, footprints            °¯
                                                                                                       Æ ¢Š ¦
                                                                                                           ¦




2694   fg. thief                             ¨ë° Ç
                                             ˆ Š Ê ¢          2712   watcher                       üø ÷
                                                                                                   ¢	  
2695   deterrent, example                      ðû
                                              † ¢Š            2713   law, Shariat                  ˆ  Â	
                                                                                                    ¨ß Ë
2696   mouths                                 Æ ¦ ’çÈ
                                              Á¢              2714   traced-out way,              ³ ÷
                                                                                                  ¢ ¢ ü	
       (sr.:       Áç
                   Æ Š )                                            course of action

2697   eager listeners                   À ß øÇ
                                         È  ¢             2715   good works, virtues         ©Â»
                                                                                                  Æ ¦ 
                                                                Ruku'        7      v: 7    11      ¸ï°
2698   others                              ú »
                                            Ž  ¦¦




                                                               2716   turns (for friendship)         ¾¬
                                                                                                     M  
2699   those who                ¾ ½ ¦    À ó ï¢
                                          È Œ¢M È
       swallow greedily
                                                               2717   change, turn (of fortune)     ¨ÂŸ ®
                                                                                                    Æ  	¡È
2700   forbidden things, illicit             ¸
                                            ª Ç                2718   they took oath,                ø ¢
                                                                                                  ¦ ȒëÈ
2701   they seek judgment               À øð 
                                        È  O ¸                    they swore
                                                               2719   forcible, solemn               ¾³
                                                                                                     
 Ruku'         6       v: 9    10            ¸ï°
                                                               2720   their oaths                     ûø¢
                                                                                                  öŽ Ž¢ È




                                                                                                    126
 Surah 5: Al-Maaidah                                              127                                           Part: 6


               3/4             …¦  	 ¢Š
                                  ¤¸ ó      Ä ¸¢¥°¦
                                               ³         ¨¯
  ¯
                                                                        2737   rabbis, men of God               È Ž¢È
                                                                                                                À û ¥°
 6th Part
                                                                        2738   priests, scholars                     °¦ ¢
                                                                                                                     É ¢·È
2721   becomes renegade,                                 ¾«
                                                          Â
       will turn back
                                                                        2739   pp. are fettered, tied up         ¨ó ô 
                                                                                                                 ˆ ŠŒ ä÷
2722   humble, lowly                                      ó ¯¢
                                                         ¨MÊ È          2740   fg. pv. is shackled / tied up           ôã
                                                                                                                     ªM Œ
2723   stern, mighty                                   Äߢ
                                                      ¨ 	 È            2741   dl. wide spread,              À ¬× È 
                                                                                                             Ê ¢Š  ¦÷
2724   blame, reproach, censure                          ¨÷ ó
                                                         ˆ  Š                stretched out
                                                                        2742   we have cast / placed                   ü ì ¢
                                                                                                                      ¢Š ’óÈ
2725   ap. one who censures / blames                      Ÿó
                                                         ö	¢Š
                                                                        2743   they lighted / kindled fire          ¾Š ¢
                                                                                                                 ¦Ì ëÌÂÈ
2726   party, group                                 §·
                                                    Æ Ä	
                                                                        2744   war, battle                           Æ Â
                                                                                                                     §·
       (pl.:         Ä ¢
                   §¦ ·È)
                                                                        2745   extinguished                            ˜è ¢
                                                                                                                       ŠŠ ’×È
 Ruku'         8        v: 6        12              ¸ï°
                                                                               we effaced / remitted /                û èï
                                                                                                                     ¢ÂM Š
                                                           ¦àó
                                                          ¢	 Š
                                                                        2746
2727   play, sport
                                                                               expiated
2728   you call / proclaim                            ¬®û
                                                    öÈ ¢           2747   moderate, on right course       Æ ¾Ð¬’ì
                                                                                                               ¨ 	  ÷
2729   you find fault,                            À ø	
                                                  È  ìü«           2748   evil, vile                               Ç
                                                                                                                       È –
       you disapprove
                                                                         Ruku'         9       v: 10   13            ¸ï°
       shall I inform you  § À                ð ¦û¢ ÿ
                                             öŒ ŒÉ’ò
                                                                                                                     ö	
                                                                                                                      Ðà
2730
                                                                        2749   will protect
       retribution, recompense                       ˆ Œ÷
                                                     ¨¥ °
                                                                                           ¨ø ß
                                                                                           ˆ  Ð	 )
2731
                                                                               (vn.:
       pl. monkeys, apes                             ÆÈ  	
                                                     ¨®Âë
                                                                                                                       ¬ ó
                                                                                                                     öȊ
2732
                                                                        2750   you are not
       (sr.:       ®ë
                   Æ Â	 )
                                                                        2751   you establish / stand fast by        ø 	 «
                                                                                                                 ¦ ì
       pl. pigs, swines                              ± ü»
                                                  ÂÊ ¢
                                                                                                                 ²« ó
                                                                                                                 È ’˜¢Š
2733
                                                                        2752   ni. pl. grieve / sorrow not
       worse in rank                          û ð÷ ÂË
                                             ¢¢Š   
                                                                                                                        ®ÿ
                                                                                                                     ¦ÌÂÉ ¢
2734
                                                                        2753   they became Jews
       most strayed one, further astray                   òÓ¢
                                                          N È
                                                                                                                À Ï
                                                                                                                È Œ¥Ž¢
2735
                                                                        2754   Sabians
2736   why not                                         ó ó
                                                      ¢ŠŠ
                                                                                                                    « ó
                                                                                                               à  ¢Š
                                                                                                                 ¦

                                                                        2755   desired not




                                                                                                                  127
 Surah 5: Al-Maaidah                                  128                                             Part: 7


2756   they thought / counted on            ¦È·
                                         ¦Ê             2775    you will surely find               M  Ž Š
                                                                                                       À¾´¬ó
2757   they became blind                      ø
                                           ¦ ß           2776    affection                            ¨®÷
                                                                                                         ÆM  
2758   they became deaf                      øÏ
                                          ¦             2777    priests, those devoted          ú È Èë
                                                                                                     Ê  	
2759   the third of three           ¨¯ ô¯ ® ¯
                                    
 Š¢Š ŠŒ ó	¢Š                  to learning
                                                            2778    monks, those                         û¦ °
                                                                                                        ¢¢ÿÉ
2760   truthful / saintly woman          ˆ Š  	
                                         ¨ì ¾Ï                      who have renounced the world

2761   dl. they used to eat        À ôï û ï
                                   Ê ¢Š Œ ’˜¢¢Š
                                                             ^ Part:7                                     ³
                                                                                    ¦à	øǦȯʤÈÂ Ä `
2762   im. see, look                          ܦ
                                            Œ ûÉ
2763   pv. they are turned away /      À ðŠ
                                       È Œ çš          2779    they heard / listened                 à	 
                                                                                                       ¦ øÇ
       deluded away from the truth                          2780    their eyes                             ü ¢
                                                                                                       ö ßÈ
 Ruku'     10     v: 11       14          ¸ï°
                                                                    fg. overflows                       Ò è«
                                                                                                        	 
                                              	ó
                                             úàŒ
                                                            2781                            µ Ä »
2764   pv. were cursed
                                                            2781a   tears                                  ÷È
                                                                                                          Þ®
2765   by the tongue                À Èó ß
                                    Ê ¢ 	ô
                                                                    rewarded                             § ¯¢
                                                                                                         È ¢ŠÈ
                                             Ðß
                                          ¦ 
                                                            2782
2766   they rebelled / disobeyed
                                                             Ruku'       11       v: 9      1           ¸ï°
       they transgress /                À ¾
                                        È Ì ¬à
                                                                                                      ÷¸« ó
                                                                                                   ¦   ¢Š
2767
                                                            2783    ni. pl. forbid not,
       exceed the limit
                                                                    do not make unlawful
       vn. to transgress,                Æ ¡ 	ßÊ
                                           ¾¬ ¦
                                                                                                       © ¦×
                                                                                                       Æ ¢Š
2768
                                                            2784    pl. good, pure
       to exceed the limit
2769   they do not forbid /          À ÿ ü¬ ó
                                     È  ¢¢Š         2785    vain, void                              ó
                                                                                                             äŠ
       restrain one another
                                                            2786    oaths                                Àø¢
                                                                                                         Æ ¢ È
2770   surely evil, surely bad             Æ ¦ó
                                            ’ ŽŠ
                                                            2787    you made a knot,                     « ìß
                                                                                                       ö¾M 
                                               «
                                            Ã Â
                                               ¦

2771   you (will) see                                               you made binding

2772   they make friends, they ally      À ó ¬
                                         È M          2788    vn. to feed (others)                 ¿à ¤
                                                                                                         É ¢ ’×Ê
2773   sent on before, sent forward         ÷¾ë
                                          ª  Š           2789    average, more or                     Ç¢
                                                                                                        Ö ÌÂÈ
                                                                    less the same
2774   condemned, incensed                Ö¼Ç
                                          Š	




                                                                                                         128
 Surah 5: Al-Maaidah                                129                                          Part: 7

2790   you have sworn                     ¬ ô·
                                        ö’èŠ           2808   fg. she-camel with split ears    Æ  	 
                                                                                                  ¨Â ¸¥
2791   idols, altars                  §Ð
                                      Æ ¢ ûÈ¢                  set free in honor of some idol-gods
                                                          2809   fg. she-camel set free in         ¨¦Ÿ Ç
                                                                                                   ˆ 	–
2792   infamy, abomination,              ³Ê
                                        Æ °                      honor of idol-gods
       loathsome
                                                          2810   fg. she-camel which gives        ¨ô ÏÂ
                                                                                                  ˆ Š 	 È
2793   will cast, put                     Þ	  
                                           ë                  birth to two females and freed
                                                                 in the name of idol-gods.
       what? will you? (interrogative)        ÿ
                                            ’ò
                                                                                                     ¿·
                                                                                                     Æ ¢
2794
                                                          2811   stallion camel
2795   those who abstain from,         À ÷
                                       È  ¬ü                freed from work
       desist                                             2812   enough for us                     ü¦ ·
                                                                                                  ¢È
       im. you turned away                ¬ ó «
                                        öM
                                                                                                   û ³Â
                                                                                                  ¢¾ È
2796
                                                          2813   we found
 Ruku'     12        v: 7    2          ¸ï°
                                                                 mg. two                            Àü¦
                                                                                                    Ê ¢’¯Ê
                                           
                                          ¾ Ï
                                                          2814
2797   hunting
                                                                 you detain / stop / withold   À Ȏ
                                                                                               È  ¦¸«
                                           ¾ ü«
                                           É ¢
                                                          2815
2798   to reach, to take, to grasp
                                                                 you doubted                        ¬« ¦
                                                                                                  ö¦Ì°Ê
                                         Æ ¢ Ê
                                         ¬ ÷°
                                                          2816
2799   spears, weapons
                                                                 sinful people, sinners            ú ø¯
                                                                                                    	 	 ¦
                                                                                                         ¦




                                              àû
                                            ö 
                                                          2817
2800   cattle (domestic) animals
                                                                 ascertained, get known               	ß
                                                                                                     °
                                     ¾ ß Â¯
                                     Ç ¾ ¦È È
                                                          2818
2801   two (persons) known
       for justice                                        2819   dl. they became entitled         츬 ¦
                                                                                                 ¢M  ÇÊ
2802   to be brought to Ka'ba    ¨¦ ð âó ¥
                                 	 àŠ ’ó¦Š 	¢         2820   dl. two (persons) nearest in kin   À ó ¢
                                                                                                    Ê ¢ŠÌÂÈ
2803   evil consequences, penalty         ¾ ¥Â
                                          È ¢È           2821   more likely, more suitable             ¢
                                                                                                     GÌ®È
2804   returned, repeated                  ®ß
                                           È ¢           2822   pv. will be refuted                  N Â
                                                                                                      ® «
2805   traveler, seafarer                ¨° Ç
                                         Æ È ¢           Ruku'     14      v: 8      4          ¸ï°

2806   hunting on land                ’ó¦ 
                                     ¦ ¾ Ï              2823   what, how                            ¯÷
                                                                                                     ¦È ¢
2807   the sacred /           ¿ ¸ ª ¦
                              É ¦  ’ó¦ ’ó¦          2824   pv. you were replied,               ¬ ³¢
                                                                                                   ö¦Ž É
       inviolable house                                          the response you received
 Ruku'     13        v: 7    3          ¸ï°              2825   cradle                              ¾÷
                                                                                                     




                                                                                                   129
 Surah 6: Al-An'aam                                        130                                       Part: 7

2826   maturity                                 ï
                                                † Š             2840   fixed term,              øÈ÷ ò³¢
                                                                                                
   ˆ  È
2827   clay                                      ú ×
                                                  	                   appointed time
                                                                 2841   you doubt                     À Â
                                                                                                      È ÌÂ ¬ø«
2828   the likeness of                         ¨  ï
                                               	 Š Š
                                                                 2842   ap. those who turn away      ú 	 Ž ÷
                                                                                                      ÓÂà
2829   you breath into                          ºè
                                                 Œ ü«
                                                                 2843   soon, in time                   Ȃ
                                                                                                        È 
2830   you heal                                 ¥Ž «
                                                É Â¦
                                                                 2844   tidings, news                       ¦¢
                                                                                                          É –ûÈ
2831   born blind, blind since birth            þø ¢
                                                  ’ïÈ
                                                                 2845   time, age, era, generation            ë
                                                                                                           ÀŠ
2832   leper, leprosy patient                  ´Â ¢
                                               È  ¥È
                                                                 2846   we had established,                üð÷
                                                                                                          ¢M 
2833   I restrained                           ª ŠŠ
                                               ’èèï                    we gave place

2834   table spread with food                  ¨ Ÿ÷
                                               Æ ¾	–            2847   established, placed              úð÷
                                                                                                         M
                                                                 2848   rain in abundance               °° ÷
                                                                                                       ¦Å ¦È ¾	
 7th Part         1/4          ¦ øÇ¦È ÊÈ  Ä Þ¥°
                                  à	  ¯¤Â ³
                                                                 2849   streams, rivers                  Æ ¢ ûÈ
                                                                                                         ° ¢
 Ruku'        15        v: 7       5           ¸ï°
                                                                 2850   sins                           § û¯
                                                                                                       Æ É
2835   I did not speak / say                  ªë÷
                                               ’ôŒ ¢
                                                                 2851   we raised                       û Ì¢
                                                                                                       ¢’˜ ûÈ
2836   while I dwelt,                        ª ®÷
                                              ÷É ¢
       so long as I stayed                                       2852   parchment, paper              ²× ë
                                                                                                      Æ ¢Š Â	
2837   observer, watcher                       ¤ ë°
                                                	 È            2853   touched, felt                    Æøó
                                                                                                          Š
2838   triumph, achievement                       Æ Š
                                                  ±ç             2854   angel                            îô÷
                                                                                                          Š
 Ruku'        16        v: 5       6           ¸ï°                     (pl.:   ¨ðŸ ÷
                                                                                ˆ Š 	
 )
            ^¿¢àûŠ˜’ó¦É È°
                           ¨ Ç          `
                                                                 2855   we have confused /                ü ¦ó
                                                                                                         ¢ÈŠ
                                                                        obscured / confounded
                  The Cattle                                     2856   they confuse (themselves),   À Ȏ
                                                                                                     È  ¦’ô
       Surah 6: Al-An'aam
                                                                        they obscure

2839   they hold (others as) equal,          À ó	
                                             È Œ¾à          2857   surrounded, overwhelmed           ¼·
                                                                                                          È ¢
       they ascribe rivals                                       2858   they scoffed                     Â	 
                                                                                                      ¦Ì ¼Ç




                                                                                                         130
 Surah 6: Al-An'aam                                  131                                          Part: 7

2859   scoffed, mocked                  ¼Ç
                                        	                       make believe
                                                           2878   will not be                       ð« ó
                                                                                                  úŒ öŠ
 Ruku'      1     v: 10         7      ¸ï°
2860   im. pl. travel, go about          ÂÇ
                                      ¦Ì 	             2879   their excuse / contention             ¬ 	
                                                                                                    ö ü¬ç
2861   end, consequence                 ˆ 	 ¢
                                        ¨¦ë ß              2880   By Allah (oath of Allah)             …Â
                                                                                                       Ê ¦È
2862   ap. rejecters, beliers       ú ÀŠ ÷
                                     ¥ŽO ð              2881   we were not                         üï ÷
                                                                                                     ¢Œ ¢
2863   unto whom, whose                     øó
                                          ú 	            2882   listens                          Þ	 
                                                                                                    ø¬È
2864   dwelt, rested                   úðÇ
                                       Š                 2883   veils, (covers)                      ˆ 	 È
                                                                                                       ¨üï¢
2865   ap. originator, maker             Â× ç
                                          	 ¢Š            2884   to understand                         þç
                                                                                                         ’ì	
2866   feeds                            ö	
                                         à’Ø            2885   heaviness, deafness                  ÂÂ
                                                                                                      ¦ ’ëÈ
2867   pv. is not fed               ö ó
                                     à’Ø¢Š             2886   they argue / dispute           À ó® ´
                                                                                                 È ŒÊ ¢ 
2868   pv. I am commanded /            © ÷¢
                                       É Â	 É             2887   fables, tales, stories              × Ç¢
                                                                                                   Â	 ¢ È
       ordered                                             2888   old peoples, ancients              ú óM ¢
                                                                                                      	ÂÈ
2869   pv. is averted / spared       »Â 
                                     É  Ð               2889   they forbid / prohibit (others)   À
                                                                                                    È  ü
2870   that day                        À ÷ 
                                       
 	              2890   they avoid / keep off (themselves)      À 
                                                                                                          È Šü
2871   ap. reliever, remover          	 ¢Š
                                     æË ï                  2891   pv. they are made to stand            è	 Â
                                                                                                     ¦Œ ëÉ
2872   omnipotent,                       Âÿ ë
                                          	 ¢Š            2892   may it be that we!,                 ü¬ ó 
                                                                                                     ¢Š¢
       irresistibly supreme
                                                                  would that we!
2873   over, above                       ¼ç
                                         È Š             2893   pv. we are to be                      ® û
                                                                                                        N Â
2874   what thing                            Ģ
                                             KÈ                   returned / sent back

 Ruku'      2     v: 10         8      ¸ï°                2894   we would be                        È Œ û
                                                                                                     Àð
2875   invented, fabricated              ¬¦
                                      à Â’çÊ
                                         ¦
                                                           2895   became clear, manifest,               ¦ 
                                                                                                         ¾¥
2876   where                                 ú¢
                                              È                (present tense:      ¾
                                                                                     ÌÂ ¦)
2877   im. you assert /             À øß
                                    È   Ä«           2896   they surely would revert,            ® àó
                                                                                                    ¦ÌÂÉ ¢ Š
                                                                  they will commit the same




                                                                                                     131
 Surah 6: Al-An'aam                                    132                                          Part: 7

2897   pp. those who will               ú ¯ à 
                                         	 ¦÷           2916   flies                               ÂØ
                                                                                                         	 
       be raised again
                                                             2917   its two wings                   þ · ü³
                                                                                                    	  ¢
2898   is it not                            Æ ó¢
                                             ŠÈ
                                           ¸ï°
                                                             2918   peoples, nations, communities        ö÷¢
                                                                                                          É
 Ruku'      3      v: 10        9

2899   the hour of final judgment           ¨ß Ç
                                            ˆ  ¢                  (sr.:       ¨÷¢
                                                                                ˆ  É)
2900   suddenly                               ˆ ä
                                              ¨¬ ¥           2919   whom Allah wills /           … œÌ ÷
                                                                                                 É ¦Ž ú
                                                                    wishes
2901   alas for us! woe unto us!        ü«Â · 
                                       ¢ È ¢           2920   him only, unto him alone              Á ¤
                                                                                                          É ¢Ê
2902   we committed mistakes                ü Âç
                                           ¢’× Š           2921   removes, relieves               æ	
                                                                                                     ̒ð
2903   they bear                        È Œ ø¸
                                        À ô	                  Ruku'         4       v: 11   10        ¸ï°
2904   burdens (sr.:       °
                           Æ Ì±ÊÂ)         Æ ¦È ÌÂÈ
                                           °± ¢              2922   they might                   À ß 
                                                                                                 È   Ô¬
2905   pl. backs                           ° Û
                                           Æ  Œ                  become humble
                                                             2923   why not                              ó ó
                                                                                                        ¢ŠŠ
2906   which they bear                 È °Ä ÷
                                       ÀÌÂÉ Ž ¢
                                                             2924   our disaster, our misfortune        üÇ ¥
                                                                                                       ¢ ’˜
2907   sport, pastime                         ó
                                               Š
                                                             2925   pv. made fair, made alluring         ú±
                                                                                                          É
2908   they flout / deny              À ¾
                                      È ÌÂ ¸´
                                                             2926   they forgot                           È
                                                                                                       ¦ û
2909   hard, grievous                          ¦Š
                                              Â ï
                                                             2927   pv. what they                    Âï¯ ÷
                                                                                                  ¦Ì O É ¢
2910   you are able to,                ª ج ¦
                                        àŠ ÇÊ                   were reminded
       you could
                                                             2928   they rejoiced                        ·Ž Š
                                                                                                      ¦ Âç
2911   you seek                               ä¬ «
                                            	 ¦
                                                             2929   those in despair,              À È	 ÷
                                                                                                   È  ô¦
2912   tunnel                                  ìèû
                                              ¢† Š                 dumb founded

2913   ladder                                øôÇ
                                            ¢ M            2930   was cut off                         	ë
                                                                                                        Þ،
 7th Part     1/2            à	  ¯¤Â ³
                           ¦ øÇ¦È ÊÈ  Ä æÐû            2931   roots, remnants, last parts         Â¥ ®
                                                                                                         Ž¦È
2914   animal                                ˆ ¡È
                                             ¨¥ ®            2932   they turn away / aside         À ç	
                                                                                                   È Œ ¾Ð
2915   flying creature                      Ÿ ×
                                             	–Š            2933   treasures of Allah           … ú Ä»
                                                                                                 Ê ¦ Ÿ	¡ 




                                                                                                       132
 Surah 6: Al-An'aam                                 133                                           Part: 7

2934   I don't know /                  öŠ ¢ ó
                                        ôßÈ¢Š                 judges

       have no knowledge
                                                          2952   key                                ¬¬ ÷
                                                                                                    Æ ¢’è	
2935   unseen                            ¤ ã
                                          Š             2953   pl. keys                           ¶« è÷
                                                                                                     	¢Š 
2936   I do not say                   ¾ ë¢ ó
                                      É Œ È¢Š          2954   does not fall / drop          Öì ÷
                                                                                               Œ Œ È«¢
2937   are (they) equal?            ¬ ÿ
                                  ÌĎ È’ò           2955   leaf, paper money                    þë°Â
                                                                                                       ŠÈ È
2938   blind                                 ¢
                                         øßÈ            2956   wet, fresh                          ’×È
                                                                                                    ¤ °
2939   one who sees                       Х
                                          	           2957   dry (sear)                          ƥ 
                                                                                                      Ž¢
 Ruku'      5     v: 9       11         ¸ï°              2958   you gained / committed           ö· 
                                                                                                    ¬ ³
2940   im. warn                           Ì°	 ûÈ
                                            À¢             Ruku'       7      v: 5      13          ¸ï°
2941   im. do not repel / drive away    Â ó
                                      Ì® ’Ø«¢Š         2959   guardian, caretaker                þÜè·
                                                                                                    Š Š 
2942   morning                          ¨ ã
                                        Æ Â ¾Š
                                           ¦

                                                          2960   they do not neglect /        È Œ  Š ¢Š
                                                                                              À ×Âè ó
2943   evening                           	 
                                         Ìß                     overlook
                                                          2961   more swift, quicker                ¸Â ¢
                                                                                                    É  ÇÈ
2944   his countenance / face           þ Â
                                          ³È
                                                          2962   humbly, in humility                ßÂÔ«
                                                                                                   ¢   
2945   not on you, you are            î ôß ÷
                                       Š  ¢
       not accountable / answerable
                                                          2963   secretly                            ¨ »
                                                                                                     † ’è
2946   we tried / tested                    ü¬ç
                                           ¢Š           2964   affliction, distress, pain         Æ Š
                                                                                                    §ï
2947   become clear / manifest /       ú ¦¬ «
                                        ŽÈ           2965   covers, confounds                   Ǝ
                                                                                                      ¦’ô
       plain
                                        ¸ï°
                                                          2966   faction                              à
                                                                                                     ¢ 	Ë
 Ruku'      6     v: 5       12

2948   pv. I am forbidden               ª û
                                         Ž             2967   will make you taste                  êÀ
                                                                                                       	 
2949   you hasten /               À ôŽ 
                                  È Œ ´à¬È«          2968   I am not                           ª
                                                                                                     ÈóŠ
       are impatient                                      2969   they plunge into              À Ó ¼
                                                                                               È   
2950   no judgment,               ö ¸ À¤
                                   ’ð ’ó¦Ê Ê                 discussion, meddle, wrangle
       no decision                                        2970   if, whenever                             ÷¤
                                                                                                         ¢ Ê
2951   best of deciders /    ú ôÏ Â »
                              	 	 ¢Šè’ó¦ 




                                                                                                     133
 Surah 6: Al-An'aam                                   134                                                Part: 7

2971   cause you to forget              îüÈ
                                         Ê ü          2989   companions, friends                    ¸ ¢
                                                                                                        §¢ ÏÈ
2972   ni. do not sit                      à« ó
                                         ¾ ’좊         2990   im. come to us                                 ü¬ ¦
                                                                                                                 ¢	’ŸÊ
2973   after remembrance /      à ’ïÀó¦ à
                                   ¦

                                     O ¾¥                   2991   be                                            úŒ
                                                                                                                   ï
       recollection                                         2992   so it becomes /                         À ðç
                                                                                                           È Œ Š
2974   im. forsake, leave                        ¯
                                               Ì°È                 shall become
                                                                                                                  

2975   fg. beguiled, deceived                Âã
                                           Ì© Š             7th Part      3/4        	  ¦È ÊÈ
                                                                                     ¦àøÇ ¯¤Â        Ä ¸¢¥°¦
                                                                                                       ³         ¨¯       ¯




2976   pv. may get caught /            Š « ¢
                                       òȦÌÀÈ            2993   pv. be blown                              ºŠ
                                                                                                              èü
                                                                                                             °Ï
                                                                                                             Æ 
       destroyed
                                                            2994   trumpet (of resurrection)
2977   intercessor                         Þ èË
                                            	 
                                                                   name of the father                            °±
                                                                                                                 ÈÈ ¦         ¦




                                                                                           :
                                                            2995
2978   fg. compensate, offer ransom /        ¾«
                                           ̾	 à                 of Prophet Ibrahim
                                                                                                            ÷ü ¢
                                                                                                           ¢ ¢ÏÈ
       equal amount
                                                            2996   idols
2979   full of every                   ¾ ß òï
                                       Ç ¾ M Œ
       compensation, reparation                             2997   I see thee                                ½ °¢
                                                                                                             È ¦È È
2980   pv. be given to ruin /               ôÈ ¢
                                         ¦Œ Ê ¥É         2998   we show                                         Žû
                                                                                                                 ÌÄÂ
       perdition
                                                                                                         © ðŠ 
                                                                                                         È Œ ô÷
                                         § ÂË
                                         Æ ¦ 
                                                            2999   kingdom, governance,
2981   drink
                                                                   dominion
2982   boiling water                        	 
                                           ö ø·            3000   covered, overshadowed                         ú³
                                                                                                                 
2983   painful                               ö ó¢
                                              	È          3001   saw                                                ¦È
                                                                                                                      ¦

                                                                                                                       °
                                          ¸ï°
 Ruku'      8      v: 10      14
                                                            3002   star                                     ¦ï ï
                                                                                                           ¢Š Š
       shall we call upon / invoke          ß ¢
                                         ¦ ¾ûÈ
                                                                                                                 òç¢
                                                                                                                 Š ŠÈ
2984
                                                            3003   set
       pv. we may be turned back              N Â
                                              ® û
                                                                                                            ú ôç
                                                                                                             	 	 ¦
2985                                                                                                                          ¦

                                                            3004   ap. things that set or go down
       heels                                ì¢
                                         ̧¢Š ßÈ
                                                                                                                  Š
                                                                                                                 Âøë
2986
                                                            3005   mg. moon
       beguiled / fooled him            þ ¬ ¦
                                         « ÇÊ
                                                                                                              ã± ¥
                                                                                                             ¢† Ê ¢
2987
                                                            3006   uprising, rising (in splendour)
       bewildered, perplexed                ·
                                          À¦ 
                                                                                                            ø
                                                                                                           ÆË
2988
                                                            3007   fg. sun




                                                                                                            134
 Surah 6: Al-An'aam                                     135                                          Part: 7

3008   I turned (my face),             ª ³Â
                                         È                 3025   pl. agonies                        Âøã
                                                                                                     Ì©¦  Š
       I have set (my face)
                                                              3026   ap. those who stretch /                Ø	 ¥
                                                                                                         ¦Œ Ç¢
3009   upright                                è ü·
                                             ¢† Ž                  spread
3010   dl. two factions / parties          ú ì Âç
                                           Ž Š Ž Š         3027   disgrace, torment                      Àÿ
                                                                                                            Æ 
3011   more right, more worthy                ê·¢
                                              È             3028   you have come to us              û ø¬ Ž
                                                                                                     ¢ ’ ³
3012   safety, security                         ÷È
                                               ú¢             3029   alone, single                       à ®¦ Œ
                                                                                                            ¦

                                                                                                             Âç
3013   did not obscure/ mix/           Ȏ ó
                                    ¦ ¦’ôöŠ            3030   first time                     ¨Â÷ ¾Â¢
                                                                                                    Ç   È M È
       confound
 Ruku'      9       v: 13     15            ¸ï°              3031   we bestowed / granted                 ¢’ó
                                                                                                            ü»
3014   they associated /                 ï
                                      ¦Œ ÂËÈ¢              3032   you claimed /             ¿ ¸ ±   öø È
                                                                                                            ¬ ß±
       set up partners                                               asserted

3015   we entrusted                          ü ïÂ
                                            ¢’ôM È
                                                                                                          ¸ï°
3016   im. follow                              ¾¬ ¦
                                             ÌÁ	 ’ëÊ          Ruku'         11      v: 4   17

 Ruku'     10       v: 8      16            ¸ï°              3033   ap. one who splits / cleaves                	¢Š
                                                                                                                êó ç
                                         °¾ë ÷
                                      ¦ÌÂÉ  Š ¢                                                            ü
                                                                                                          Ã ó¦
                                                                                                                ¦

3017   they did not attach proper                             3034   date-stone, fruit kernel
       value or esteem, they estimated
                                                              3035   pl. daybreak, dawn                  Æ ¢ÏÊ
                                                                                                         ¬¦ ¤
3018   parchments, papers                × Âë
                                      Æ	 ¦ Š
                                                              3036   stillness, rest, repose                üðÇ
                                                                                                           ¢Š 
3019   vain discourse, idle talk           µ»
                                           Æ 
                                                              3037   reckoning, computing time            û¦ ·
                                                                                                         ¢¢È
3020   ap. that which confirms         Æ  
                                       ¼¾Ð÷
                                                              3038   measure, disposition                     ¾«
                                                                                                           Â	 ’ì
3021   before it                       ¾ ú ¥
                                     ÌÄ  
                                                              3039   stars                                 Æ  
                                                                                                           ¿ ´û
3022   you warn                                 	 «
                                              Ì°Àü
                                                                     (sr.:        ö û
                                                                                   ´)
                                       ì ¿¢
                                    à Œ ’ó¦N É
                                       ¦

3023   mother of villages,
       Makkah
                                                              3040   produced, brought into being           ˜Ì ¢
                                                                                                            Š ûÈ
3024   around                                ¾·
                                             È             3041   habitation, time limit               Š ÷
                                                                                                          Âì¬È




                                                                                                           135
 Surah 6: Al-An'aam                                     136                                          Part: 7

3042    repository, resting place    ¸®  ÷
                                     Æ È ¬È               3060   daughters                          Æ ¢
                                                                                                        © ü¥
        (after death)
                                                              3061   highly / sublimely exalted            à«
                                                                                                         D¢ 
3043    vegetation                        Æ ¢
                                          © ¦û
                                                              3062   about what                            øß
                                                                                                          ¢ 
3044    green stock                      ÂÔ»
                                        ¦ 	 
                                                              3063   they attribute /      » ´ Â    À è	
                                                                                                     È Œ Ð
3045    grain, corn                             ¦·
                                               ¢
                   ascribe
        (pl.:    Æ  )
                 § ¦·                                          Ruku'       12      v: 6    18          ¸ï°

3046    thick clustered,                ï Â ÷
                                     ¢¦	 ¦ ¬               3064   Originator                          Þ ¾¥
                                                                                                          	 
        closely growing                                       3065   how                                    û¢
                                                                                                           È
3047    date-palm                         ò û
                                          ˆ ¼               3066   has no, there is no               ð« ó
                                                                                                     úŒ öŠ
3048    spathe, sheaths, pollen            Þ×
                                            ’ôŠ              3067   consort, spouse                  ¨¦· Ï
                                                                                                      ˆ 	 ¢
3049    bunches, clusters                Àë
                                         Æ ¦ ü	
                                                                                                         ðó
                                                                                                       öŒ 	 ¯
                                                                                                             ¦

                                                              3068   that is, such is
3050    pendant, hanging low              ¨û ®
                                          ˆ Ž¦È
        and near
                                                              3069   caretaker, guardian                ˆ 	 È
                                                                                                        ò ïÂ
3051    grapes                          Æ ¢ßÈ
                                        §ü ¢                  3070   cannot comprehend /             ½Ê « ó
                                                                                                     É °¾¢Š
                          û ¬ ±
                         ¨È )       À ¬±
                                         Æ È
                                                                     grasp
3051a   olives (sr.
                                                              3071   vn. to comprehend / grasp           °¦
                                                                                                       ½¦È Ì®Ê
3052    pomegranate                       À ÷°
                                          Æ ¢ É
                                                              3072   pl. vision, sight                 Æ ¢ ¥È
                                                                                                       °Ð¢
3053    alike, similar                     Ž ÷
                                        ¢ ¦¬Ì
                                                              3073   subtle                            æ Øó
                                                                                                        	 Š
3054    fruits                               Š
                                            Âø¯
                                                              3074   you have studied                 ª °®
                                                                                                       ÇÈ È
3055    bore fruits, came to fruition      Âø ¢
                                             ’¯È
                                                              3075   im. turn away, turn back           ¢
                                                                                                      ̵Ž ßÈ
3056    its ripening                        à
                                           þ	 ü
                                           ¦

                                                              3076   ni. pl. revile not,                ¦È« ó
                                                                                                     ¦ ¢Š
3057    ripen, to ripe                         Þ
                                                ü                do not abuse

3058    they invented / ascribed           ë 
                                        ¦Œ »               3077   what will make               ïÂ	 ÷
                                                                                                öŒ  àÌ¢
                                                                     you realise
3059    sons                               ú ü¥
                                            Ž              3078   we will overturn / turn aside      ¤ôŠ û
                                                                                                         O ì




                                                                                                        136
 Surah 6: Al-An'aam                                       137                                          Part: 8

3079   hearts                                  ¨¾  ¢
                                               Æ  	’çÈ         3098   justice, justly                    † ¾
                                                                                                           ß
3080   first time                         ¨Â÷ ¾Â¢
                                          Ç   È M È          3099   ap. one who changes                ¾¾¦÷
                                                                                                          È  
3081   contumacy, trespass                   À ×
                                             Æ ¢äŒ            3100   they guess / conjure          À ÏÂ
                                                                                                     È   ¼
3082   they are wandering                 À ø
                                          È   à          3101   pv. was mentioned /                 Âï¯
                                                                                                           	 É
 Ruku'     13       v: 10        19           ¸ï°                     pronounced
                                                                3102   explained fully / in detail        òÐç
                                                                                                          Š Š
 ^ Part:8                        û              ³
                              ¢üÈ¢ŠóÈÂ Ä `
                                                                3103   they inspire / whisper unto      À·
                                                                                                        È  
                                                                                              1         ¸ï°
3083   before, face to face                      † Œ
                                                 ¦ë             Ruku'         14   v: 11


3084   they ignore / are ignorant         Àô
                                          È Œ  ´          3104   walks                               Ì
                                                                                                         	 ø
3085   enemy         (pl.:   Æ ¦ ßÈ)
                              ¾ ¢               ¾
                                               ¦  ß           3105   great ones, leaders                 Ž¢Š È
                                                                                                          Â¥ ï¢
3086   guilded, flowery                     Æ  »É
                                            »Â ±                3106   wicked ones / evil doers            	Ž ÷
                                                                                                      ¢ ÷´
                                                                       of that (place)
3087   delusion, deception, guile             ° Âã
                                             ¦Å Ì Œ           3107   pv. we are given                        û
                                                                                                           «
3088   pl. leave                                    ¯
                                                  Ì°È           3108   knows better                        öŠ ¢
                                                                                                            ôßÈ
3089   incline                                   «
                                             äÐ              3109   humiliation, abasement             ° äÏ
                                                                                                          Æ ¢ 
3090   they earn / do                          çŽ 
                                            ¦Œ ¬’ì         3110   expands, opens                      Â
                                                                                                         ̬ Ì
3091   ap. earners                        À çŽ  ÷
                                          È Œ ¬’ì           3111   bosom, breast                      ° Ï
                                                                                                          Æ ¾
3092   I seek, I desire                          ä¬ ¢
                                               	 ¥È         3112   narrow, close                       ìÓ
                                                                                                          ¢† 
3093   judge                                  øð·
                                             ¢ Š              3113   strait, constricted                ³Â·
                                                                                                         ¢  
3094   fully explained, in detail           †  Š
                                            Ðè÷                3114   as if                               øû˜ï
                                                                                                          ¢ ŠŠ
3095   perfected, fulfilled                      ø«
                                               ª             3115   ascends, climbs                   ¾àÐ
                                                                                                            
3096   word                                    ˆ  	Š
                                               ¨øôï             3116   ignominy, abomination             Æ °
                                                                                                          ³Ê
3097   truly, in truth                         ë Ï
                                              ¢† ¾	            3117   abode / home of peace       ¿ ôÈ ° ®
                                                                                                   Ê ¢Š  ó¦É ¦È




                                                                                                          137
 Surah 6: Al-An'aam                                  138                                         Part: 8

3118   O! assembly                     ÂÌ ÷ 
                                         à ¢          3137   foolishly                             èÇ
                                                                                                     ¢ Š 
3119   made use, enjoyed               Þ¬ ¬ ¦
                                        øÇÊ            Ruku'      16      v: 11    3           ¸ï°

3120   we reached / arrived                 ü ô¥
                                           ¢äŠ 
                                                            8th Part      1/4           ¢ÈŠÈ  Ä Þ¥°
                                                                                         ü û¢ ó Â ³
3121   you appointed                     ª ³¢
                                          ’ô È
3122   abode, home, dwelling place            ÷
                                         à ’°
                                            ¦
                                                           3138   trellises, plants           Ç ¢ ÌÂ à÷
                                                                                              ©Ë Â 
                                                                  supported by a structure of light
 Ruku'         15   v: 8       2         ¸ï°                     bars

3123   comes unto you                      ð«
                                         öŒ 	’˜         3139   harvesting                       ® з
                                                                                                   Ç ¢ 
3124   they recount / relate           À Ðì
                                       È  Œ           3140   cattle used for loading,         ¨ó ø
                                                                                                   † Š ·
                                                                  burden,
3125   we testified / witnessed          û Ë
                                        ¢¾Ž             3141   small cattle (like goats,           Ëç
                                                                                                     ¢ Š
3126   ap. destroyer                     îô ÷
                                          	                    sheep etc.)

3127   merciful, of mercy          ¨ø Â ¯
                                   	  · ó¦ÌÂÉ          3142   eight                             ¨û ø¯
                                                                                                    ˆ Ž¢ Š
3128   causes something to            ô ¬
                                    æ	 ¼È            3143   pairs                            Æ ¦È ̱È
                                                                                                   «Â ¢
       follow after, appoints successor                    3144   sheep                              ÀÓ
                                                                                                     Æ ’˜
                                           ©ó
                                           Ç ¢Š
                                                ¦

3129   sure to come
                                                           3145   goats                                Ä÷
                                                                                                        à
3130   reaches                            ò	
                                          Œ Ð            3146   dl. two males                   ú Âï¯
                                                                                                  Ž  Š È
3131   they ruin / destroy                  ® 
                                          ÌÂÉ Â          3147   dl. two females                   ú ° ¦
                                                                                                    Ž ŠûÉ
3132   they cause confusion                Ȏ
                                        ¦ ¦’ô         3148   contained                       ôø¬ ¦
                                                                                                ªŠ  ËÊ
3133   vn. forbidden                      Â ·
                                           ´	            3149   wombs                               ·¢
                                                                                                    ¿¢ Ì°È
3134   vn. forging, fabrication          Æ ¡ 	’çÊ
                                           ¬ ¦            3150   camel, camels                        ò¥¤
                                                                                                       ˆ ŽÊ
3135   males, men                        Æ Œ É
                                         ° ï¯               Ruku'      17        v: 4   4           ¸ï°

       (sr.:    Š È)
                Âï¯                                        3151   I don't find                     ¾Ž ¢ ó
                                                                                                    ³È¢Š
3136   vn. to attribute                 æ Â
                                         ÏÈ              3152   pp. forbidden, prohibited         ÷¸÷
                                                                                                   ¢   




                                                                                                    138
 Surah 6: Al-An'aam                                      139                                       Part: 8

3153   ap. on an eater                 öß × ß
                                       ‰ 	 ¢Š ô             3171a vn. measure                        ˆ Š
                                                                                                        ò ï
3154   blood                                      ÷®
                                                 ¢ È          3172   weight, balance                 ÀÄ÷
                                                                                                      Æ ¦ 	
3155   pp. poured forth, running           ·è 
                                          ¢ Œ È÷           3173   justice, equity                 ˆ È	
                                                                                                      Ö ë
3156   animals with claws,               ‰ èÛ ¯
                                         Œ Œ ÌÃÊ              Ruku'     19      v: 4      6        ¸ï°
       undivided hoof                                          3174   lest you (should) say         ó ì ¢
                                                                                                 ¦ŒŒ «ÌÀÈ
3157   sheep, goats                             öüã
                                                 Š           3175   vn. teachings,                 ˆ  ¦È Ê
                                                                                                     ¨Ç °®
3158   pl. tallow, fat                      Æ  
                                            ¿ ¸Ë                      assiduous study

                                                                                                          ¢
                                                                                                     Ã ¾ÿÈ
                                                                                                        ¦


3159   entrails                                 ·
                                              ¢¦            3176   better guided

3160   mixed up                             Öô¬ ¦
                                            Š Š »Ê           3177   greater wrong doer               öŠ ¢
                                                                                                        ô’ÛÈ
3161   bone                                    ö ß
                                                ’Ü           3178   turned away,                  »¾Ï
                                                                                                    È 
                                                                      kept off, shunned
                                             ¨àÇ Â
                                             ˆ  	 ¦È
                                                                                                  À ç	
                                                                                                  È Œ ¾Ð
3162   extensive, all embracing
                                                               3179   they turn away from /
3163   pl. you lie / guess              À ÏÂ
                                        È   ¼«                  keep off / shun

3164   final argument,             ¨ ¦ ¨´¸
                                   Œ äó	¢ó¦Œ   ’ó¦         3180   you are not                     ª ó
                                                                                                       Ȋ
       which reaches home                                      3181   good deed                      ¨üÈ·
                                                                                                     ˆ  
                                                öôÿ
                                                 Œ
                                                                                                  °¢Â 
                                                                                                ¾¢Š÷È Ìß
3165   bring forward
                                                               3182   ten-fold,
 Ruku'      18      v: 6       5             ¸ï°                     ten like thereof
                                                               3183   most right religion          øë ü ®
                                                                                                  ¢ 	 ¢Ê
3166   poverty, penury                          ô¤
                                              ¼¢Š ÷Ê
                                                               3184   sacrifice, rites                îÈû
                                                                                                       
3167   them also                                ÿ ¤
                                              ö ¢Ê
                                                               3185   my life                      Ä
                                                                                                   È ¢¸÷
3168   that what is apparent / open          Â Û÷
                                               Š ¢
                                                               3186   my death                         « ø÷
                                                                                                     	¢ 
3169   what is concealed / secret            úØ¥ ÷
                                              Š ¢
       / hidden                                                3187   will not bear                  °À« ó
                                                                                                     É 	 ¢Š
3170   maturity, (age of) full strength         ¾Ë¢
                                                 È           3188   bearer of burden                Æ È Ê ¦È
                                                                                                      ¨°± Â
3171   im. pl. give full, fulfil                 ç¢
                                              ¦Œ ÌÂÈ         3189   burden                            °Â
                                                                                                        Æ Ì±Ê




                                                                                                      139
 Surah 7: Al-A'raaf                                   140                                          Part: 8

3190   returning place                   Þ³ ÷
                                          Ž             3204   im. respite, reprieve                 Ü¢
                                                                                                       Â	 ûÈ
3191   successors, viceroys,           æŸ ô»
                                        	–Š               3205   pv. they will be raised          À °
                                                                                                    È Œà¦
       vicegerents                                                 (from the dead)
3192   swift in punishment /   § ìà Þ ÂÇ
                               Ê ¢Š 	 ’ó¦ Ž            3206   pp. those given respite,        úŽŠ ÷
                                                                                                    ÂÜü
       retribution / prosecution                                   those who are given reprieve
 Ruku'       20    v: 11       7         ¸ï°               3207   you seduced / sent astray          ’ãÈ
                                                                                                    ª ¢
 8th Part        1/2          ü û¢ ó Â ³
                             ¢ÈŠÈ  Ä æÐû            3208   I will surely lie /               M ¾ ’ëÈ
                                                                                                     À à ¢
                                                                   lurk in (ambush)

                            È Ç
             Ê»¦Âߊ˜’ó¦ ɨ° `
            ^                                              3209   right hands                        Æ ¢ È
                                                                                                      Àø¢
             The Heights                                    3210   left hands                        Ÿ øË
                                                                                                    ò	– 
       Surah 7: Al-A'raaf
                                                            3211   you will not find                ¾Ž ó
                                                                                                     ´«¢Š
3193   let there be no                    ð ó
                                        úŒ ¢Š           3212   pp. one who is degraded /        ÷   ÷
                                                                                                   ¢ É ’À
3194   our scourge / wrath                  üÇ ¥
                                           ¢ ’˜                 abject
                                                            3213   pp. one who is driven away       °· 
                                                                                                   ¦Å  ¾÷
3195   straitness, heaviness              «Â·
                                          Æ                      / banished

3196   at night                               « ¥
                                             ¢¢          3214   I will fill                        ú ô ¢
                                                                                                       ŠŠ ÷È
3197   ap. those taking rest at noon     Àôë
                                         È Œ Ÿ	¢Š         3215   pv. was hidden                    ÈÊ Â
                                                                                                     ðÌÂÉ
3198   that day                           À ÷ 
                                          
 	            3216   those parts of a body            É ¦
                                                                                                    © Ǧ




                                            Šì
                                          ªôŒ ¯Š
                                                                   which should be covered
3199   fg. became heavy
                                                            3217   swore                              öÇ ë
                                                                                                        ¢Š
3200   scales                           ú ± ÷
                                         Ê ¦ 
                                                            3218   caused (them) to (their) fall            ó®
                                                                                                           È
3201   fg. became light                     è»
                                          ªM 
                                                            3219   fg. became manifest                  ¾¥
                                                                                                      Ì© 
3202   means of livelihood              Ê à÷
                                         Ž¢ 
                                                            3220   dl. they cover              À èÐ
                                                                                               Ê ¢Š 	 ¼
 Ruku'       1     v: 10       8         ¸ï°
                                                                   (by heaping)
3203   pl. those degraded,            ú Âã Ï
                                       Ž 	 ¢            3221   leaves                              ¼°Â
                                                                                                       Æ ÈÈ
       meanest




                                                                                                      140
 Surah 7: Al-A'raaf                                          141                                               Part: 8

 Ruku'       2      v: 15       9              ¸ï°                3239   (fold and folds of )                    ³ ã
                                                                                                                  Æ ¦ Š
3222   adornment                                  Ì°
                                                 ¢ Ê                   coverings
                                                                   3240   we removed / stripped away                 ü Äû
                                                                                                                    ¢ß 
                                     ¬ ² ¦ó
                                à ’ìó¦É ¢	
                                      ¦

3223   garment of
       God-consciousness / righteousness                           3241   rancor, deep rooted hate                      Kã
                                                                                                                        ò	
3224   let (him) not                        ðü	 ó
                                          öŒ ü¬’袊           3242   pv. they will be called                     ®û
                                                                                                                   ¦ÌÂÉ 
       seduce you
                                                                    8th Part      3/4           ü û¢ ó Â ³
                                                                                               ¢ÈŠÈ  Ä ¸¢¥°¦¨¯
¯
3225   pulls off, strips off                     ¸Ä
                                                 É Ž ü
                                                                   3243   called out                                 ®û
                                                                                                                    ÃÈ ¢
                                                                                                                    ¦




3226   his tribe
                                                
                                                  ô ¦ë
                                                 þŒ ŽŠ
                                                                   3244   yes                                             àû
                                                                                                                        ö 
3227   im. pl. set up, establish                  ø ë¢
                                               ¦ 	 È
                                                                   3245   proclaimed, cried (called loudly)              À¯¢
                                                                                                                         È MÈ
3228   every act of worship           ¾´ ÷ òï
                                      
 Ž È O Œ
                                                                   3246   ap. one who proclaims /                  À¯ ÷
                                                                                                                   Æ O š
3229   pl. you (shall) return                È ®à
                                             ÀÌÂÉ  «                  cries (calls loudly)
 Ruku'       3      v: 6       10              ¸ï°                3247   crookedness                              ¢ 	
                                                                                                                    ³ ß
3230   they cannot put off,     À Â	  ó
                                È Ì »’˜¬È¢Š                  3248   veil                                    § ´·
                                                                                                                  Æ ¢ 	
       they can not cause any delay
3231   they can not advance         À ÷	  ó
                                    È  ¾’ì¬È¢Š              3249   heights, (elevated places               »Â ¢
                                                                                                                  Æ ¦ ßÈ
                                                                     separating paradise from hell. The
3232   they departed / strayed away                ôÓ
                                                ¦N                persons whose good deeds and evils
                                                                     are equal shall stay there for a certain
3233   its sister                                  ¬ ¢
                                                ¢ »É              time.)
                                                                          marks                                      ø Ç
                                                                                                                    ¢ 	
                                               ï° ®¦
                                            ¦Œ È ¦M Ê
                                                                   3250
3234   they followed on
       each another                                                3251   they hope                           À à
                                                                                                              È  ø’Ø
                                               ¸ï°
 Ruku'       4      v: 8       11
                                                                   3252   pv. fg. is turned                         ŠŽ Ï
                                                                                                                  ªçÂ
       pv. will not be opened                 ¶¬Š « ó
                                               袊
                                                                                                                     ì«
                                                                                                                    È –Š ’ô	
3235
                                                                   3253   meeting
3236   passes through, goes through                 ²ô
                                                     	           Ruku'        5      v: 8        12             ¸ï°
3237   camel                                    òø³
                                                ˆ                3254   did not avail / profit
                                                                                                              ¦

                                                                                                               ’ãÈ¢
                                                                                                                ü¢ ÷
3238   eye of a needle               ¶ ¼ öÇ
                                     Ê ¢	 ’ó¦                  3255   will not bestow /                       ¾ü ó
                                                                                                                  É ¢¢Š
                                                                          make it reach




                                                                                                                    141
 Surah 7: Al-A'raaf                                  142                                               Part: 8

3256   im. pl. pour down                    Ô ç¢
                                         ¦ 	 È         3277   vegetation                              Æ ¢
                                                                                                          © ¦û
3257   we (will) forget                        û
                                           Èü           3278   scanty                                    ¾ðû
                                                                                                           ¦ 	 
3258   are / is (there) for us?            üó ÿ
                                          ¢Š’ò           Ruku'         7        v: 5        14        ¸ï°

3259   pv. we are sent back                  ® û
                                             N Â          3279   messages                             © ó Ç°
                                                                                                       Ç ¢Š¢ Ê
 Ruku'      6      v: 6       13          ¸ï°                    (sr.:       ¨ó Ç°
                                                                              ˆ Š¢ Ê )
3260   six days / periods               ¿ ¢ ¨¬Ç
                                        Ç ¢ÈŠ 	         3280   I give you good advice /               ¶ ¢
                                                                                                          ÐûÈ
3261   covers                               Ì
                                          	 ä                counsel (vn.:            ¨¸ Ðû
                                                                                           ˆ  	 )
3262   seeks                              ¤ô
                                           Œ ’Ø         3281   pl. you wondered                        ¬ ´ß
                                                                                                        ö¦Ž 
3263   in haste, swiftly                    ° °·
                                           ¢†	           3282   blind folk, blind people             øß ÷ ë
                                                                                                    ú	  ¢ Š
3264   pl. made subservient          © ¼ ÷
                                     Ç ¦  È              Ruku'         8        v: 6        15        ¸ï°

3265   blessed                             ½° ¦«
                                           È È ¢         3283   people of 'Aad (towards whom                ß
                                                                                                           Æ®¢
                                                                  Prophet Hud X was sent
                                          ßÂÔ«
                                         ¢   
                                                                                                             ˜Š 
                                                                                                             Œô÷
3266   humbly, with humility
                                                           3284   chiefs, leaders
                                            ¨ »
                                            † ’è
                                                                                                         ¨ÿ èÇ
                                                                                                         ˆ  ¢Š 
3267   secretly
                                                           3285   folly, foolishness
                                            àø×
                                           ¢  Š
                                                                                                           úÜû
                                                                                                           Œ
3268   hope, longing
                                                           3286   we deem / think
                                           ¬ °
                                           È ¢Ê
                                                                                                          	 ¢
                                                                                                         ¶Ï û
3269   winds
                                                           3287   ap. advisor, counselor
                                            Â ¥
                                           ¦ Ì
                                                                                                            ®±
                                                                                                            È ¦È
3270   (heralding) glad-tidings
                                                           3288   increased
                                             ôë¢
                                           ªM Š È
                                                                                                         ¨Ø ¥
                                                                                                         † Š Ð
3271   fg. bore, carried
                                                           3289   vn. large growth
                                           ¥ ¸Ç
                                          ¢¢ 
                                                                                                              ó
                                                                                                             –Š ¦
3272   cloud                                                                                                    ¦

                                                           3290   bounties, benefits
                                             ì¯
                                            † ¢Š 	
                                                                                                            ÞëÂ
                                                                                                             ŠÈ
3273   heavy
                                                           3291   has fallen, has come upon
                                           Áü Ç
                                           É ¢’ì
                                                                                                         Æ °
                                                                                                          ³Ê
3274   we drive / lead it
                                                           3292   punishment, filth
                                       ª÷ ¾ô¥
                                       
  
 Š 
                                                                                          ö ¦
                                                                                           ÇÊ)         Æ ¢ ÇÈ
                                                                                                          ø ¢
3275   dead land
                                                           3293   names (sr.:
3276   good land                   ¤Ø ¾Š 
                                    M ó¦ ô¦’ó¦




                                                                                                          142
 Surah 7: Al-A'raaf                                     143                                           Part: 8

3294   pl. you named                       ø¬ øÇ
                                        ¦              3311   you promise                            ¾	
                                                                                                             à«
       (vn.:   ¨ø «
               ˆ 	 È)                                      3312   pp. messengers,                  ú 	  ÷
                                                                                                       ôÇÂ
3295   sr. root                               Â¥ ®
                                               Ž¦È                  those who are sent
                                                              3313   earthquake                          ¨è °
                                                                                                         ˆ Š ³È
 Ruku'         9       v: 8    16           ¸ï°
3296   a nation towards                         ø
                                             ® ¯Š          3314   ap. pl. prostrated               ú ø¯ ³
                                                                                                        	¢
                                                                     on the ground
       whom Prophet Saleh Xwas sent
                                                                     turned away                           ó «
                                                                                                          
                                               ¨ë û
                                               ˆ Š ¢
                                                              3315
3297   she-camel
                                                                     pl. you come / commit               À«
                                                                                                         È ’˜«
                                             òï
                                             Œ Œ ’˜«
                                                              3316
3298   fg. eats / may eat
                                                                     never did before, none had       ê¦Ç ÷
                                                                                                        ¢
                                                ¢¥
                                                È 
                                                              3317
3299   gave station / habitation
                                                                     preceded
3300   vn. plain and soft (land)           Æ  
                                           ¾ Ç                3318   anyone                          ¾·¢ ÷
                                                                                                     
  Èú	
3301   castles, palaces                    ° Ðë
                                           Æ  Œ            3319   people                               Æ ¢É
                                                                                                          ² û¢
       (sr.:        Њ )
                   Â ë                                        3320   they seek to keep              À  ج
                                                                                                    È ÌÂ  Š 
3302   pl. you hew / carve out            À ¬	
                                          È ¸ü«                 pure and clean
                                                              3321   those who stayed behind,          ú Â¥ ã
                                                                                                        Ž Ž¢Š
3303   mountains (sr.:        ò¦³
                              ˆ  )        ¾ ¦³
                                            É ¢Ž                    lagged behind
3304   dwellings, houses (sr.:         ª ¥ © ¥
                                        )Æ             3322   we rained / showered                ûØ¢
                                                                                                        ¢Š ÷È
3305   ni. pl. do not act wickedly           °« ó
                                          ¦Šà¢Š          3323   rain                                  ÂØ÷
                                                                                                           Š 
3306   pv. were kept weak,                è	 ¬ ¦
                                       ¦Œ àÔÇÉ            Ruku'        10   v: 12     17            ¸ï°
       reckoned powerless                                     3324   a place where                        ú ÷
                                                                                                           ¾
3307   pp. one who is sent,                òÇ ÷
                                           ˆ  Â                   Prophet Sho'aib X was sent
       messenger                                              3325   ni. pl. don't deprive /          È ó
                                                                                                   ¦ ¼¦«¢Š
3308   they ham-strung /                      Š 
                                           ¦Ì ìß                   withold
       cut the legs                                           3326   things, goods                         ¢
                                                                                                         È ¢ËÈ
       they insolently defied / flouted          §
                                              ¦
                                                                                                       ¾à ó
                                                                                                    ¦Ì  ’ì«¢Š
3309
                                                              3327   ni. pl. lurk not, squat not
3310   im. bring to us                      ü¬ ¦
                                       §¢	’ŸÊ




                                                                                                         143
 Surah 7: Al-A'raaf                                        144                                           Part: 9

3328   pl. you threaten                  À ¾	  «
                                         È ÌÂ ß               3345   drew forth, drew out                 ¸Äû
                                                                                                             È 
3329   pl. you hinder                     À ¾Ð«
                                          È ÌÂ                3346   white                              Ô¥
                                                                                                          É ¢ 
3330   gave (you) increase                      塕
                                                 MŠ              Ruku'        13    v: 9        3         ¸ï°
                                                                 3347   what                                  ¯÷
                                                                                                             ¦È ¢
 ^ Part:9                                      ³
                        Œ˜Šôø’ó¦Ⱦ¢ŠëÈÂ Ä `
                                                                 3348   im. put off (a while),                ³¢
                                                                                                            þŽ Ì°È
                                                                        let (him) wait a while
       you shall (have to) return          À® à
                                           M É  ¬óŠ
                                                                                                           Ÿ ¾÷
                                                                                                          ú	¦ 
3331
                                                                 3349   cities
       ap. those who hate / detest        ú ÿ° ï
                                            Ê ¢Š
                                                                                                        ú ÂË ·
                                                                                                        Ž 	 ¢
3332
                                                                 3350   ap. those who        ° ³ ¬

3333   we invented / forged                  ü ¬ ¦
                                            ¢ ’çÊ                  collect / summon / call

3334   we returned                              û ß
                                               ¢¾             3351   magician, wizard, sorcerer         · Ç
                                                                                                            	 ¢
3335   had never dwelt / lived              ü ó
                                         ¦äöŠ            3352   knowing, well versed                 	 
                                                                                                            ö ôß
3336   I feel sorrow / lament                 Ç ¦     ¦
                                                                 3353   magicians, wizards                ¨Â¸Ç
                                                                                                          Æ  
 Ruku'     11        v: 9       1            ¸ï°                3354   either, or                             ¢ Ê
                                                                                                                ÷¤
3337   they grew and multiplied                  èß
                                              ¦Š              3355   that                                     ¢
                                                                                                               ÌÀÈ
3338   felt / became secure                     ú÷¢
                                                 	È             3356   you throw                           	 «
                                                                                                             ì’ô
3339   ap. those who are sleeping          Àøû
                                           È  Ÿ	¢            3357   ap. those who throw                ú 	 ÷
                                                                                                            ì’ô
3340   daytime, broad daylight               ¸Ó
                                                              3358   im. pl. throw                          ì¢
                                                                                                            ¦Œ ’óÈ
3341   vn. scheme, contrivance,                Â ÷
                                                ’ð             3359   they enchanted / cast spell         Â 
                                                                                                         ¦Ì ¸Ç
       devising
 Ruku'     12        v: 6       2            ¸ï°                3360   eyes                                úßÈ
                                                                                                              ¢
3342   approved on condition that,           ê ì·
                                              	               3361   they terrified /                  ¦  ¦
                                                                                                       ¦ÿ¬ÇÊ
       one from whom it is right to (say)                               struck terror

3343   threw, cast                                 ¢
                                               ì’óÈ             3362   they produced, brought                ³
                                                                                                          ¦É ¢
3344   serpent                                 ¦¯
                                            ÆÀ¢àŒ              3363   im. throw                             ê¢
                                                                                                              Ž ’óÈ




                                                                                                           144
 Surah 7: Al-A'raaf                                    145                                             Part: 9

3364   swallows up                      æŠ
                                         ì’ô«              3381   famine, droughts                       ú üÇ
                                                                                                            Ž	
3365   they fake / feigned            À ð	
                                      È Œ 璘            3382   dearth, shortness                      Îû
                                                                                                           ‰ ’ì
3366   made (it) vain / vanish               òØ¥
                                             ŠŠ             3383   this is ours,                      ÁÀ üó
                                                                                                       Ê 	 ÿ¢Š
3367   pv. were defeated /                  ¦	 ã
                                         ¦ôŒ                     this is due to us

       vanquished, were overcome
                                                             3384   they ascribe /blame evil               ÂØ
                                                                                                        ¦Ì M 
3368   then and there                  îó üÿ
                                        	¢                       fortune on
                                                             3385   evil fortune                             	¢Š
                                                                                                            Ÿ ×
3369   pv. fell down                         ì ¢
                                              	 ’óÉ
                                                             3386   whatever, whatsoever                    ø÷
                                                                                                           ¢  
3370   I give you leave / permission         ÀÈ
                                             É ¯¦ ¦




                                                             3387   pl. locusts                           Æ ¦ 
                                                                                                          ® ³
3371   I will (surely) cut off         úàØë¢
                                         O ŠÉ
                                                             3388   pl. vermin, lice                        Š øë
                                                                                                            ò Œ
3372   I will (surely) crucify          O  É
                                       ú¦ôÏ¢
                                                             3389   pl. frogs                          ¸® èÓ
                                                                                                       È Ê ¢Š 
3373   ap. those who go back /       À ¦	 Š ÷
                                     È ôìü
       return
                                                             3390   plague, terror, (any calamity)          Ä °
                                                                                                             ³Ê
3374   you take revenge,          ¿ ¼ À    ö	
                                             ìü«         3391   removed                              Š
                                                                                                        æÌï
       vengeance
                                                             3392   those who reach                          ä¥
                                                                                                          ¦ ó	¢
3375   im. pour out                           ¢
                                            ̹Ž ’çÈ
                                        ¸ï°
                                                             3393   they break covenant,                À °ð
                                                                                                        È ŒŒ ü
 Ruku'      14    v: 18       4
                                                                    they do not keep their words
3376   you leave (alone)                      °À«
                                              Ɋ            3394   sea                                        
                                                                                                               ö
3377   we will slay                          ò¬ìû
                                             Œ Š           3395   eastern parts, easts                ° Ì÷
                                                                                                       ¼Ê ¢ 
3378   we will spare to live /         ¬ û
                                     Ž¸È                3396   western parts, wests                 ° ä÷
                                                                                                        §Ê ¢ 
       let live
3379   ap. pl. those having          À Â	 ë
                                     È Ì ÿ¢Š               3397   we utterly destroyed /                 û ÷®
                                                                                                          ¢Â È
                                                                    annihilated
       irresistible power
3380   pv. we have been oppressed,       üÊ ¢
                                        ¢¯ÌÂÉ             3398   they erect / build, 3138          À ˎ
                                                                                                      È  Âà
       we were made to suffer                                 9th Part     1/4             Œôø’ó¦È ¢Š  Ä Þ¥°
                                                                                           ˜Š  ¾ ë ³
                                        ¸ï°
 Ruku'      15     v: 3       5
                                                             3399   we brought / led (them) across          û ³
                                                                                                           ¢Ì±È ¢




                                                                                                          145
 Surah 7: Al-A'raaf                                    146                                               Part: 9

3400   they sit as devotees,            À èð
                                        È Œ Œ à          Ruku'         17     v:6       7              ¸ï°
       given up to (idols)                                   3419   ornaments                                	 ·
                                                                                                              ô
3401   pp. one who is going to be             
                                             ¦¬÷            3420   body                                    ¾È³
                                                                                                           ¦  
       destroyed, bound to destruction
 Ruku'     16      v: 12         6         ¸ï°              3421   lowing sound (of a cow)                 Æ ¦ 
                                                                                                            ° »
3402   thirty                              ú ¯ ô¯
                                            	¢Š Š          3422   pv. fell down after breakage            Š 	Ç
                                                                                                            Öì
3403   appointed time / term                ì ÷
                                          ©¢Š 	             3423   angry                                 À¦ ã
                                                                                                          Æ ¢Ԋ
3404   forty                              ú ॠ¢
                                           	 Ì°È          3424   grieved, in sorrow                         èÇ¢
                                                                                                              ¢† 	 È
3405   im. take my place,                  üô ¦
                                         Ž’èŒ »É          3425   dragging                                   
                                                                                                              ´
       be my successor or vicegerent
                                                                    son of mother, brother                 ¿¢ ú ¦
                                                                                                           M É ¥Ê
                                            ô ¢
                                          ¶	 ÏÈ
                                                             3426
3406   im. put things right / rectify
                                                                    ni. don't make                      ø « ó
                                                                                                      ª	 Ì¢Š
                                              û°¢
                                             ŽÊ È
                                                             3427
3407   im. show me
                                                                    (them to) rejoice
3408   you can not see Me             û « ó
                                     Ž¦ úŠ               Ruku'         18    v: 4       8              ¸ï°

3409   revealed glory                       ô´«
                                                         3428   stilled, abated, appeased              ªðÇ
                                                                                                            Š
3410   crumbled to dust                        ï®
                                              ¢M È           3429   writing, inscription                   ¨¼ û
                                                                                                           ˆ  È
3411   fell down                               »
                                                           3430   they fear / dread                    À ¦
                                                                                                         È ÿÂ
3412   senseless, thunder-struck            ìàÏ
                                           ¢† 	             3431   chose                                   °¬ ¦
                                                                                                            È ¢»Ê
3413   woke up, recovered senses             ¼ ç¢
                                             È ¢Š È                 (vn.:        ° ¬ ¦
                                                                            Æ ¢	»Ê)
3414   tablets (sr.:    ¬ó
                        Æ Š)             Æ ¦ ’óÈ
                                           ¬¢               3432   seventy                                 	 ¦
                                                                                                           ú à Ç
3415   I will show                           °¢
                                           ÌÄÊ ÌÂÉ           3433   me also, (myself)                         Ä ¤
                                                                                                              È ¢Ê
3416   I will cause (them)               »Â ¢
                                         É Ž ÏÈ             3434   your trial, trial from you              ¬ 	
                                                                                                           îü¬ç
       to turn away                                          3435   best of forgivers            ú Âç ä Â »
                                                                                                  Ž 	 ¢ ’ó¦ 	
       righteousness, right conduct         ¾ °
                                             ËÉ
                                                                                                               û ÿ
                                                                                                              ¢¾
3417
                                                             3436   we have been guided
3418   error, wrong conduct                   Š
                                              ã




                                                                                                            146
 Surah 7: Al-A'raaf                                          147                                      Part: 9

3437   I afflict                                 ¤ Ï¢
                                                  	 É            3456   we have tried                    û  ô¥
                                                                                                          ¢Š 
3438   I will                                        Ë¢
                                                   É ¢ È          3457   succeeded                     æô»
                                                                                                         Š
3439   one who can neither read nor                 ÷¢
                                                     É           3458   successor                     æ»
                                                                                                         ’ô
       write, unlettered
                                                                   3459   they inherited                   ¯°Â
                                                                                                        ¦ŒÊ È
3440   pp. written down, described                ¥ ¬ 
                                                 ¢’ð÷
                                                                   3460   they take / clutch         À À»
                                                                                                     È ÌŒ  ’˜
3441   relieves (from burden)            ß Þ
                                      ú  Ô
                                                                   3461   goods, things                 µÂß
                                                                                                        Æ 
3442   burden                                       Â ¤
                                                     ÏÊ
                                                                   3462   they studied                    Ç°®
                                                                                                       ¦ È È
3443   fetters, shackles, yokes                     ô¢
                                                  ¾¢Š ’ãÈ
                                                                   3463   they hold fast / keep     À ðÈø
                                                                                                    È Œ   
3444   honored                                      °Äß
                                                    È
                                                  ¸ï°
                                                                   3464   we raised                        ü ¬û
                                                                                                          ¢’ì
 Ruku'      19        v: 6       9

3445   twelve                             ÂÌß ¬ü ¦
                                             ¢’¯Ê            3465   covering, canopy                 ¨ôÛ
                                                                                                           ˆ MŒ
3446   tribes                                     צ ¢
                                                 ¢† ¢ÇÈ          3466   going to fall                  Þë Â
                                                                                                          	 ¦È
                                                                                                        ¸ï°
                                             È´¦ ¦
                                           ª  ûÊ
                                                                    Ruku'       21    v: 9     11
3447   gushed forth
                                                                   3467   am I not?                    ª ¢
                                                                                                        ÈóŠÈ
3448   springs (of water)                            ü ß
                                                    ¢
                                                  ¸ï°
                                                                   3468   ascribed partners             ½Â ¢
                                                                                                        È  ËÈ
 Ruku'      20        v: 5      10

3449   fishes (sr.:      ©·
                         Æ  )                  Æ ¢	
                                                  À ¬ ·           3469   followers of falsehood      È Œ ئ
                                                                                                      À ô	 ÷
3450   visibly, openly                             ßÂË
                                                  ¢             3470   sloughed off,                ºôÈ ¦
                                                                                                        Š  ûÊ
                                                                          passed (them) by
                   1/2                     Ä
                                                                                                           Þ¦
                                                                                                            «¦
                             ŒŠ  ’ È ë
                             ˜ôøó¦ ¾¢Š       ³   æÐû
 9th Part
                                                                   3471   followed, overtook
3451   you preach                                À Ü	
                                                 È Œ à«
                                                                   3472   those who went astray        úÂã
                                                                                                        Ê ¢Š
3452   to justify to be free from guilt          ¨°À ÷
                                                 Å È 	 à
                                                                   3473   clung, inclined                ¾ô ¢
                                                                                                          Š »È
3453   grievous, severe                           Æ  ¥
                                                  ‰ 	
                                                                   3474   dog                            ’ôŠ
                                                                                                        ¤ï
3454   they exceeded the bounds                        §
                                                    ¦
                                                                   3475   you attack / load             ò	
                                                                                                        Œ ø¸«
3455   pv. they were prohibited                          û
                                                    ¦ 




                                                                                                         147
 Surah 7: Al-A'raaf                                  148                                             Part: 9

3476    pants with (his) tongue,          ’® ’ô         3492   sudden                                  ¨¬ ¥
                                                                                                          † ä
        lolls out (his) tongue
                                                           3493   as if you                            îû˜ï
                                                                                                        ŠŠ
3477    (rightly) guided one              ¾¬ ÷
                                        ÌÃ	  
                                                           3494   eager in search                       è·
                                                                                                         	
3478    we made / created                   û °¯
                                           ¢Ì¢È È
                                                           3495   I have no power                   î	 ¢ ó
                                                                                                     ô÷È¢Š
3479    more misguided,                    òÓ¢
                                           N È
        worse in error                                     3496   for myself                            È üó
                                                                                                      Ê ’è	
3479a   most beautiful,                     ·
                                         XÈ              3497   If I had / were                    ª ï ó
                                                                                                      üŒ Š
        excellent, fairest
 Ruku'      22      v: 10     12         ¸ï°              3498   I know unseen                   ’ó¦ ôßÈ
                                                                                                ¤ ä öŠ ¢
3480    we will lead (them)            «Ê ¬ û
                                       É °¾È           3499   I (would have) amassed,         ©° ¬
                                                                                                  É Š’ðǦ
        step by step                                              I (would have) multiplied
                                                                                                       ¸ï°
3481    I grant respite / give rein          ô¢
                                           	 փ          Ruku'     23       v: 7        13

                                                                  takes rest, dwells                  ð
                                                                                                      úŒ È
                                            ¾ ï
                                             Š
                                                           3500
3482    contrivance, scheme
                                                                  covered                               Ìä«
                                                                                                         
                                          ú ¬
                                           	÷
                                                           3501
3483    strong, firm
                                                                  fg. bore                              ôø·
                                                                                                      ªŠ  
                                            ¨ü³
                                            ˆ Ž
                                                           3502
3484    madness
                                                                  burden                                ˆ ø
                                                                                                        ò·
                                         §Â¬ ¦
                                         È  ’ëÊ
                                                           3503
3485    drew near
                                                                  light                                 è è»
                                                                                                       ¢† 	 
                                   ® ¾· â
                                   
 	  O È
                                                           3504
3486    what or which
        discourse                                          3505   fg. carried (it) about                  Â÷
                                                                                                        Ì© 
3487    ap. guide                           ®ÿ
                                          ÌÃÊ ¢           3506   fg. became heavy                      ôì ¢
                                                                                                      ªŠ Š ’¯È
3488    when                                À ¢
                                            È ¢È          3507   dl. they prayed / called unto          ß®
                                                                                                        ¦  È
3489    its coming to its port,          ÿÇ ÷
                                        ¢ ¢ Â          3508   aright, goodly, sound                ¸ó Ï
                                                                                                      ¢ 	¢
        coming to pass
3490    will not manifest / reveal /     ô´ ó
                                       M  ¢Š         3509   we will surely be                   Œ üóŠ
                                                                                                     úû ð
        disclose to nobody                                 3510   they are not able to      À à ج ó
                                                                                            È  	 È¢Š
3491    fg. became heavy                    Šì
                                          ªôŒ ¯Š          3511   ap. those who are silent          À ¬	 Ï
                                                                                                    È ÷¢




                                                                                                        148
       Surah 8: Al-Anfaal                                                 149                                              Part: 9

3512     they walk                                   ÀÌ
                                                     È  ø                       ^                 ¨ Ç
                                                                                          ʾ¢ŠèûŠ˜’ó¦É È° `
3513     they hold / grasp   ³ ¶ §               À Ì	
                                                  È  ئ                    The Spoils of War
3514     im. contrive against me,                    À ¾ ï
                                                     Ê ÌÂ 	                     Surah 8: Al-Anfaal
         plot against me                                                   3529   spoils /booty (of war),                 ¾è¢
                                                                                                                          Æ ¢Š ûÈ
3515     befriends, protects                             ó ¬
                                                                            (something done / given in excess
                                                                                  of one's obligation)
3516     good, kindness, what is right                    ß
                                                       »Â                3530   matters among                   ðü ¥ © ¯
                                                                                                                öŒ ŽÈ ¦È
3517     prompting, suggestion                               Æ Ä
                                                             ¹û                   yourselves
                                                                           3531   fg. filled with fear                    ô³Â
                                                                                                                        ªŠ Ž È
3518     im. seek refuge                                 ଠ¦
                                                       ’À	 ÇÊ
                                                                           3532   just as, even as                              øï
                                                                                                                               ¢ Š
3519     evil thought                                   	¢Š
                                                       æŸ ×
                                                                           3533   they dispute / argue               À ó® ´
                                                                                                                     È ŒÊ ¢ 
3520     they plunge / draw into                     À ¾ø
                                                     È ÌÂ  
                                                                           3534   became manifest                              ú¦«
                                                                                                                                
3521     they stop / desist not                 À Â	 ó
                                                È Ì В좊
                                                                           3535   as if, just as if                        øû˜ï
                                                                                                                          ¢ ŠŠ
3522     you have brought /                         ª ¦¬ ¦
                                                     ³Ê
         got it together                                                   3536   pv. being driven                     À ëÈ
                                                                                                                       È Œ ¢ 
3523     pv. is recited / read                           ¥Ž ë
                                                         È ÂŒ              3537   fg. one                               à ¾·Ê
                                                                                                                           ¦

                                                                                                                             ¤
3524     im. pl. lend ear,                             à	  ¦
                                                    ¦ ø¬ÇÊ             3538   that it should be yours              ðó û¢
                                                                                                                     öŒ Š¢ È
         listen with attention
3525     im. pl. keep quiet in order                     ¬	 ¢
                                                      ¦ÐûÈ             3539   pl. you wish / long                   À ®«
                                                                                                                        È ÌÂN  
         to listen                                                         3540   other than                                   Âã
                                                                                                                                Š
3526     without loudness                  ´ À®
                                           Ž   ’ó¦È ÌÂÉ                 3541   armed one                  ¨ï Ì © ¯
                                                                                                             	 Š  ó¦Ê ¦È
3527     mornings                                        ¾ã
                                                         K Π             3542   prove / cause / establish truth           	 
                                                                                                                           ê¸
                                                         Ï
                                                       ¾¢ ¦
                                                                      ¦

3528     evenings                                                                 to triumph

 Ruku'       24      v: 18        14                   ¸ï°                3543   prove falsehood, falsify                ò	 ¦
                                                                                                                           Ø
                                                              

                                                                           3544   pl. you seek help /                À ° ä¬ «
                                                                                                                     È Œ	 È
 9th Part         3/4        ˜ôøó ¾ ëÂ
                             Œ Š  ’ ¦ È ¢Š È    Ä ¸¢¥°¦
                                                   ³         ¨¯   ¯

                                                                                  implore




                                                                                                                          149
 Surah 8: Al-Anfaal                                 150                                            Part: 9

3545   ap. helper                        ¾ø÷
                                         	              3562   ni. pl. turn not away             ¦M¢Š
                                                                                                      ó « ó
3546   ranks on ranks, following     ú ç® ÷
                                      	 Ê Â           3563   worst of the                 § ¾ ÂË
                                                                                              Ë ¦È  ó¦ 
       one upon another                                          (moving) living creatures,
 Ruku'       1       v: 10     15      ¸ï°                      vilest of the beasts

3547   slumber, drowsiness             ² àû
                                       Æ ¢              3564   im. pl. respond,                  ¦ ´¬ ¦
                                                                                                ¦Ž ÇÊ
                                                                 answer the call
3548   makes strong                     Ö¥
                                        Š ŽÂ           3565   comes in between, intervenes        ¾¸
                                                                                                     É  
3549   necks (sr.:    ‰  )
                          êüß          Æ ¢ßÈ
                                       ¼ü ¢               3566   exclusively, particularly            Ï»
                                                                                                     ¨ –
3550   each finger tip              À ü¥ òï
                                    Ç ¢M Œ             3567   snatches away, kidnaps           æØ 
                                                                                                   M ¼¬
3551   they opposed /                ¦N¢ 
                                        ëË                3568   gave refuge, provided asylum          à ¦
                                                                                                          ¦
                                                                                                              ¦




       contended against
3552   in hostile array,                 è ±
                                        ¢† ·È            3569   ni. pl. do not betray          ¦ «¢Š
                                                                                                   û ¼ ó
       in a battlefield                                          (the trust), do not defraud
                                                                                                     ¸ï°
3553   stratagem,                     縬÷
                                     ¢†                Ruku'      3      v: 9        17

       battle maneuver                                    3570   they confine /           © § ª    ¦¦’°
                                                                                                         ¬Ž
3554   to retreat to (his own)       ¦ ¸¬
                                      Ä ÷                     keep in bond / restrain

       troop                                              3571   im. rain down                           آ
                                                                                                       Â	 ÷È
3555   you threw                      ª ÷°
                                        È              3572   guardians (sr.:     	È )
                                                                                    óÂ                 ó ¢
                                                                                                       –	ÌÂÈ
3556   He threw                            °
                                         ÷È              3573   whistling                               ð÷
                                                                                                       Å ¢Š 
3557   He tests / tries                  ô
                                          	 ¦         3574   hand clapping                       ¾ «
                                                                                                    ¨	 Ð
3558   test, trial                         ô¥
                                         Å –Š            3575   separates, distinguishes               Äø
                                                                                                         	 
3559   ap. one who makes               ú	  ÷
                                        ÿ              3576   piles up, heaps together             ï
                                                                                                      öŒ Â
       (others) weak
                                                           Ruku'      4      v: 9        18          ¸ï°
3560   pl. you return / revert          ®à
                                     ¦ÌÂÉ  «
                                                          3577   if they desist / cease               ¬ ¤
                                                                                                 ¦ üÌÀÊ
3561   we (shall) return / revert           àû
                                          ¾ 
                                                          3578   that which is past /                 æôÇ
                                                                                                       Š
 Ruku'       2       v: 9      16      ¸ï°
                                                                 has passed away




                                                                                                      150
                                                                                                                   



Surah 8: Al-Anfaal                                       151                                           Part: 10

3579   they return / revert                   ®à
                                           ¦ÌÂÉ           3594   your power, (your air)              𸠰
                                                                                                        öŒ  Ê
3580   fg. preceded / has gone               Ô÷
                                           ª                3595   boastfully, insolently,                Š ¥
                                                                                                            ¦ Ø
3581   patron, protector                         ÷
                                              D                    full of self-conceit (vn.:       Â ¥
                                                                                                        ’Ø)
 ^ Part:10                 ¦øôߦÈÂ Ä `
                                Š           ³                  3596   neighbor, near                        Æ ¢
                                                                                                            °³
3581a im. pl. know                            øŠ ¤
                                           ¦ ôßÊ           3597   turned on heels, ran away           Ί û
                                                                                                           ð
3582   pl. you took as spoils /               ¬ üŠ
                                            öøŽã             Ruku'       6       v: 4       2          ¸ï°
       booty                                                   3598   blazing fire                        ê ·
                                                                                                           Ž 
3583   one-fifth, 1/5 th                     ø»
                                            Æ                3599   xg. tyrant, unjust                   Æ ¢M Û
                                                                                                           ¿ ôŠ
3584   near bank, near end             ¾ ¨È ß
                                     ¢û ó¦É ¾           3600   way, manner                          §È
                                                                                                           Æ Ì¢®
                                   ì ¨È ß
                              à Ќ ’ó¦É ¾
                                 ¦

3585   yonder bank,
                                                               3601   was not                            î
                                                                                                          öóŠ
       farthest end
3586   the caravan                        ¤ Â
                                           ’ï ó¦             3602   ap. the one who changes               Â ÷
                                                                                                           ¦ ä
3587   below, lower                          ŠŠ
                                             òèÇ¢È            3603   every time,                      ¨Â÷ òï
                                                                                                       Ç   N Œ
                                                                      every opportunity
3588   you made a                          « ß «
                                         ö¾ ¦            3604   you gain mastery over,               è쒰
                                                                                                          úŠ Š «
       mutual appointment
                                                                      you come on them
3589   your dream                          î÷ ü÷
                                            	 ¢             3605   war                                 Æ Â
                                                                                                          §·
3590   pl. you                 ¾ ³ »       ¬ ̊
                                          ö’ô	 ç            3606   im. scatter, disperse,                Ì® 
                                                                                                              ÂË
       (would have) discouraged /
                                                                      strike fear
       lost heart
3591   saved                                  öôÇ
                                               M             3607   you fear                           úŠ ¼«
                                                                                                          ç¢ 
3592   makes (it appear) little / few         òôŠ
                                              Œ O ì          3608   im. throw back, cast back                   ¦
                                                                                                                ’ÀŽû¦
                                                                Ruku'       7       v: 10      3          ¸ï°
       (from     ò ôŠ
                 ˆ 	 ë)
                                            ¸ï°
                                                               3609   tethered (tied) horses,      ò ¼ ¶ ¥°
                                                                                                   Ž  ’ó¦É ¢Ê
 Ruku'      5       v: 7       1
                                                                      steeds of war
3593   fg. will depart                     ¤ÿ «
                                             ’À             3610   pl. you strike terror             È ¦	 «
                                                                                                        ÀÿÂ
                                                                                                                           



Surah 9: At-Taubah                                           152                                                 Part: 10

3611   they inclined             ¬ À «       ¸
                                           ¦ ü³                3629   duty to help / protect                       ˆ ¢ŠÂ
                                                                                                                       ¨ óÈ
3612   (has) put affection                     æó
                                                M¢È               3630   they sought help                         ¦
                                                                                                              ¦Ì Ðü¬ÇÊ
 Ruku'      8      v: 6         4           ¸ï°                   3631   those kindred                 Ê ¢ Ì°˜’󦦌ÌÂÉ
                                                                                                        ¿· Š ó ¢
3613   im. exhort, urge, rouse                 ·
                                           ̵Â                          by blood, those (who are)
                                                                          closely related
3614   twenty                          È Â 	
                                       ÀÌ Ìß                    3632   nearer                                        DÌ¢È
3615   they overcome                         ¦ôä
                                                ¦	                  Ruku'         10        v: 6      6              ¸ï°

3616   two hundred                          ú ¬ ÷
                                            Ž ŸŠ¢	                10th Part            1/4         ¦ ôß¦È  Ä Þ¥°
                                                                                                       øŠ  ³
3617   a hundred                                    Ÿ÷
                                                   ¨Š¢	
3618   one thousand                                ¢† ’ó¢È
                                                    è                             ^      ¬ È Ç
                                                                                         ¨¥ó¦ ɨ° `
                                                                                   Repentance
3619   for the present, now                    È
                                               À ¢’ó¢È
                                                    ¦
                                                                          Surah 9: At-Taubah

3620   lightened                             æè»
                                              M                  3633   immunity, freedom from                     ¨   Â¥
                                                                                                                     Æ È ¦ 
3621   weakness                               èÓ
                                             ¢† à                       obligation, disavowal
                                                                          im. pl. travel, go about                     ¸ Ç
                                                                                                                    ¦ 	
                                             ú Š
                                             Ž è’ó¢È
                                                                   3634
3622   two thousand
                                                                          (vn.:        ¨· Ç
                                                                                       ˆ  ¢	 )
                           	 ¢È)
                          ÂÇ                à ÂÇ¢È
                                               ¦

3623   captives (sr.:
                                                                   3635   four months                         ¨à¥
                                                                                                             ‰  ˢȊ  Ì°¢È
3624   slaughters greatly,                   ú¼
                                              	 ’°
       thoroughly subdues
                                                                   3636   (those) who can't                 ŽŽ ÷  Š
                                                                                                          ÌÄÄ´à  ã
3625   had it not (been),                      ó
                                              ¢ŠóŠ                     frustrate, (those) who can't escape

       if (it were) not
                                                                   3637   ap. one who humiliates /                    Ž ÷
                                                                                                                    ÌÄļ
3626   gone fore                               ê¦Ç
                                                                       disgraces
                                                                   3638   proclamation, announcement                   À¯
                                                                                                                       Æ ¦È ¢È
 Ruku'      9      v: 5         5           ¸ï°
3627   gave (you) mastery /                  úŠ
                                              ð÷¢È               3639   they have                ´ ¼ À   ¦ Œ üöóŠ
                                                                                                                 Ðì
                                                                          not failed / abated nothing
       power over
3628   they gave refuge / asylum                 È
                                              ¦Ì ¦    ¦          3640   passed                                     ô ûÊ
                                                                                                                    ºŠ È ¦
                                                                                                                        



Surah 9: At-Taubah                                          153                                            Part: 10

3641   the sacred /             Æ   ’ó¦  Ë¢’ó¦
                                ¿Â¸  Š                           3660    anger, rage, indignation                    Š
                                                                                                                  ˆÚã
       inviolable months
                                                                  3661    pv. you are left alone /                 ï «
                                                                                                                ¦Œ ¬
3642   im. pl. besiege, confine              ÂÐ ¦
                                          ¦Ì  ·É                      spared
       beleaguer
                                                                  3662    friend, protector                      ¨´ óÈ
                                                                                                                 ˆ  	Â
3643   im. pl. lay / sit waiting                  ¾à ¦
                                               ¦Ì  ’ëÉ
                                                                   Ruku'          2     v: 10    8               ¸ï°
3644   ambush                                    Ï÷
                                               ¾ Â            3663    it is not right                       È ï ÷
                                                                                                                À¢Š ¢
3645   im. pl. leave free, leave alone              ô»
                                                 ¦N            3664    they maintain, 3666        ° ¿ ¸   ¦Ì  à
                                                                                                                   Âø
3646   anyone                                       ¢È
                                                  ¾·              3665    providing water /          « ¸ ¨ ìÇ
                                                                                                     O ¢ ’ó¦Š ¢Š 	
3647   sought your protection           È È ´¬ ¦
                                        ½°¢ ÇÊ                         giving drink to the pilgrims,

3648   im. protect                                   ³
                                                   Ž ¢È         3666    maintenance                            ¨È øß
                                                                                                                 Å °¢ 	
                                                                          (to pray in and to look after)
3649   place of safety                           ú÷ ÷
                                                   ’˜          3667    they are not equal            È ¬ ó
                                                                                                        ÀÌ ȢŠ
 Ruku'      1        v: 6       7               ¸ï°
                                                                  3668    greater in worth, higher in             öŠ
                                                                                                                   ÜߢÈ
3650   they overcome /                           Â
                                              ¦Ì  ’Ü                 degree / rank
       get upper hand
                                                                  3669    pl. triumphant                           Äç
                                                                                                                ÀÌ Ÿ	¢Š
3651   they do not           § ¼ °         ¦ë ó
                                         ¦Œ ¢Š
       pay regard / respect
                                                                  3670    delights, pleasure, blessings             ö àû
                                                                                                                     	 
3652   kinship                                       ¤
                                                     Ê           3670a   lasting, enduring                         	 
                                                                                                                   ö ì÷
3653   covenant, agreement, tie                    ¨÷¯
                                                   †Ê            3671    they loved                          ¦¸¬
                                                                                                           ¦ Ǧ
3654   fg. refuses, is averse                         «
                                                   9’˜           3672    tribe, family, kindred                Æ  	 
                                                                                                                ¨Â Ìß
3655   they broke / violated        ª ½ À        °Š
                                               ¦Œðû           3673    acquired, gained                      » ’ëÊ
                                                                                                                È Â¬ ¦
3656   leaders, chiefs (sr.:        ¿ ÷¤
                                    Æ ¢ Ê)       ¨øŸ
                                                  †  	¢È         3674    slackening (of trade),                 È ÈŠ
                                                                                                                 ®¢ ï
3657   they intended                                øÿ
                                                 ¦                    decline (of commerce)
                                                                  3675    dwellings                            úï È÷
                                                                                                                	 ¢ 
3658   has more right, worthier                     ¢È
                                                  ê·
                                                                          (sr.:       úŠ ÷
                                                                                       ðÈ )
3659   heals                                    æ
                                                	 Ì
                                                                                                               



Surah 9: At-Taubah                                 154                                              Part: 10

3676   dearer                              ¢È
                                         ¤·              3692   priests, scholars                         ¦
                                                                                                        °¢·¢È
3677   im. pl. wait                      Х
                                      ¦ «          3693   those who renounced                      ¦°
                                                                                                       ˢ؃
 Ruku'        3       v: 8   9          ¸ï°                    the world

3678   fields                          ú× ÷
                                        	 ¦           3694   they put off / extinguish                  	
                                                                                                       ¦Œè’Ø
3679   a place between                      ·
                                         úü                  (vn.:      è ¦
                                                                          Æ ¢Š ’×Ê)
       Makkah and Taif where a battle                    3695   will not allow                               9’˜
       was fought in 8th year of Hijri.
3680   fg. straitened, constrained       ŠÓ
                                       ªë¢             3696   makes it prevail                        Â
                                                                                                         Ž ’Ü
                                                                            1/2          øŠ  ³
                                                                                       ¦ ôß¦È  Ä æÐû
3681   fg. became vast / wide            ¦·È
                                       ª °             10th Part

                                                                they hoard /                         À Ď
                                                                                                    È ÌÂ ü’ð
                                      úŽ ÷
                                       Â¥Ž¾
                                                         3697                             ± À ½
3682   ap. those who turn
                                                                treasure up
       their backs in a fight, who turn
       back in retreat                                   3698   gold                                    ¤ÿÈ
                                                                                                         ¯
3683   calm, tranquillity,              ˆ 	 
                                        ¨ü ðÇ           3699   silver                                   ¨Ôç
                                                                                                         ˆ 	
       peace of reassurance
3684   forces, hosts                     ® ü³
                                        ¦Å           3700   pv. will be heated                         
                                                                                                       ø¸
                                                                                                           «
                                                                                                      à ’ð
                                                                                                         ¦


3685   unclean, impure                  Æ´û
                                                      3701   pv. will be branded with


3686   year                                Æ ¢
                                           ¿ß            3702   foreheads                                Á ¦³
                                                                                                         É ¢Ž
3687   poverty (due to loss of trade)     ¨Š ß
                                          ˆ ô                (sr.:      ˆ  ¦ )
                                                                           ¨ ³
3688   a tax, taken yearly               ˆ Ď
                                         ¨ ³             3703   flanks, sides                         § ü³
                                                                                                      Æ 
   from the free able-bodied non-Muslim                         (sr.:       ¤³
                                                                         ü )
   male subjects of the Muslim
   government that ensures them
   protection.
                                                         3704   to hoard, to treasure                        Ċ
                                                                                                              üï
3689   with their hands                 ¾ ß
                                        
 ú         3705   number                                    Æ 	
                                                                                                          ¨¾ß
3690   pl. who are subdued           È Â	 Ï
                                     ÀÌ 㢠           3706   four                                     ¨à¥
                                                                                                         ˆ  Ì°¢È
 Ruku'        4       v: 5   10         ¸ï°             3707   inviolable , sacred                       ¿Â·
                                                                                                          Æ 
3691   they imitate               È   Ô
                                  ÀŒ	ÿ¢                    (Ziqa'da, Zilhajjah, Muharram
                                                                and Rajab are sacred months in
                                                                                                       



Surah 9: At-Taubah                               155                                       Part: 10
        which war is prohibited as a
        sign of respect to Hajj)                       3725   they waver / hesitate        È ® ® ¬
                                                                                           ÀÌÂÉ M  
 3708   all together                       ˆ M¢Š
                                           ¨ç ï        3726   to go forth, setting out        « »
                                                                                              Æ ÌÂ 
 3709   postponement, transposing        žÈü
                                         Œ Ê ó¦       3727   they made preparation               ¾ß
                                                                                               ¦ÌÂ  ¢È
        the sacred months
        with ordinary months                           3728   preparation, equipment                 ¨¾ß
                                                                                                     Å 
 3710   they make up /                      	 
                                        ¦Œ×¦       3729   to be sent forth                ª ঠ¦
                                                                                              Æ ¢ ŽûÊ
        make it agree
  Ruku'       5     v: 8      11          ¸ï°         3730   trouble, evil                     † ¢
                                                                                                 ¦»
 3711   im. pl. go forth, march forth       Â	 ¦
                                          ÌÂ èûÊ     3731   hurried to and fro              à Š
                                                                                           ¦ Ó̘óŠ
 3712   pl. you became        ¾ ¼ ª      ¬ Š ¯¦
                                        ö’ôë¢MÊ     3732   ap. eager listeners          À ¢ 
                                                                                           È ß øÇ
        heavy
                                                       3733   among you                        ð ô»
                                                                                             öŒ 󊢊 	
 3713   second of the two          ú ü û ¯
                                   Ž ’¯¦ Ž¢Š
                                                       3734   they upset / turned things          ¦ ë
                                                                                               ¦MôŠ
 3714   low                                   Ç
                                          ô’è               upside down

 3715   uppermost, supreme                   ß
                                            ¢’ô      3735   im. allow me,                       Š¦
                                                                                                ÌÀÀ’ŸÊ
                                                              give me exemption
        lightly (armed)                    ç è»
                                          ¢† ¢Š 	
                                                                                                 ؊ 
                                                                                              ¦Œ ìÇ
 3716
                                                       3736   they have fallen
        heavily (armed)                     ì¯
                                           † ¢Š 	
                                                                                                   È«
                                                                                                 š 
 3717
                                                       3737   fg. grieves
        adventure, gain                  È Âß
                                         µ 
                                                                                                 È ÂŠ
                                                                                                 ¬Ž ç
 3718
                                                       3738   well pleased, rejoiced
 3719   easy, moderate                    ¾Ï ë
                                         ¦ 	 ¢Š
                                                                                                   ¤
                                                                                              Ã ¾·Ê
                                                                                                 ¦

                                                       3739   fg. one
 3720   fg. appeared far                   à
                                         Ì©¾ ¥
                                                       3740   dl. two good /                 ú  ·
                                                                                             Ž üÈ
 3721   (tiresome) long distance            ¨ìË
                                            ˆM               glorious things
  Ruku'       6     v: 5      12          ¸ï°         3741   willingly                         ¢ ×
                                                                                                 ߊ
 3722   you granted leave /               ª¯
                                           ûÊ ¢È     3742   unwillingly                        ÿŠ
                                                                                                ¢ Âï
        exemption
 3723   asks leave / exemption          ÀÊ ¬
                                        É ¯’˜È     3743   pl. contributions, spendings      ìŠ û
                                                                                              ©¢Š è
 3724   fg. became prey to doubt          ¥« ¦
                                        ª¢Ì°Ê       3744   lazily                            Èï
                                                                                              D¢ Œ
                                                                                                                      



Surah 9: At-Taubah                                    156                                               Part: 10

3745   caused to depart                    êÿ «
                                             Ä                                       Š  ¦È                 

                                                             10th Part       3/4        ¦øôß Â       Ä ¸¢¥°¦
                                                                                                       ³         ¨¯   ¯



3746   they are afraid                  È ë
                                        ÀŒ ’è          3763   opposes, sets against                     ®¸
                                                                                                           Ì®Ê ¢ 
3747   place to flee to,                   ˜´ ÷
                                           † ’ô           3764   talk idly                               Æ 
                                                                                                           µ»
       place of refuge
3748   pl. caves                        © ° ä÷
                                        Ç ¦È ¢            3765   jest, play                                 ¤à
                                                                                                               	 óŠ
3749   place to enter,                    ¾÷
                                         † »              3766   ni. pl. make no excuse               °À¬ «
                                                                                                     ¦ÌÂÉ 	 ࢊó
       a retreating hole                                     Ruku'       8       v: 7       14              ¸ï°
3750   they run away in haste /       È ¸
                                      À ø´            3767   portion, share                           ¼ »
                                                                                                            Æ ¢Šô
       in obstinate rush
                                                                   you indulged in idle talk                 ¬ »
                                                                                                           öÔ
                                            Ä	
                                             ø’ô
                                                            3768
3751   slanders, finds fault
                                                                   overthrown (cities)                    è« ÷
                                                                                                      ©¢Šð	 š
                                             آ
                                          ¦Œ ßÉ
                                                            3769
3752   pv. are / were given
                                                                   fg. came                                        «
                                                                                                                 ª¢È
                                     È Ø
                                     ÀŒ ¼È
                                                            3770
3753   they are enraged
                                                                   gardens of Eden,                 À ß © ü³
                                                                                                    Ç ¾ Ê ¢
                                          ü¦ ·
                                         ¢È
                                                            3771
3754   enough for us,
                                                                   everlasting gardens
       sufficient unto us                                                                                   ¸ï°
                                                             Ruku'       9       v: 6       15
       ap. those who turn with          È ¦	 °
                                        Àã¦È
                                                                                                               ô¦
                                                                                                             ’ÚŒ ’ãÉ
3755
                                                            3772   im. be hard
       hope, those who implore
 Ruku'       7     v: 17       13         ¸ï°              3773   found fault, took revenge                      öìû
                                                                                                                    Š
3756   ap. those who are employed        ú ô÷ ß
                                          	 	 ¢          3774   it will be                                     î
                                                                                                                   
3757   be reconciled, be won over          èóš÷
                                          ¨Š M            3775   chastised,                                 Š
                                                                                                            ¤ìߢÈ
3758   necks, those in bondage,             ë°
                                          §¢Š Ê                    put as a consequence

       slaves                                               3776   failed to fulfill,                         èŠ
                                                                                                           ¦Œ ô»¢È
3759   debtors, those in debt           ú ÷° ã
                                         	 Ê ¢Š                  turned adverse
                                                                   those who do something               ú ß Ø÷
                                                                                                         	 M 
                                    ò ¦È ú ¦
                                    Ž Ž ó¦ ¥Ê
                                                            3777
3760   wayfarer
                                                                   willingly
3761   they hurt                         È ¯
                                         ÀÌÂÉ š          3778   endeavor                                   ¾³
                                                                                                              
3762   ear                                   À¯¢
                                             Æ ÉÉ           3779   seventy                                 ú à Ç
                                                                                                            	 ¦
                                                                                                                



Surah 9: At-Taubah                                        157                                          Part: 11

 Ruku'         10     v: 8        16           ¸ï°             3795   they make excuses               ÀÌÂÉ 	 à
                                                                                                       È °À¬
3780    pp. those left behind              È èô ÷
                                           ÀŒ M ¼            3796   to make excuse                            ¦
                                                                                                         °¦ŠÀ	¬ßÊ
3781    behind                                È »
                                              »¢Šô	             3797   news, matters                         ¦
                                                                                                           °¢»¢È
3782    sitting                                   à÷
                                                ¾ ’ì         3798   more likely to be                   °¾
                                                                                                           É  ³¢È
3783    heat                                       ·
                                                   Â           3799   loss, penalty, fine                  ÷ ÷
                                                                                                           ¢  ä
3784    let them laugh,                     ð ó
                                         ¦Œ ¸Ô	             3800   pl. circles / turns / changes        È
                                                                                                            Ÿ	¦È®
        they should laugh
                                                                       (of fortunes)
3785    let them weep,                           ð ó
                                              ¦Œ ¦	         3801   sr. circle / turn / change          ¨ÂŸ
                                                                                                           Æ  	¦È®
        they should weep
                                                                       (of fortune)
3785a   those who remained behind            ú èó »
                                              	 	¢           3802   pl. approaches,                     ¥Âë
                                                                                                         ©¢ Œ
3786    those who have                 ¾Ø ó¢
                                       Ê M ó¦ŒÂÉ                  things that bring (them) near
        wealth and influence                                    3803   blessings                         Š
                                                                                                       ©¦ ôÏ
3787    (women) who are left                 ó »
                                            æ	¦               3804   sr. approach, 3802                    ˆ Œ
                                                                                                             ¨¥ ë
        behind when their husbands
        go out (on war)                                          Ruku'     12      v: 10     1            ¸ï°
                                               ¸ï°
 Ruku'         11     v: 9        17                            3805   ap. those who are first /        È ìÇ
                                                                                                        ÀŒ ¥Ž¢
3788    ap. those who make                 È °Àà÷
                                           ÀÌÂÉ O                    foremost
        excuses                                                 3806   around you                         ð·
                                                                                                        öŒ óŠ
3789    the Arabs living in desert             Â
                                             §¦ ß¢È           3807   they became stubborn /                ®Â ÷
                                                                                                          ¦ÌÂÉ  
3790    they are sincere and true               ¸
                                             ¦ Ðû                  persisted

3791    I give ride                            ò	
                                               Œ ø·¢È          3808   they acknowledged /                 ç  ¦
                                                                                                        ¦Œ ¬ßÊ
                                                                       confessed
3792    tears                                     ÷®
                                                 ÞÈ             3809   they mixed / mingled                 ؊ 
                                                                                                         ¦Œ ô»
3793    way                                     ò ¦Ç
                                                ˆ Ž           3810   im. pray (for them)                   O
                                                                                                             òÏ
3794    pl. rich (persons)                       ü
                                                ¢Ž’ã¢È         3811   assuagement, relief                 úŠ Ç
                                                                                                            ð
 ^ Part:11                       °               ³
                             ÈÀÌÂÉ 	À¬à Ä `          3812   those who are made to            È  ÷
                                                                                                        À³Â
                                                                                                             



Surah 9: At-Taubah                                   158                                           Part: 11
       await, those held in suspense
                                                           3831   hour of hardship,        ¨Â à ¨ß Ç
                                                                                           Ê  È ’ó¦	  ¢
3813   to put off (for a while)          ³ ¤
                                        Æ ¢ Ì°Ê                  time of distress
3814   ambush, outpost                 ®Ï ¤
                                       Æ ¢ Ì°Ê            3832   three                                  ¨Š¯¢Šô¯Š
3815   warred against                  È È·
                                       §°¢                3833   pv. they were left behind              èô»
                                                                                                      ¦Œ O 
3816   ni. do not stand, never stand      ì«
                                        öŒ ¢Šó          3834   fg. straitened, constrained,         ŠÓ
                                                                                                     ªë¢
                                         ÆÇ
                                           ¢È
                                                                  3680
       founded on
                                                                                                          ¦·È
                                                                                                        ª °
3817
                                                           3835   fg. became vast / spacious, 3681
3818   building                           ˴
                                          Æ ¢ü           Ruku'        14     v: 8     3            ¸ï°
3819   brink, bank, edge                       Ë
                                            ¢Šè           3836   thirst                                 ˜øŠ
                                                                                                         ˆ Û
3820   precipice, cliff                 »Â³
                                        Ç                3837   fatigue, tiredness                    
                                                                                                      ¤Ðû
3821   that which is ready                  °ÿ
                                            Ç ¢           3838   hunger                           ¨Ðø ÷
                                                                                                   ˆ   ¼
       to crumble down
3822   tumbled down with him,          ¥ ¦
                                      þŽÈ°¢ ûÊ
                                                           3839   they walk / stepped                 È  Š
                                                                                                      ÀŒØ
                                                                                                         × ÷
                                                                                                       ¢†	 
                                   ¦




       broke down with him                                 3840   any step

3823   will never cease                ¾Ä
                                       É ¦ ¢Šó         3841   to gain                                 û
                                                                                                          † 
3824   they built                              ü¥
                                            ¦          3842   valley                                 ®
                                                                                                        ¢Ê ¦ÈÂ
3825   doubt, suspicion                    ¨¦ °
                                           ˆ Ê           Ruku'        15     v: 4     4            ¸ï°
 Ruku'     13       v: 11     2         ¸ï°               3843   they are nearer to you            öŒ Œ 
                                                                                                      ðû ô
3826   ap. those who praise        È ¾	 ·
                                   ÀÌ ÷¢                3844   harshness, to be stern               ¨Š ã
                                                                                                       ˆ ܒô	
3827   ap. those who fast,        È ¸Ç
                                  À Ÿ	¢                 11th Part         1/4       ÈÀÂÉ 	 à Ä Þ¥°
                                                                                           °À¬          ³
       those who wander in devotion
       to cause of Allah                                   3845   pv. they are put in trial /           ü
                                                                                                     À¬’è
3828   ap. those who forbid             È ÿû
                                        À ¢                   test

       (others from)                                       3846   every year                      ¿ ß òï
                                                                                                  Ç ¢ M Œ
3829   tender-hearted, soft-hearted        Æ ¦M ¢È
                                           ÁÂ              3847   turned                             È ÂÏ
                                                                                                     » 
3830   forbearing, clement, patient       ö ô·
                                           	            3848   grievous                               Ž 
                                                                                                        Ä Äß
                                                                                                                



Surah 10: Younus                                         159                                       Part: 11

3849   you're overburdened/                     ¬üß
                                              öŽ            3862   they do not expect /       È ³
                                                                                                 À ¢Šó
       made to suffer                                                 hope
3850   full of pity, most kind             Æ É °
                                           »  È                3863   call, prayer                   Ã ß®
                                                                                                        ¦

                                                                                                          È
3851   suffices me,                          ¦ ·
                                           ŽÈ              3864   greeting                          ˆ 	 
                                                                                                        ¨¸«
       sufficient to me
                                                                Ruku'        1    v: 10      6         ¸ï°
3852   The tremendous              Üà ³ à
                                ö	  ’ó¦Ê  ’ó¦
       Throne, The Supreme Throne
                                                               3865   hastens                          ò´
                                                                                                       Œ  à
 Ruku'         16       v: 7    5           ¸ï°               3866   vn. to desire with haste    ¾¢ à	ÇÊ
                                                                                                    ´¬ ¦
                                                                                                        þ¦ ³
                                                                                                        	 Žü
           ^     û  È Ç
                Æ ɨ° `                              3867   on his side


       (Prophet) Jonah :                                       3868   ap. prodigals,                ú 	 Ž ÷
                                                                                                     çÂÈ
                                                                      extravagant people
        Surah 10: Younus
                                                                      im. bring                             ª¦
                                                                                                            	 ’ŸÊ
                                    ¼ Ï Š
                                    Ç ¾	 È¿¾ë
                                                               3869
3853   good actions
       (they had) advanced                                     3870   other than this                    Š
                                                                                                  ¦ŠÀÿŽ ã
3854   begins                                 £¾
                                              É  ¦         3871   im. change                             ¾¥
                                                                                                            ¾ 
3855   creation                               ê»
                                               ’ô            3872   I make you know                öŒ °Ì®¢È
                                                                                                       ï
                                                                                                            ¦




3856   repeats                                 ¾ à
                                                	          3873   I dwelt, I tarried                ªŽ
                                                                                                         ’°¦óŠ
3857   splendor, bright,                       Ó
                                             Å ¢	             3874   (a big portion of) life            Âøß
                                                                                                        ¦  
       shining glory
                                                                                                       ¸ï°
3858   measured, disposed                      È ¾Š
                                               ° ë             Ruku'        2    v: 10      7

                                                               3875   keep moving / blowing            ú ³
                                                                                                         
3859   stages                                ± ü÷
                                            ¾Ê ¢
                                                               3876   stormy wind                    æÏ ß
                                                                                                      	 ¢
       (sr.:        ¾Ä ÷
                    Æ Ž ü )
                                                               3877   they rebel / transgress          È ä
                                                                                                       À ¦
3860   number                                 ®¾ß
                                              Æ 
                                                               3878   plants, greenery                  © ¦û
                                                                                                        Æ ¢
3861   years                                 ú üÇ
                                              Ž	
                                                               3879   ornament, adornment             Â ±
                                                                                                     » »É
       (sr.:    ¨üÇ
                ˆ  )
                                                               3880   reaped corn,                    ¾ з
                                                                                                     ¦ 	 
                                                                                                                          



Surah-10: Younus                                          160                                            Part: 11
        clean-mown harvest
                                                                3898   a part of the day       ° ü ú÷ ¨ß Ç
                                                                                               Ê ¢ ó¦  †  ¢
 3881   will not cover,           ¼ Á °     ê
                                              ÿ¢Šó
        will not overshadow                                     3899   they recognize                     È çÈ à¬
                                                                                                          ÀŒ °¢ 
 3882   covered, overshadowed                      êÿÈ
                                                    °                one another
                                                                3900   when                                            ÷
                                                                                                                      U
 3883   darkness                                      ë
                                                     ¬Š
                                                                3901   by night                                       « ¥
                                                                                                                     ¢¢
 3884   ap. protector, defender                 öÏ ß
                                                 	 ¢
                                                                3902   what is there of,                                 ÷
                                                                                                                     ¦È¯¢
 3885   pv. are covered /                       Ì ¢
                                              ª	 ’ãÉ                 what could there be
        overcast with
                                                                3903   they seek information              È  Ž 
                                                                                                          ÀŒ¦ü¬È
 3886   slices, pieces (sr.:     ¨à ë
                                 ˆ  ’Ø	 )          àŠ ë
                                                   ¢ Ø	
                                                                3904   yea, yes                                        ¤
                                                                                                                      ÄÊ
 3887   darkness, pitch dark                      øô ÷
                                                 ¢ 	 ’Ü
                                                                3905   by (oath) my Lord                         ¥È È
                                                                                                                °Â
 3888   (stand at) your place                   ðû ÷
                                              öŒ ¢Šð
                                                                 Ruku'       5    v:13          10             ¸ï°
 3889   separated, split                           Š
                                                   òMȱ        3906   regret, remorse                          ¨÷ ¾û
                                                                                                                ˆ  ¦ 
 3890   to us only                                   û ¤
                                                    ¢¢Ê       3907   Lo!                                                ¢Šó¢È
 3891   then and there                          îó üÿ
                                                 	¢          3908   has Allah permitted?                 Àʯ¢ÈÉ ¦
                                                                                                            È …                ¦




 3892   experience, apprehend                      ¦Œ ¦«
                                                      ô          Ruku'       6     v: 7         11             ¸ï°
 3893   fg. sent before, did in past            ŠŠ
                                              ªèôÇ¢È          3909   you are not                          Àð÷
                                                                                                            É Œ «¢
  Ruku'       3      v: 10        8              ¸ï°           3910   condition, business                           À’˜
                                                                                                                        Ë
  11th Part                     °À¬          ³
                             ÈÀÂÉ 	 à Ä æÐû             3911   you start doing ..                  È Ô 	 «
                                                                                                           À è
 3894   or who is?                                     ÷
                                                     ú ¢È     3912   escapes not, not hidden              §Ä ÷
                                                                                                            É  à¢
 3895   fg. proved true                            ì·
                                                 ªM           3913   smaller                                  Âä
                                                                                                                  Ï¢È
 3896   cannot find guidance                   ¾
                                             ÌÄ Ž ¢Šó        3914   they only guess/                     ÏÂ
                                                                                                         À  ¼
  Ruku'       4      v: 10        9              ¸ï°                  make conjectures
                                                                 Ruku'       7    v: 10         12             ¸ï°
 3897   they didn't stay,                       °
                                             ¦Œ¦’ôöóŠ
        hadn't tarried                                           11th Part       3/4        È ÂÉ 	    Ä ¸¢¥°¦
                                                                                            À °À¬à        ³          

                                                                                                                     ¨¯    ¯
                                                                                                                      



Surah 11: Hud                                                161                                             Part: 12

3915    my sojourn, my staying                 ÷ ÷
                                              	 ¢Šì              3933   one who can keep back / repel           M®¡È°
3916    vn. reminding, admonishing             	 ’À
                                              Âï «                  Ruku'         11        v: 6     16          ¸ï°

3917    dubious, hesitating                      ¨øã
                                                 ˆ Œ                         ^       ÿÈ Ç
                                                                                   ® ɨ° `
3917a   those who warn                      ú °	 ÷
                                             Ê Àü                    (Prophet) Hud :
3918    those who are warned                ú °Š ÷
                                             Ê Àü                        Surah 11: Hud
3919    you turn                   © » ¾    ªè «
                                              	 ’ô              3934   pv. perfected,                     ª 	 ·É
                                                                                                               øð ¢
                                                                          guarded, decisive
3920    greatness, supremacy                   Â ï
                                             É –Ž ¦	             3935   pv. explained in detail /              Š Ðç
                                                                                                               ªô Œ
 Ruku'       8       v: 12       13           ¸ï°                        expounded

3921    lofty, tyrant                           ¾ß
                                                Ç ¢               3936   from near                             ¾ó ÷
                                                                                                              ÌÀ Mú	
3922    dl. (you both)                           ¦ 
                                                 ¦

                                                  ¦«              3937   He will give / grant                    Ê š
                                                                                                                  ©
        provide dwellings
                                                                   3938   they fold up                           È ü
                                                                                                                 À’°
3923    im. deface, destroy       ² ¿ ¶      ø ¦
                                            Æ	 ’×Ê
                                                                   3939   they cover (with clothing)         È Ì¬
                                                                                                             À äÈ
3924    im. harden                              ¾ ¦
                                              Ì® ËÉ
                                                                   3940   clothes, garments                         ¯
                                                                                                                  §¢	
3925    pv. is / was accepted                 ¦ ³¢
                                            ªŽ É
                                                                          (sr.:   §
                                                                                  Æ ¯Š)
3926    ni. dl. do not follow           O – Ž¢Šó
                                        À ব«
                                                                    ^ Part:12                  ¥ ÷ ÷È             ³
                                                                                              ¨¡È®ú	 ¢ Â Ä `
3927    overtook                               ÈÈ
                                               ½°Ì®¢È
                                                                   3941   we delayed, held back                   û 
                                                                                                                 ¢»¢È
3928    body                                      ¾¥
                                                 À 
                                                                   3942   reckoned time,                  ¨È    ¨ ¢
                                                                                                          Ç ®Ì¾à÷
 փ
 Ruku'       9       v: 10       14           ¸ï°
                                                                          definite term
3929    abode, settlement                          ÷
                                                 ¢È ¦            3943   what keeps (it) back               Ǝ¸¢
                                                                                                              ¦ ÷
3930    they read                           È  Â
                                            ÀÉ  ’ì            3944   cannot be                úߢ† ÌÂÂÐ÷ óŠ
                                                                                                     ç   Æ
3931    avail not                             ü «÷
                                             Žä¢                      turned away
                                                                    Ruku'         1         v: 8      1          ¸ï°
3932    warners (sr.:        Â Àû
                              	 )                  Àû
                                                     Ì°Œ 
                                                                   3945   is despairing                          Æ Œ
                                                                                                                 ² 
 Ruku'      10       v: 11       15           ¸ï°
                                                                                                           



Surah 11: Hud                                        162                                        Part: 12

3946    thankless, ungrateful              Æ Œ ï
                                           ° èŠ            3964   dl. (both of them are)        À 
                                                                                                Ê ¢Ž ¬È
3947    graces, favors                     È ø
                                            ¢ àû                equal
                                                                                                     ¸ï°
                                                            Ruku'        2   v: 16      2
3948    exulting                            ¬Š
                                            Æ ŽÂç          3965   abject, meanest                    ¾Ê °
                                                                                                     É ¯¦È ¢È
3949    boastful                           Æ ¼ç
                                           °Š             3966   at first thought,         Ä  Ä® ¥
                                                                                            Ê Ì¢Âó¦È Ê ¢
3950    ap. foresaker,                      Æ Ê ¢
                                            ½° «                  apparently
        one who gives up                                   3967   made obscure from sight         ª ß
                                                                                                   ø
3951    straitened                          Ÿ	¢
                                           êÓ              3968   we compel / adhere                   ¿Ä
                                                                                                       É Ž ’ôû
3952.   invented, fabricated            Ç ¢¬’è÷
                                        ©               3969   ap. one who drives away             ®°
                                                                                                      Æ Ê ¢Š×
3953    we repay fully                      »
                                            O  û         3970   vn. to drive away,                   ® Š
                                                                                                       Æ Â×
3954    pv. they will     ² ­ §   È ȼ¦¢Šó
                                     À                         to track away
        not be given less,                                 3971   scorn! to hold in                °È 
                                                                                                 ÌÄÊ ®Ä«
        will not have diminution
                                                                  mean estimation
3955    they contrived/       ¸ À ´       à
                                        ¦ üÏ           3972   crime, guilt                       ¿¦ ³Ê
                                                                                                       Â ¤
        designed
3956    clans, sects                        Ä
                                         ̧¦ ·¢È          3973   my guilt, my crime            	 ¦ ³Ê
                                                                                                 ÷ Â ¤
                                                            Ruku'        3   v: 11      3            ¸ï°
        (sr.:   Æ Ä·)
                § 	
                                                           3974   im. be not distressed,        	
                                                                                               Æ ¬¦«¢Šó
3957    im. you be not                     
                                           î«¢Šó                don't grieve
3958    doubt                               ¨Â÷
                                               	          3975   im. build, make                      ¦
                                                                                                     ÞüÏÊ
3959    pv. they are          µ° ¸   È ÓÂà
                                        À                      (to build, to make:       ¨  
                                                                                            ˆ àüÏ)
        brought before
                                                           3976   our eyes                            üü
                                                                                                     ¢ŽߢÈ
3960    witnesses (sr.:      Ž Ë)
                            ¾                
                                           ®¢ Ë¢È
                                                           3977   ni. speak not               	 ¼
                                                                                             ¤×¢ «¢Šó
3961    surely, without a doubt           È 
                                          ¿Â³¢Šó
                                                           3978   will fall / unloose                 N ¸
                                                                                                      ò	
3962    the greatest losers          È   Š
                                     ÀÌÂÂÈ»˜’ó¦
                                                           3979   gushed forth                         È°¢Šç
3963    they humbled / bowed              ¦¬¦»¢È
                                             
                                                           3980   oven                                 °«
                                                                                                          ü
                                                                                                           



 Surah-11: Hud                                            163                                       Part: 12

3981   im. pl. ride / embark   § ½ °   ¦¦ïÌ°Ê
                                             Š ¦           3999    denied, opposed                  ¾¸³
                                                                                                      
3982   its course / sailing               ÿ 
                                         ¢ ´÷
                                             ¦
                                                            4000    arrogant enemy of truth            ¾üß
                                                                                                          Ž
3983   its mooring / anchoring            ÿ Ç 
                                         ¢ ¢ Â÷           4001    they were pursued by             ¦àŽ«É
                                                                                                        ¦ ¦
                                                                                                     ¸ï°
3984   aloof, apart                        ¾Ž  
                                           Ç Äà÷                Ruku'       5   v: 11    5

                                                                    made you to dwell                  ¦
                                                                                                   Âøà¬ÇÊ
                                               Â
                                             ÌÄÊ ¦   ¦
                                                            4002
3985   I will betake myself
                                                                    ap. responsive                   Ž ÷
                                                                                                    ¤ ´
                                                 È ·
                                                 ¾¢
                                                            4003
3986   came in between
                                                                    one in whom people                 
                                                                                                    ¦
 ³Â÷
                                          àŠô¥Ê
                                            	 ¦
                                                            4004
3987   im. swallow up
                                                                    have great expectations
3988   im. hold, cease                     àô’ë¢È
                                             		             4005    loss, perdition                ÂÊ ¼«
                                                                                                      È
3989   abated, subsided, sank              Òã
                                            	              4006    they cut the legs                    Š
                                                                                                     ¦ÌÂÂìß
3990   rested                               ¦
                                         Ì© ¬ÇÊ            4007    will not be belied       Ç ÌŒ ’ð÷ ã
                                                                                             § À  Š
3991   Judi, name of a                   O Ê ³
                                         Ä®                4008    blast                           ˆ ¸Ï
                                                                                                    ¨ 
       mountain in Iraq
                                                                    they were lifeless             úø¯	¢
                                                                                                    	 ³
                                                  ¾
                                                 ¦ à¥
                                                            4009
3992   be away, be cursed
                                                                    on ground
 12th Part       1/4      ¨¡È ú÷¢ Â Ä Þ¥°
                           ¥ ® 	 ÷È ³                       4010    they dwelled not /            ¦üäöóŠ
                                                                                                     
3993   I admonish                  · ¸ Â    Ú	
                                             Œ ß¢È                 lived not
                                                                Ruku'       6   v: 8     6           ¸ï°
3994   im. descend, disembark                ’ ¦ ¦
                                             ֎ÿÊ
                                                            4011    made no delay                  Š ÷
                                                                                                   ®Ž¦óŠ¢
 Ruku'       4    v: 14        4           ¸ï°
3995   'Aad, a people towards whom                 ß
                                                 ®¢        4012    roasted                           
 ü·
                                                                                                      À Ž
       Prophet Hud was                                      4013    reach not                      ò	
                                                                                                   Œ Ы¢Šó
       sent as a messenger
3996   ap. forsakers, deserters           ïÊ ¢
                                            	°«             4014    felt mistrust                       	
                                                                                                        Âðû
3997   seized                                 Â  ¦
                                             ¦ ¬ßÊ         4015    conceived, felt                  
                                                                                                    ƳÌ¢È
3998   forelock                            ˆ Ï¢
                                           ¨	 û             4016    fear                              ˆ è»
                                                                                                      ¨Š 	
                                                                                                           



Surah 11: Hud                                     164                                            Part: 12

4017   fg. laughed                  Š	
                                   ªð¸Ó                 4037   we want / desire                         ¾Ž û
                                                                                                        Â
4018   after                            È °È
                                         ¡È Â           4038   strong support / refuge        
 ¾Ë‰ ’ïÉ
                                                                                              ¾	 ú °
4019   Oh! Woe unto me!              UŠô¢
                                          È             4039   they cannot reach                  ô	 
                                                                                               ¦Œ ÐúóŠ
4020   Shall?                               È
                                                        4040   part of the night            Ž M¦  ‰ ’Øë
                                                                                            ò ó ú÷ Þ 	
4021   I (will) bear /                    
                                          ¾ó	¢È         4041   ni. turn not back,                ªè¬’ô¢Šó
                                                                                                  	
       give birth (to a child)                                 look not back
4022   old woman                      É ´ß
                                      ±               4042   upper side of it                          ß
                                                                                                      ¢ ó	¢
4023   my husband                       	 à¥
                                         ô             4043   downside of it, under it                 Šç Ç
                                                                                                     ¢ ô	 ¢
4024   man of old age                  ¢ Ë
                                        ¼              4044   rain of stones                        ‰  Ç
                                                                                                     ò ´	
4025   people of this house      ª¦’ó¦Šòÿ¢È
                                 	                    4045   pp. piled up                          ®Ôü÷
                                                                                                         
4026   departed                         È
                                       ¤ÿ¯                     (layer on layer)
                                                        4046   pp. marked                            ¨  
                                                                                                     ˆ ÷ È÷
4027   fear, alarm                    ¸
                                      É ÌÂÂó¦
                                                        4047   far off, far away                        ¾à¥
                                                                                                           	
4028   one who often turns              Ž÷
                                       ¤ ü                                                          ¸ï°
                                                         Ruku'       7     v: 15        7
       to God again and again
4029   cannot be averted,        ®ÌÂÉ Â÷ ã
                                 Ç ®   Š              12th Part       1/2       ¥ ® 	 ÷È ³
                                                                                  ¨¡È ú÷¢ Â Ä æÐû
       unavoidable
                                                        4048   ap. most loving,                       ® ®È
                                                                                                      Æ ÌÂÉ Â
4030   grieved, distressed              žÇ
                                        Š 	
                                                               fountain of love (vn.:         K Â)
                                                                                              ®È
4031   straitened                      È Ó
                                       ¼¢
                                                        4049   we do not understand                   Š ÷
                                                                                                      þì’èû¢
4032   in heart                          ßÈ
                                        ¢ Ì°¯
                                                        4050   your family                            Ø È
                                                                                                     îŒ ÿ°
4033   dreadful, distressful          Ðß
                                     ¤ 	 
                                                        4051   we (would have) stoned                 ü  È
                                                                                                     ¢ø³°
4034   they came rushing            È  
                                    Àß 
                                                        4052   family                                  ˆ ÿ°
                                                                                                       Ö È
4035   my guests                      	 Ó
                                       è
                                                        4053   more honorable                            Ä
                                                                                                          ߢÈ
4036   a right minded man         ËM ˆ ³°
                                 ¾ 	 ° ò È
                                                                                                            



Surah 12: Yousuf                                  165                                             Part: 12

 4054   behind back                        Â 	
                                          ¢
Ž  Û       4072    never cut off,                Ç ÌŒ ´÷ ã
                                                                                              ¯ À   Š
 4055   im. pl. watch, wait              ¦¦ì«Ì°Ê
                                            	 ¦                unfailing, unceasing
                                                        4073    ni. you be not                        
                                                                                                      î«¢Šó
 4056   watcher                             ë°
                                           ¤ 	 È
                                                        4074    doubt                                   
 Â÷
                                                                                                        ¨	
  Ruku'         8    v: 12     8           ¸ï°
 4057   brought / led (them) to             ÈÈ
                                            ®°ÌÂ¢È      4075    unabated, undiminished         Ç Œ ü÷ ã
                                                                                               ´ ì   Š
                                                         Ruku'         9     v: 14        9           ¸ï°
 4058   destination, descent                 Æ Ì°Ê
                                             ®Â
                                                        4076    ni. pl. transgress not,           ¦ä’Ø«¢Šó
                                                                                                     
 4059   pp. place to descend,             Æ ÌÂÉ ÷
                                          ®°                   be not inordinate
        place to be led to
                                                        4077    ni. pl. incline not,             ¦üï«¢Šó
                                                                                                    Š 
 4060   gift, present                        ¾°
                                              ’çÊ              lean not

 4061   pp. that which is gifted/         Æ Œ Â÷
                                          ® ç         4078    dl. two ends                          çÂ×
                                                                                                        ŠŠ
        presented
                                                        4079    some hours of night,      Ž M ó¦  ¢† óŠÉ
                                                                                          ò ô ú÷ è ±
 4062   reaped, mown                       з
                                          ¾ 	                 approaches of night

 4063   ruin, perdition, downfall           ¦¬«
                                           ¤ Ž        4080    virtues, good deeds                    ü 
                                                                                                     ©¢È·
 4064   a day of witness,           Æ  Ì÷Æ 
                                    ® ¿              4081    evils, vices                             
                                                                                                     ©¢Š Ç
        a day of testimony
                                                        4082    men of understanding             ¨	 ó ¢
                                                                                                 
 쥦ŒÂÉ
 4065   wretched, unhappy                   	 
                                             ìË
                                                        4083    pv. they were given                   ¦Œ «É
                                                                                                         çŽ ¢
        (pl.:     	 
                 –ìË¢È)                                        plenty / luxury

 4066   glad, happy (pl.:      ¡ àÇ)  àÇ
                                ¾  ¾ 	              4084    we make firm                            ¦Š
                                                                                                       ª°û
 4067   wailing, sighing                      ç±
                                              	È       4085    your heart                            È È šç
                                                                                                      ½®¦ Œ
                                                                                                      ¸ï°
 4068   sobbing                             Ž Ë
                                           ê           Ruku'        10     v: 14     10


 4069   so long as (they)              ® ÷
                                      ª÷¦È ¢                   ^      Ç  ¨ Ç
                                                                      æ É È°            `
        endure/remain
                                                               (Prophet) Joseph :
 4070   one who does / accomplishes         ¾ àŠ
                                            Æ ¢ ç
                                                                 Surah 12: Yousuf
 4071   gifts                                
                                           Å ¢ŠØß
                                                                                                                     



 Surah 12: Yousuf                                                  166                                      Part: 12

4086   eleven                                   ¾
                                             ÂÌß ·¢È             4104     pp. one whose help,           Æ ¢ È
                                                                                                           À ଠ÷
4087   vision, dream                                    ¢Ì É
                                                              °              is sought
                                                                    4105     you describe / assert         È è	
                                                                                                           ÀŒ Ы
4088   interpretation of       ®Ê ¢ ˜’ó¦Ž Ê ’˜«
                               	 ® ·Š ò Â
       events
                                                                    4106     water-drawer / carrier              È
                                                                                                                 ®Ê°¦ÈÂ
 Ruku'        1       v: 6        11                  ¸ï°          4107     let down                             DÌ®¢È
4089   a strong group                                 ˆ ¦Ðß
                                                      ¨          4108     bucket                                È
                                                                                                                    ’ó®
       im. pl. cast away /                          ·Â’×Ê
                                                       ¦
                                                                                                               ¥
                                                                                                          Ã ÂÌ¢
4090                                                                                                         ¦

                                                                    4109     O! Good luck!
       drive away
4091   will be free / alone                             ò 
                                                        Œ ¼        4110     boy (boys:      Àøã
                                                                                             Æ ¢ ’ô	 )           Æ ¢ŠôŒ
                                                                                                                  ¿ ã
4092   dark depths                                   ª¥¢ã
                                                     	 Š            4111     treasure, merchandise          ˆ  ¢ Ž
                                                                                                            ¨ß Ô¥
4093   well, pit                                        ¤
                                                         ³         4112     small, mean                         Æ ¥
                                                                                                                 ‰ ¼
4094   will find / pick up                            ’Ö쬒ô
                                                        	          4113     Dirhams,                         ÿ È
                                                                                                             ö	 ¦È°®
                                                                             silver coins of that age
       some caravan                ¨  Ò
                                   Ê °¢Èó¦ à¥
                                                                                                           ú ¾ÿ
                                                                                                            	 	 ¦È±
4095
                                                                    4114     ap. those who renounce /
       of travelers
                                                                             attach no value
4096   tomorrow, morning                                     Š
                                                          ¦¾ã           Ruku'    2       v: 14     12       ¸ï°
4097   enjoys, refreshes                                 
                                                        Þ«Â       4115     keep him honorably               ÷Â
                                                                                                            	 Ž ’ï¢È
4098   wolf                                             ¤¯
                                                         ’ŸÊ       4116     fg. made (him) yield /          ÈÈ
                                                                                                           Ì©®Â¦È°
4099   at nightfall                                     Ì	
                                                      Å ¢ ß                 entreated
                                                                    4117     fg. closed                        Š ôŠ
                                                                                                             ªìM ã
4100   they weep                                     ÀŒ ¦
                                                     È ð
                                                                    4118     doors                             
                                                                                                             §¦ ¥¢È
4101   we race / compete                             êŽ
                                                      ¦¬Èû
                              ¥ ® ú÷ ÷Â
                             ¨¡È  	 ¢ È    Ä
                                                ³          

                                                    ¸¢¥°¦ ¨¯   ¯
                                                                    4119     come on, O you               îóŠ 
                                                                                                               ª ÿ
 12th Part

4102   made up                                          Ç
                                                    ªóŠ          4120     (I seek) refuge in Allah,      Ê ¦È¯¢ 
                                                                                                            … à÷
                                                                             Allah forbid!
4103   most fitting, pretty                           ò ø³
                                                      ˆ 	         4121     fg. tore                              ¾Š
                                                                                                                 Ì© ë
                                                                                                              



 Surah 12: Yousuf                                         167                                           Part: 12

4121a   his shirt
                                          
                                            Ð Š
                                           þ 	øë              Ruku'     4      v: 6       14           ¸ï°

4122    dl. they met                             Š
                                                ¢è’ó¢È     4140    prison                               ú Ç
                                                                                                          ´	
4123    her husband                            ÿ¾Ç
                                              ¢         4141    two young men                         ÀŠ
                                                                                                          Ê ¢¬ç
4124    near, at                                  ¦¾óŠ     4142    I press / squeeze         ° ´ ¸    Â	
                                                                                                         ÐߢÈ
                                                                    (to get juice)
4125    what is recompense for?            ³÷
                                         É ¦Ä ¢          4143    breads                                 Ä»
                                                                                                          ¦ ¦
4126    pv. be imprisoned       À « ²    ú´
                                            È         4144    diverse, sundry (lords)         ÀŒ  è¬
                                                                                                    È ëŠ ÷
4127    pv. is torn                               Œ
                                                  ¾ë        4145    pv. will be crucified,              ¤Š
                                                                                                         ôÐ
4128    before / front                            ¦ë
                                                 òŒ                (cross:      ¤ ôÏ
                                                                                  	  )
4129    behind / back                             ¥®
                                                 ÂÉ        4146    one who is saved / released            «û
                                                                                                           Ç ¢
                                              ¸ï°
                                                                                               ú üÇ Þ ¥
                                                                                                Ž	  Ԏ
 Ruku'       3        v: 9      13
                                                            4147    few years

4130    women                                  ¨ û
                                               Æ  Ȏ          Ruku'     5      v: 7       15           ¸ï°

4131    fg. seeks to seduce                   ®Ê  «
                                              É Â¦        4148    pl. cows, kine (sr.:     ¨Š © Š
                                                                                             Æ Âì¥) Ç ¦Âì¥
4132    slave-boy                                UŠç        4149    pl. fat     (sg:    ú øÇ
                                                                                         	  )         ÌÀ¢ 	
                                                                                                            øÇ
4133    inspired, (settled firmly)            æäË
                                                         4150    seven                                  ÞÇ
                                                                                                            ¦
4134    cushioned couch                         ˜Š ¬÷
                                                †ð        4151    pl. lean                          » ´ß
                                                                                                      Ç ¢ 	
4135    knife                                  ü ðÇ
                                              ¢O 	        4152    pl. dry                            È¥ 
                                                                                                     ©¢ Ž¢
4136    exalted, astonished                   È ¦
                                              ÀÂ’ï¢È      4153    you interpret / answer            È Â¦
                                                                                                      ÀÌÂ à«
4137    dignity is for Allah!        … ·
                                     Ê Ê ȳ¢             4154    confused /              ¿
                                                                                            Ç ¢Šô·¢ÈÉ ¢ Ó¢È
                                                                                                       ªä
                                                                    madly dreams
        How perfect is Allah!
4138    you blamed me                           Žü¬ ó
                                              üøŒ      4155    remembered, recollected                 Š ®¦
                                                                                                          ÂïM Ê
4139    he proved             ¿ ´ ¸    öÐ ¬ ¦
                                          àÇÊ         4156    after long time                   
  É à
                                                                                                      ¨÷¢ ¾ ¥
        consistent, he abstained                            4157    you (will) cultivate             È ßÈ «
                                                                                                     À °Ä
                                                                                                                   



Surah 12: Yousuf                                         168                                           Part: 13

4158    as usual                                  ¥¢ ®
                                                 ¢ÈÈ          4172   ap. hosts, entertainers            ú Ž ÷
                                                                                                          ó	Äü
4158a   and (the harvests)    ö« з øç
                               ¾  ¢ Š                   4173   young men                               ç
                                                                                                            À¢¬	
        that you reap, then what you reap 
                                                               4174   their money / goods               ¬ß Ô¥
                                                                                                    ö  ¢ Ž
4159    you preserve              À ü	 «
                                  È Ð¸
                                                               4175   saddle bags                           ·°
                                                                                                          ¾¢ Ê
4160    pv. will have abundant water          ªä
                                              É ¢ 
                                                               4176   we bring our measure                   ¬ û
                                                                                                           ’ò’ð
4161    they will press,                À Â	
                                        È ÌÂ Ðà
        squeeze to get oil and juice                           4177   what more can we desire?              äû÷
                                                                                                          	 ¦¢
                                              ¸ï°
 Ruku'       6       v: 7       16                             4178   we will bring food                    Â øû
                                                                                                             	 
4162    what was the case / matter?           ¾¥ ÷
                                              É ¢¢          4179   a full camel's load            ॠò ï
                                                                                                    ‰ 	 Š Š
4163    open, manifest,                θ ·
                                         Ð                 4180   solid oath, firm covenant             ì ¯ ÷
                                                                                                           ¢† 	
        came to light
4164    I betrayed not                   »¢ ó
                                       ú ÈöŠ             4181   I cannot avail (you)         ß ü¢ ÷
                                                                                                 ú Ž’ãÉ¢
                                                                      against
 ^ Part:13                  ¥Â ¢             ³
                            É  ¥É¢÷Â Ä `
                                                               4182   desire, need, want                   ¨³ ·
                                                                                                           †  ¢
4165    I do not exculpate /          É ÂÉ¢
                                      ¥ ¥ ¢ ÷                  Ruku'      8     v: 11       2            ¸ï°
        absolve / acquit
                                                                                                           à ¦
                                                                                                               ¦



                                         ¨° ÷¢
                                      Æ È ¢ È
                                                                                                                       ¦

                                                               4183   lodged, took to stay
4166    enjoins, incites              ° ¿ ¦



4167    I will single (him) out,       Î	  ¢
                                        ô¼¬ÇÈ               4184   drinking cup                         ¨ ìÇ
                                                                                                           † ¢Š 	
        I will take (him) specially                            4185   saddle bag                            ˆ ·È
                                                                                                            ò °
4168    of high standing                      ú ð÷
                                               	            4186   O! caravan                    Âà ¬¢
                                                                                                     	 ’ó¦¢ È
4168a   fully trusted                           ú ÷¢
                                                 	 È         4187   ap. thieves            ¼ ° ²   È Œ Ê ¢
                                                                                                        À ë° Ç
4169    treasures of earth          ˜ ú Ä»
                                 µÌ°Š’ó¦ Ÿ	¦               4188   they turned                             ô ¢
                                                                                                           ¦Œ ¦’ëÈ
 Ruku'       7       v: 8       1             ¸ï°             4189   what is?                               ¦È ¢
                                                                                                              ¯÷
4170    furnished, provided                    ij
                                                            4190   you miss, you find lost           À ¾	
                                                                                                        È ÌÂ ì’è«
4171    provisions                                 ³
                                               ±¢            4191   we miss / have lost                   ¾	
                                                                                                             ì’èû




                                                                                                           168
                                                                                                             



Surah-13: Ar-Ra'd                                      169                                          Part: 13

4192   drinking cup                        ¸ Ï
                                           È ¦             4210   I complain, I expose (grief)          ð ¢
                                                                                                       ¦Œ ËÈ
4193   a camel load                   ॠò 	
                                     ‰ 	 Œ ø·           4211   my grief / emotion / distress            °¥
                                                                                                           O
4194   guarantor, bound                      ö ß±
                                              	 È          4212   im. pl. inquire, ascertain        ÈÈ
                                                                                                   ¦  ¸«
4195   began, started                           ¢¾¥
                                                È          4213   soothing Mercy of Allah         … ¬°
                                                                                                    Ê ¦Ê ÌÂÈ
4196   luggage, baggage                      ß ¢
                                            ¨	 ÌÂÈ          4214   small, scanty                        ³÷
                                                                                                       ¨¢ Ä
       (sr.:       Æ ¢ Ê )
                     ß                                      4215   im. bestow in charity               ¾Ð«
                                                                                                      ̼  
4197   we planned                             û ï
                                             ¢¾	           4216   preferred / chosen you              È Š¦
                                                                                                        ½Â¯      ¦




4198   king's law                  îôø ú ®
                                   	 	  ’ó¦Ž Ê           4217   no reproach, no fear           ¤Â« ó
                                                                                                    Ž ’°¢Š
 Ruku'         9      v: 11    3            ¸ï°              Ruku'       10     v: 14      4       ¸ï°
4199   they (sat) apart, in privacy         Њ 
                                         ¦ ô»             4218   you think me a dotard,            À ¾Š «
                                                                                                      Ê ÌÂ üè
4200   to confer, to counsel                   ´û
                                              ¢
Ž                  you think that I have
                                                                    old age madness

4201   I will not go forth /             ¢ ó
                                        ¬ ¥ÈúŠ            13th Part        1/4         É ÂÉ¢ Â Ä Þ¥°
                                                                                           ¥ ¥¢ ÷      ³
       leave / move
4202   you failed                            ¬ Âç
                                           ö’× Š          4219   throne                                 ß
                                                                                                        ³Â
4203   caravan                                    ß
                                               Â	          4220   desert                                 Â ¥
                                                                                                           Ê ¾
4204   made up, contrived                   ó Ç
                                          ªŠ              4220a. im. join   / unite (me with)          ¸¢
                                                                                                        ê	 ’óÈ
4205   turned away                      ß ó «
                                      ú              4221   with them                                 ¾ó
                                                                                                        öŽ  Š
                                                             4222   you desired strongly            ª ·
                                                                                                     Ï 
4206   Alas! my grief!                  è È¢
                                          Ç¢                 Ruku'       11     v: 11      5       ¸ï°
4207   became white                        Ô ¦
                                         ª ¥Ê            4223   overwhelming, extensive,            Ë ã
                                                                                                       ¨	 ¢Š
4208   you will not cease          Âï š
                                    Œ ’À«¦ ¬’è«               covering

       remembering
                                                             4224   men                                 † ¢ Ê
                                                                                                         ³°
4209   of ruined health,                    Ó·
                                           ¢               Ruku'       12      v: 7      6       ¸ï°
       extremely ill




                                                                                                        169
                                                                                                         



Surah-13: Ar-Ra'd                                   170                                          Part: 13

           ^   ¾ß ó¦ ɨ° `
                    Â È Ç                                 4240   raises, brings up                  ž	
                                                                                                    Œ Ìü
                    Thunder                               4241   pl. clouds                        ¸Ç
                                                                                                 §¢ 
         Surah 13: Ar-Ra'd                                4242   pl. heavy                             ì¯
                                                                                                     ¾¢Š 	
       pillars, supports                   ¾øß
                                           

                                                                                                   ¾Â
                                                                                                    ß ó¦
4225
                                                          4243   thunder
       (sr.:         øß
                   ®¢ 	 )
                                                          4244   mighty in prowess,      ¾ ¸ø ¾ ¾Ë
                                                                                         Ê ¢ 	 ’ó¦ 	 
4226   spread out, stretched out              
                                              ¾÷                 severe in avenging

4227   different tracts / regions           ÞØë
                                            Š	           4245   ap. one who ¶ ² §    ÖÇ ¥
                                                                                       ˆ 	 ¢
                                                                 stretches
4228   neighboring,                   °Â ´¬÷
                                    ©¦È Ê ¢            4246   dl. his two palms / hands           þ èï
                                                                                                     	 M Š
       bordering each other
4229   palm trees growing out            ÀÏ
                                         Æ ¦ ü	         4247   mouth                      ç ç ç
                                                                                           	 Œ ¢Š
       of a single roots                                  4248   shadows                              ôÛ
                                                                                                    ¾¢Š 	
       plam trees each                 ÏÂ ã
                                    À¦ ü	  Š
                                                                                                     óÇ
                                                                                                   ªŠ¢
4230
                                                          4249   flew
       growing on its own roots
4231   shackles, yokes                      ô¢
                                          ¾¢Š ’ãÈ         4250   valleys, channels,                 ¨® ¢
                                                                                                    ˆ Ê ÌÂÈ
                                                                 water courses
       necks                                ü¢
                                          ¼¢ßÈ
                                                                                                  òø¬ ¦
                                                                                                  Š  ·Ê
4232
                                                          4251   bore
       exemplary (punishments)              ô°÷
                                          ©¢Š Œ
                                                                                                     ò Ç
                                                                                                     ˆ 
4233
                                                          4252   torrent, water course
 Ruku'         1       v: 7   7        ¸ï°
                                                                 foam, scum                           ¾¥±
                                                                                                     ¦ È
                                          Ò ä«
                                           	 
                                                          4253
4234   fall short
                                                                 swelling on top                      ¥ °
                                                                                                     ¢Ž¦È
                                            à¬÷
                                          ¾¢ 
                                                          4254
4235   Highly Exalted
                                                                 they smelt / kindle             À ¾	  
                                                                                                 È ÌÂ ë
                                       
  ÷
                                       漬È
                                                          4255
4236   one who hides
                                                                 ornaments                           ¨ ·
                                                                                                     ˆ ’ô	
                                          §° Ç
                                        Æ Ê ¢
                                                          4256
4237   one who walks          § ° ²

                                                                 refuse, scum                         è³
                                                                                                    Å ¢Š 
                                          ¦ìà÷
                                        ©¢O  
                                                          4257
4238   guards / watchmen
       (in succession) following                          4258   remains, tarries, lasts          ®ð
                                                                                                  Œ Œ ø
       one another
                                                           Ruku'        2     v: 11    8       ¸ï°
4239   protector, defender                      Â
                                              ¾¦È




                                                                                                    170
                                                                                                                        



Surah-14: Ibrahim                                      171                                                 Part: 13

 13th Part                     ¥ ¥¢ ÷      ³
                               É ÂÉ¢ Â Ä æÐû           4276   perpetual, everlasting                          	¦È
                                                                                                                   öŸ ®
4259    they join / unite                 À ô	
                                          È Œ Ð          4277   end, final, (outcome)                             ß
                                                                                                                   R’ì
4260.   they repel / overcome            È  È
                                         ÀÌÂ É °¾         4278   they rejoice                            À ·
                                                                                                            È  ’è
        (vn.:         °®
                     ¦È È )                                   Ruku'          5      v: 6        11         ¸ï°

4261    final attainment of the          ¾ ¦ß
                                       °¦ ó¦’ì           4279   makes to pass away, effaces              ¦¸ø
        (eternal) home
                                                             4280   original book, source                  ¬ð ¿¢
                                                                                                         §¢	 ’ó¦N É
4262    excellent                               öû
                                                 àŽ               of ordinance, basis of book

4263.    they break / violate            À Ôì
                                         È  Œ ü        4281   to reduce, to curtail                        ’ì
                                                                                                                Îû
 Ruku'          3       v: 8      9      ¸ï°                4282   borders, sides, outlying parts           »¦ ’×È
                                                                                                               Â ¢
4264    set at rest, get satisfaction       	 ’Ø
                                           ú ø «             4283   none can put back / reverse             ì ÷ ó
                                                                                                           ¤O à ¢Š
4265    joy, bliss                           9Œ
                                                ×             Ruku'          6      v: 6        12         ¸ï°

                                             ÂÇ
                                           Ì© 
                                                                                            È Ç
                                                                            ö	ÿ¦Â¥Ê¤ ɨ° `
4266    pv. cause to be moved /
                                                                       ^
        passed
4267    pv. cause to be torn                 àØë
                                           ª O Œ                               Abraham
                                                                      Surah 14: Ibrahim
4268    pv. made to speak                      ôï
                                              öO Œ
4269    disaster, sudden calamity           ¨ß° ë
                                            ˆ  Ê ¢Š         4284   days of Allah                            … ¿ ¢
                                                                                                             Ê ¦Ê ¢È
                                                                                                           ¸ï°
4270    cause to settle, befall               ò¸«
                                              N             Ruku'          1      v: 6        13

 Ruku'          4        v:5     10      ¸ï°                 13th Part          3/4       É  É ÷
                                                                                           ¥Â¥¢¢     Ä ¸¢¥°¦
                                                                                                         ³         ¨¯   
   ¯




4271    I gave respite                     ª ô ¢
                                            Š ÷È
                                                             4285   our ways / paths                             üô¦Ç
                                                                                                                ¢Š 
4272    im. pl. name (them)                     øÇ
                                             ¦ 
                                                                    (sr.:        ˆ Ž )
                                                                                 ò ¦Ç
4273    harder, more painful                  êË¢
                                              È
                                                             4286   the hurt you caused us,                 û ø¬ ¯
                                                                                                           ¢ È ¦          ¦




4274    protector, defender                   ¼Â
                                              Ç ¦È                  you are persecuting us

4275    food, fruits                          òï¢
                                              ŒŒÉ             Ruku'          2      v: 6        14         ¸ï°




                                                                                                               171
                                                                                                         



Surah-15: Al-Hijr                                    172                                        Part: 14

4287   disappointed, frustrated            §»
                                           È ¢             Ruku'      4       v: 6     16      ¸ï°

4288   tyrant, enemy (of truth)                üß
                                            ¾Ž          4307   caused (their people)               ô·¢
                                                                                                   ¦N  È
                                                                  to alight
4289   pv. made to drink                  ìÈ           4308   house of perdition /         ° ¦ ° ®
                                                                                               Ê ¦ ’ó¦È ¦È
4290   liquid pus                            ¾Ï
                                          ¾	                   desolation

4291   sips in gulps                     ¸Â´¬
                                         É            4309   befriending, making friends         ô»
                                                                                                    ¾¢Š 	

       (vn.:       ¨ß ³
                   ˆ   )                               4310   dl. constant in courses          ú ¦Ÿ ®
                                                                                                   Ž 	¦È
4292   will not be near                  ® ð ó
                                         É ¢Š ¢Š         4311   you cannot count /             Ð « ó
                                                                                              ¦ ¸¢Š
                                                                  compute
4293   swallows                            Œ Ê 
                                           â È            Ruku'      5       v: 7     17      ¸ï°

4294   ashes                                  ÷°
                                            ®¢ È          4312   im. save me,                      üü ¦
                                                                                                  Ž¦³É
                                                                  keep me away
       fg. became hard, furious           ¾¬ ¦
                                        Ì© ËÊ
                                                                                                 ªð ¢
                                                                                                  üŠ ÇÈ
4295
                                                           4313   I (have) settled
       stormy day                   æÏ ß ¿ 
                                    
 	 ¢ Ç 
                                                                                                       ®Â
                                                                                                       Ç ¦È
4296
                                                           4314   valley
       they came forth, appeared              ±Â¥
                                           ¦ÌÂÉ  
                                                                                          ¸ ± ¯Âã
                                                                                          Ç Ì°È ÌÄÊ Ž Š
4297
                                                           4315   without cultivation
       following                               ফ
                                              ¢ 
                                                                                                   ¿Â¸÷
                                                                                                   Æ  
4298
                                                           4316   pp. made sacred / inviolable
       you can avail, avert               Àü÷
                                          È ä
                                                                                                     «
                                                                                                   ÌĎ  
4299
                                                           4317   incline, yearn towards
       we be impatient / rage              ü ij
                                          ¢ߎ 
                                                                                                       ¦ï
                                                                                                        	
4300
                                                           4318   old age
4301   place to escape, refuge             ¸÷
                                        Î	               Ruku'      6       v: 7     18      ¸ï°
                                       ¸ï°
 Ruku'         3       v: 9    15
                                                           4319   stare in horror               Î
                                                                                                 ¼Ì«
       ap. helper, one who responds      ­Ž ÷
                                         Æ ÂÐ
                                                                                                 ú àØ ÷
                                                                                                  	 	  
4302
                                                           4320   they run in fear
       root                                ò ¢
                                           ˆ ÏÈ
                                                                                                     	Ž ÷
                                                                                                   àü’ì
4303
                                                           4321   heads upraised
       firmly fixed                        ª¥ ¯
                                            Ž¢Š
                                                                                                      ×
                                                                                                   »Š
4304
                                                           4322   eyes, gaze
       branch                               ¸ç
                                            Æ Š
                                                                                                     ¾  ¢
                                                                                                    ¨ 	’çÈ
4305
                                                           4323   hearts
4306   uprooted                            °¬ ¦
                                         ªM³Ê




                                                                                                    172
                                                                                                             



Surah-15: Al-Hijr                                     173                                             Part: 14

       (sr.:          šç
               ®¦ Œ )                                 4337   pv. intoxicated                      ÂðÇ
                                                                                                      Ì© O 
4324   vacant, a gaping void                  ÿ
                                            Æ ¦           4338   pp. those who are             È °¸ 
                                                                                                 ÀÌÂÉ  È÷
4325   pv. will be changed                  ¾¾¦«
                                            É                   bewitched / enchanted
                                                                                                   ¸ï°
                                                             Ruku'       1       v: 15      1
4326   pp. those bound / tied in         ú Š ÷
                                          ûŽ ì          4339   constellations, big stars             ³ Â¥
                                                                                                        ¢ ÌÂ 
4327   chains, fetters                      è ¢
                                          ®¢Š ÏÈ           4340   stole the hearing        ¼ ° ²   È  ÇÊ
                                                                                                        ¼Â¬ ¦
4328   shirts, garments                  ò ¥ ÂÇ
                                         Œ Ž¦            4341   fiery comet                          § Ë
                                                                                                        Æ ¢ 	
4329   pitch, tar                           ÂØë
                                          À¦ 	 Š           4342   we spread out                          û ¾÷
                                                                                                         ¢Ì® 
 Ruku'         7       v: 11   19       ¸ï°
                                                            4343   mountains                            	 ¦È È
                                                                                                       Ç Â°
 ^ Part:14                          °       ³
                               ¢ø¥É  Ä `           4344   in due balance                         ±÷
                                                                                                       ÀÌÂÉ 
                                                            4345   those which fecundate / impregnate
          ^                 È Ç
               ´	¸’ó¦ ɨ° `                              ¶ë ó
                                                                    	 ¦ Š
         The Rocky Tract                                     Ruku'       2       v: 10      2      ¸ï°
         Surah 15: Al-Hijr                                  4346   sounding clay,                       ÐÏ
                                                                                                      ¾¢ ’ô
                                                                   crackling clay
                                              ø¥°
                                             ¢ É
                                                                                                   ü ÷ œø·
                                                                                                ÀÈ ‰ 
4330   often
                                                            4347   dark transmuted
4331   beguile, delude                         þ
                                               	 ’ô              mud, molded mud

       (vn.:         ¤
                   Æ ¢ ’óÊ)                                4348   (fire of) scorching wind                 ø
                                                                                                         ¿ Ç
4332   why not                                ÷ ó
                                             ¢ Š          4349   portion, class                         Æ Ä
                                                                                                           ³
4333   factions, sects                       ÞË
                                              	                  (pl.:     Ä ¢
                                                                                 ¦ ³È )
                                                                                                   ¸ï°
4334   we make it traverse,½ ¾ ²        îô
                                         Œ Èû           Ruku'       3       v: 19      3

       we make way, we creep into                           4350   pl. those in peaceful security           ü÷
                                                                                                         úŽ	 ¡
4335   they kept on (doing),                    ôÛ
                                             ¦N Š         4351   grudge, hidden sense of injury           Kã
                                                                                                            ò	
       they continued
                                                                   couches                                °ÂÇ
                                                                                                          Æ 
                                        À ³Â
                                        È   à
                                                            4352
4336   they ascends / climb




                                                                                                         173
                                                                                                                  



Surah-16: An-Nahl                                      174                                               Part: 14

       (sr.:        Ž  )
                   Â ÂÇ                                      4371   those who read the signs            ú øÇ ÷
                                                                                                         	  ¬
4353   ap. pl. facing each other         ú ô¥ ì¬÷
                                          	 Ž¢Š          4372   highway                           	  ˆ Ž
                                                                                                     ö ì÷ ò ¦Ç
4354   toil, fatigue                          
                                            ¤Ðû              4373   dwellers of wood          ¨ð ˜ § ¸ ¢
                                                                                              	 Š Š’ó¦É ¢ ÏÈ
4355   im. inform                                ¦û
                                               ’ž          4374   open highway,                       ú ¦÷ ¿ ÷¤
                                                                                                        ‰ Ž Ç ¢ Ê
4356   those who are afraid               À ôŽ Â
                                          È Œ ³È                  plain to see
                                                                                                        ¸ï°
                                                              Ruku'         5       v: 19      5
4357   to fear, feel uncomfortable,          ò³Â
                                             ˆÈ             4375   they hew / carve          © ¬ À   È ¸ü
                                                                                                          À ¬	
       afraid
4358   then of what                            ö¦ç
                                                ŽŠ          4376   oft-repeated                               û °÷
                                                                                                             Ž¢Š
4359   those who despair /                 ú Øû ë
                                            	 Ž¢Š          4377   strain not, cast not                 À¾ø« ó
                                                                                                         M   ¢Š
       despond                                               4378   im. lower, keep gentle,                  è ¦
                                                                                                           Ò	 »Ê
4360   discouraged, despaired                  Öüë
                                               Š Š                 spread low

4361   what business is?                   »÷
                                       ¤’Ø ¢              4379   wings, sides, arms                       Æ ¢
                                                                                                             ¬ ü³
4362   those who stay behind              ú Â¥ ã
                                           Ž Ž¢Š                 (pl.:        ¨¸ü ¢
                                                                                 ˆ  Ž³È )
 Ruku'         4       v: 16   4        ¸ï°
                                                             4380   those who make                      ú øȬ ÷
                                                                                                         	 Ê ’ì
4363   uncommon people,            À Š ÷ ¿ ë
                                   È ÌÂ ðü Æ Š                divisions
       unknown people
                                                             4381   parts, bits                            ú Ôß
                                                                                                            	 	
4364   they doubt                            Â
                                          ÀÌÂ ¬ø
                                                              14th Part            1/4             ¢ É  Ä Þ¥°
                                                                                                    ø ¥° ³
4365   im. travel by night                     Â ¢
                                               Ž ÇÈ         4382   im. proclaim, promulgate,                ¾ ¦
                                                                                                           ̸ ÏÊ
4366   im. pl. go, take a start               Ô¦
                                           ¦ ÷É                 expound

4367   pp. would be cut-off               ¸Ø
                                          Æ Œ ’ì÷          4383   that which is certain, death                 ì
                                                                                                              ú	 
                                                                                                        ¸ï°
                                       ¸ ó
                                    À Ԓè«¢Š
                                                              Ruku'         6       v: 20      6
4368   ni. pl. do not me



4369
       disgrace
       by (oath) your life !               È  øàóŠ
                                           ½Â 
                                                                            ^       ü È Ç
                                                                                ò¸ó¦ ɨ° `
                                                                                 The Bees
4370   time of sunrise                   ú 	 Ž ÷
                                          ëÂÌ                   Surah 16: An-Nahl




                                                                                                             174
                                                                                                                  



Surah-16: An-Nahl                                           175                                           Part: 14

                                                                         ap. ploughing, cleaving           » ÷
                                                                                                            	 ¦
                                                   ¨è û
                                                   ˆ Š ’Ø
                                                                  4398
4384   semen-drop
       containing sperms                                          4399   that                                      ¢
                                                                                                                 ÌÀÈ
4385   one who disputes                          	 
                                                ö л             4400   shakes                               ¾ ø«
                                                                                                               	 
4386   warmth, warm clothing                        ®
                                                  Æ Ì»Ê           4401   landmarks, signposts               ÷ ôß
                                                                                                          ©¢ ¢Š 
4387   pl. you drive them back                 À ¸Ž«
                                               È  Â         4402   when                                   À ¢
                                                                                                                È ¢È
       to home in evening
                                                                   Ruku'        2    v: 12       8       ¸ï°
       (vn.:         ¨· °¤
                     ˆ  ¦È Ê)
                                                                  4403   refuse to know,                    Æ Âðü
                                                                                                            ¨ 	 ÷
4387a pl. you      lead them in              À ·
                                             È  ÂÈ«                 given to denial
       morning for pasture
                                                                  4404   no doubt, assuredly               ¿Â³ ó
                                                                                                           È   ¢Š
4388   horses                                      ò »
                                                   ˆ 
                                                                  4405   fables, stories                   Â × Ç¢
                                                                                                            	 ¢ È
4389   mules (sr.:         ˆ ä)
                           ò¥                      ¾ ä¥
                                                   Æ ¢ Ž
                                                                  4406   burdens     (sr.:   Æ Ì±Ê )
                                                                                             °Â                ±¢
                                                                                                             °¦È ÌÂÈ
4390   donkeys, asses                             Â ø·
                                                   	           Ruku'        3    v: 4        9       ¸ï°
       (sr.:        Æ ¢ 	 )
                    ° ø·                                          4407   building                               ¥
                                                                                                              À¢ü
4391   right way,                         ò ¦È ¾ Š
                                          Ž Ž ó¦ Ðë          4408   foundations (sr.:      ¨¾ß ë ¾	 ë
                                                                                                Æ  	 ¢Š )  ߦ Š
       straight way
4392   that which turns aside /                     	¢
                                                   Ÿ ³           4409   fell down                              »
                                                                                                                
       deviating                                                  4410   roof                                 ’ì
                                                                                                             æÇ
 Ruku'         1      v: 9            7       ¸ï°
                                                                  4411   im. you disputed / opposed       À ë Ì«
                                                                                                          È N¢ 
4393   you pasture cattle                     À ø È«
                                              È  Ê 
                                                                  4412   ap. pl. those who do                 øó Û
                                                                                                            	 	¢Š
4394   colors (sr.:          Æ Š)
                             ˗                   ˢ
                                                  Æ ¦ ’óÈ               wrong (sinful)

4395   fresh                                         Â×
                                                   ¢
Ž Š          4413   persons pure / free from filth      ú ¦×
                                                                                                              ŽŠ
4396   pl. you bring forth /                  ³Ž 
                                           ¦ ¼¬È«          4414   encompassed, encircled               ¼·
                                                                                                              È ¢
       extract                                                     Ruku'        4    v: 9       10       ¸ï°
4397   ornament                                    ¨ ·
                                                   ˆ ’ô	         4415   solemn oaths                    ø¢ ¾ ³
                                                                                                       À¢ È  




                                                                                                             175
                                                                                                                  



Surah-16: An-Nahl                                      176                                               Part: 14

 Ruku'       5      v: 6       11     ¸ï°                   4432   expound, utter lie                       Ы
                                                                                                            æ	
4416   those who possess /          Ä À òÿ¢
                                    Ž ’ïO ó¦Š  È           4433   tongues                                  ¨üÈ ¢
                                                                                                             ˆ Ê ’óÈ
       know the message / admonition
4417   scriptures, writings                       ¥±
                                                 ÂÉ                (sr.:       Æ ¢ 	)
                                                                                À Èó
       (revealed before Qur'aan)                             4434   those who will be                    À × ÷
                                                                                                         È Œ ’è
                                                                    hastened on (into it),
 14th Part       1/2            ø ¥° ³
                               ¢ É  Ä æÐû                     those neglected
                                                              Ruku'         8       v: 5         14      ¸ï°
4418   cause (earth) to swallow         æÈ 
                                         Ê ¼              4435   refuse, excretion, dung                  ªç
                                                                                                             Æ Š
4419   journeys, midst of goings              ¤ôì«
                                               NŠ          4436   milk                                          ü¦ó
                                                                                                                 ¢Š
4420   gradually, moments of alert       »¼«
                                         Ç                4437   palatable,                                äŸ Ç
                                                                                                             ¢ 	¢
4421   they incline / turn around              šè¬
                                              ¦ Š              pleasant to swallow

4422   pl. low, humblest manner        À Â	 ®
                                       È Ì »¦È             4438   strong drinks                            Š 
                                                                                                             ÂðÇ
 Ruku'       6      v: 10      12     ¸ï°                   4439   bees (sr.      ˆ Š ¸
                                                                                   ¨ô û      )                ò û
                                                                                                              ˆ ¸
4423   constantly, perpetually             ¦Ï Â
                                          ¢	 ¦È             4440   submissively, humbly,                     ó¯
                                                                                                              † ŒÉ
                                                                    smoothly
       pl. you cry for help            À Š
                                       È ÌÂ  ´«
                                                                                                             ¾¯ ¢
                                                                                                             È È Ì°È
4424
                                                             4441   most abject, feeble (age)
       darkens                            ® ÷
                                         ¦  È
                                                                                                            ó ðó
                                                                                                           ¢ŠŠ 	
4425
                                                             4442   so that nothing
4426   full of wrath, wrath,               	 Š
                                          ö Üï               Ruku'         9       v: 5         15      ¸ï°
       in wardly inward grief
                                                             4443   pv. are favored, blessed                   Œ Ԍ
                                                                                                            ¦ô ç
                                             ¬
                                       Ã °¦
                                          ¦

4427   hides himself
                                                             4444   ap. those who throw back /                ®°
                                                                                                            ÌÄO ¡È
4428   keeps, retains                   îÈ
                                         Ê ø                    hand over
4429   disgrace, contempt                         ÿ
                                               À          4445   sons                                        ú ü¥
                                                                                                                 Ž
4430   buries, hides                           ²¾
                                               N          4446   grand sons                                ¾è·
                                                                                                             ¨ Š 
4431   dust, soil                               «
                                              §¦                  (sr.:        	  )
                                                                                ¾ è·
 Ruku'       7      v: 10      13     ¸ï°                   4447   ni. pl. do not           § ° µ   ¦ÂÔ«¢Š
                                                                                                           ¥Ž ó




                                                                                                             176
                                                                                                                       



Surah-17: Bani-Israa'eel                                   177                                              Part: 15
       coin / invent / strike                                     Ruku'       11        v: 7      17       ¸ï°
4448   a man (slave) who                 ï ô ÷ ¾ ß
                                        ¢† Œ ø ¦ ¦        4464   pv. they will be allowed          À ¦ 
                                                                                                          È ¬à¬È
       is a property of others
                                                                        to make amends / plea
4449   dumb                                       öŠ ¢
                                                   ð¥È
                                                                                   3/4          ø ¥° ³
                                                                                               ¢ É  Ä ¸¢¥°¦¨¯
¯
                     ’ð )
                    ö ¥
                                                                  14th Part
       (pl.:

4450   burden                                       Kï
                                                    òŠ           4465   explaining all                              û«
                                                                                                                   ¢¢¦	
                                                                                                           ¸ï°
                                                                                    8



4451   whithersoever, wherever                      øü ¢
                                                   ¢ È        Ruku'       12        v: 6      18


4452   sends him                                þ ³ 
                                                            4466   ratification, confirmation                ï «
                                                                                                               ¾	 
 Ruku'         10       v: 6       16        ¸ï°                4467   one who is                               † 	 Š
                                                                                                                  èï
                                                                        appointed for surety
4453   twinkling of an eye                ÂЦ ¶ ó
                                          Ž  ’ó¦Ž øŠ
                                                                 4468   to spin thread                             ¾ã
                                                                                                                   Æ Ċ
4454   between earth and sky                        
                                                    ³
                                                                 4469   untwisted strands                         ¯ð¢
                                                                                                                 ¢†¢Š ûÈ
4455   abode, rest, quiet                          üðÇ
                                                  ¢Š 
                                                                 4470   more numerous                                  ¢
                                                                                                                    9Ì°È
4456   skins                                     Æ Œ 
                                                 ® ô³
                                                                 4471   will slip                                   ¾Ä«
                                                                                                                    M Ž
       (sr.:        ¾³
                     ’ôŽ )
                                                                 4472   passes away,                   ® » À     ¾Š
                                                                                                                  èü
4457   you find light in weight            À 輬 «
                                           È N 	 È                 waste away

4458   migrate, travel                               Û
                                                  úàŠ           4473   (that which) remains /                      ¼¥
                                                                                                                    Ç ¢
                                                                        endures
4459   wool (sr.:             »Ï
                              Æ  )            ¢
                                              »¦ ÏÈ
                                                                                                           ¸ï°
4460   soft fibers                                  ¥¢
                                                  °¢ÌÂÈ          Ruku'       13    v: 11         19

                                                                 4474   foreign, i.e. other                  ø´ ¢
                                                                                                              	  ßÈ
       (sr.:         ¥È )
                    ÂÂ                                                  than Arabic
4461   hair (sr.:        ÂË
                          à )                   à ¢
                                                 °¢ ËÈ         4475   pv. is forced /                           ÁÂ ¢
                                                                                                                  È Ž ’ïÉ
4462   house hold stuff, assets,                     ¯ ¯¢
                                                    ¢†¢ŠÈ               under compulsion

       rich stuff
                                                                 4476   they chose / loved                     ¦¸¬ ¦
                                                                                                            ¦ ÇÊ
4463   places of refuge / shelter                 ûü ¢
                                                 ¢¢’ïÈ
                                                                 4477   pv. they are put to trial,                    ü	ç
                                                                                                                   ¦¬Œ




                                                                                                                177
                                                                                                               




   Surah-17: Bani-Israa'eel                              178                                              Part: 15
      subjected to persecutions
                                                               4489   numerous in man-power                 Â èû
                                                                                                           ¦ 	 
                                          ¸ï°
 Ruku'         14     v: 10      20
                                                               4490   pl. you did evil                     « Ç¢
                                                                                                         ö’˜ È
4478    garment of hunger             ¸ ´ ² ¦ó
                                      Ê  ’ó¦É ¢	          4491   they will destroy /                  ¦
                                                                                                       ¦Ì   ¬ 
 Ruku'         15      v: 9      21       ¸ï°                        will waste
4479    was not                              î ó
                                              öŠ          4492   utter destruction                    ¦«
                                                                                                          ¦ Ž¬
4480    you punished                           ¬ëß
                                             ö¦Š ¢         4493   pl. you repeated / reverted           « ß
                                                                                                          ö¾
4481    pv. you were afflicted                ¬ ë ß
                                            ö¦	                  (    ® ß ® à ®ß
                                                                          ¦Å  žÉ  žÈ ¢ )
 Ruku'         16      v: 9      22       ¸ï°                 4494   we will repeat / revert              ¢¾
                                                                                                            û ß
 ^ Part:15              Ä	ÀM¦ÈÀ¢¸¦  Ä `
                           ó         Ç       ³                 4495   prison, dungeon                  ¦ 	 
                                                                                                         з
                                                                Ruku'         1      v: 10       1    ¸ï°
        ^                          È Ç
            ò	Ÿ¦ÂÇʤŽü¥ ɨ° `                   4496   We made dark, we effaced           û ¸÷
                                                                                                        ¢ 
       The Children of Israel                                  4497   We made (it) to cling /             ü Ä¢
                                                                                                         ¢÷ ’óÈ
  Surah 17: Bani-Israa'eel                                            fastened

                                             Ã ÂÇÈ
                                                  ¢                                                        Ÿ ×
                                                                                                            	¢Š
                                                ¦

4482    took for a journey                                     4498   fate, actions, deeds

        (   Æ ¦ ÇʞĎ Ȟà ÂÇÈ)
             Â ¤ Â
                                  ¦

                                    ¢                          4499   pp. wide open, spread out        ¦Å  ü÷
                                                                                                        ° Ì
4483    the sacred             ¿ ¸ ¾Ž 
                               É ¦  ’ó¦ ´Èø’ó¦            4500   We commanded                          û ÷¢
                                                                                                           ¢Â È
        mosque,      the inviolable place of                   4501   destroyed, annihilated                 Â÷®
                                                                                                              È
        worship, the Mosque in Makkah
4484    Masjid-ul-Aqsa,           ˜ ¾Ž 
                              В늒ó¦ ´Èø’ó¦               4502   utter destruction                  Â÷ «
                                                                                                        ¦ 	 ¾
        the Mosque in Jerusalem                                4503   ap. quick-passing,                ¨ô³ ß
                                                                                                        ˆ Š Ž ¢
4485    terrible warfare                ¾ ¾Ë ² ¥
                                        
 	  Ç ’˜                which hastens away, (i.e. life)

4486    they entered                            dz
                                             ¦ ¢           4504   pp. one who is condemned          ÷ ÷ 
                                                                                                       ¢  ’À÷
4487    inmost parts of homes         °  ¾ ¾ ô»
                                      Ê ¢ ó¦È ¢Š 	          4505   pp. one who is rejected          °· 
                                                                                                      ¦Å  ¾÷
4488    turn                                     Âï
                                                ¨ Š           4506   pp. grateful, appreciated        °ð 
                                                                                                      ¦Å Œ Ì÷




                                                                                                         178
                                                                                                       



Surah-17: Bani-Israa'eel                            179                                        Part: 15

4507   pp. that which is closed       °Ü 
                                     ¦Å Œ ¸÷                  easy
                                                          4525   pp. that which is               ¨ó ô 
                                                                                                 ˆ ŠŒ ä÷
4508   preference, excellence,        Ô «
                                      † 	 ’è                  chained/shackled
       merit
                                                          4526   pp. one who is                    ÷ ô
                                                                                                  ¢ Œ ÷
4509   pp. one who is forsaken       À 
                                     † ÌŒ ¼÷                   blamed / rebuked
 Ruku'      2     v: 12     2        ¸ï°                 4527   pp. impoverished, destitute  ¦Å  ¸÷
                                                                                               °È 
4510   commanded, decreed               Ԋ
                                          ë                Ruku'        3     v: 8     3       ¸ï°

4511   Him alone                            Á ¤
                                            É ¢Ê         4528   poverty, want                      ô¤
                                                                                                  ¼¢Š ÷Ê
4512   dl. both of them               øÿ ôï
                                     ¢  ¢Š 	           4529   sin, wrong                        ˜ »
                                                                                                   †’Ø	
4513   im. do not repel / repulse           « ó
                                       ü¢Š          4530   pp. one who is helped /        ° Ð
                                                                                               ¦Å  ü÷
                                                                 aided
       generous, gracious               ø Âï
                                       ¢ Ž Š
                                                                                                  Ø ë
                                                                                               ̲¢Š È	
4514
                                                          4531   scale, balance
       submission, humility                 ¾¯
                                            OÉ
                                                                                                æ ó
                                                                                                 ’ì«¢Š
4515
                                                          4532   ni. follow not, pursue not
       dl. they brought me up /          û ¥°
                                       Ž¢È
                                                                                               Ê« ó
                                                                                               Ž ø¢Š
4516
                                                          4533   ni. walk not
       cared (nursed) me
4517   young age, childhood              äÏ
                                       ¦ 	            4534   exultantly, proudly               ·Â÷
                                                                                                  ¢  
4518   ap. repentant, those who        ú ¥ ¢
                                        Ž¦M È           4535   height                            † Œ
                                                                                                   ×
       turn to Allah in repentance
       again and again
                                                          4536   hateful                        ÿÂ 
                                                                                               ¢ ÌÂ ’ð÷
4519   im. give                             ©
                                            Ê ¦¦

                                                          4537   (any) other god             ¡¢ ȾÊ
                                                                                           » ÿ ¤
4520   ni. squander not, waste not      À¦« ó
                                      Ì°O ¢Š           4538   pv. you would be thrown /             «
                                                                                                   ì’ô
4521   to be spendthrift, to spend      ÂÀ«
                                       ¦ 	 ¦                cast

       waste-fully, wantonness
                                                          4539   chosen, preferred                   ¢
                                                                                                 èÏÈ
4522   ap. squanderers,               ú °À¦÷
                                       Ê O            Ruku'        4   v: 10      4       ¸ï°
       wasteful people                                    4540   pp. made invisible              °¬ 
                                                                                                ¦Å È÷
4523   pl. you hope                       ³
                                       ¦ «          4541   veil, coverings                    üï¦
                                                                                                   ¨	 È
4524   pp. made soft and kind /        ° È ÷
                                      ¦Å             4542   deafness, heaviness                ÂÂ
                                                                                                   ¦ ’ëÈ




                                                                                                  179
                                                                                                                 



  Surah-17: Bani-Israa'eel                               180                                               Part: 15

 15th Part         1/4       Ä	 M¦È ¢ ¦  Ä Þ¥°
                              Àó À ¸ Ç ³                       4559   im. urge, summon, arouse               ô ¢
                                                                                                           ¤	 ³È
4543   bones        (sr.:       ö ß
                                 ’Ü )          ÷ Üß
                                                ¢ ¢Š 	        4560   horses                                 ˆ 
                                                                                                             ò »
4544   decayed, fragmented                         « ç°
                                                  ¢¢Š É       4561   infantry                               ò³°
                                                                                                             ˆŽÈ
4545   new                                      ¾ ¾³
                                                 	         4562   im. share                              °Ë
                                                                                                           Ì½Ê ¢
4546   they shake (heads)                    À Ô	
                                             È  äü       4563   im. promise                                 ß
                                                                                                                ¾	
       (vn.:        µä¦
                    Æ ¢ ûÊ)                                  4564   makes it go smooth / drives            ³
                                                                                                           Ž Ä
 Ruku'         5     v: 12          5        ¸ï°
                                                                                                       ¢ ¨° «
                                                                                                  à »ÉÅ È ¢
                                                                                                     ¦

                                                               4565   another time
4547   sows dissension,                          ¹Ä
                                                 É  ü
       stirs up discords                                       4566   fierce gale, hurricane of wind        èÏ ë
                                                                                                           ¢† 	 ¢Š
4548   pl. you asserted /                        ¬ ß±
                                               öø È        4567   avenger, helper                          à ¦«
                                                                                                              ¢ Ž
       pretended
                                                                Ruku'      7      v: 10     7            ¸ï°
                                               † Ž ¸
                                                «
                                                                                                           © ï
                                                                                                           M ¾	
4549   change, transference
                                                               4568   you were near
                                              °À 
                                             ¦Å ÌŒ ¸÷
                                                                                                            úŠ
                                                                                                             ï«
4550   pp. something to
                                                               4569   you incline / lean
       be afraid of
4551   pp. written, inscribed                 °Ø 
                                             ¦Å Œ È÷        4570   we made you taste          ¼  ¯   ¢’ëÈ È
                                                                                                              ü ¯¢
4552   warning, frighten                        è «
                                               ¢† Ž ¼      4571   double                                  Ó
                                                                                                           æà	
                                                                                                         ¸ï°
4553   pp. fg. one who is cursed               ¨û à 
                                               †  ’ô÷        Ruku'      8      v: 7      8

 Ruku'         6      v: 8          6        ¸ï°              4572   going down of         Ž ø ó¦Ê ŒÉ
                                                                                            Æ Ì ½ ó®
                                                                      the sun, declination of the sun
                                               ª Âï
                                                ÷ Š
                                                                                                             Èã
                                                                                                            ê Š
4554   you honored / exalted
                                                               4573   darkness
                                               © »¢
                                               È Â È
                                                                                                              ´«
                                                                                                            ¾  
4555   you give respite,
                                                               4574   im. keep awake,
       you provide a chance
                                                                      perform Tahajjud
                                              úðü¬ ¢
                                             Š Ž·È
                                                                                                             ¨ôç û
                                                                                                             † Š 	 ¢
4556   I will seize /             ½ À ¬
                                                               4575   additional, supererogatory
       perish / destroy
4557   full, enough                             ° ç ÷
                                               ¦Å Œ        4576   state of praise / glory    ® ø ÷ ÷ ì÷
                                                                                                ¦Å  ¸ ¢ ¢Š 
4558   tempt, excite                            Ĭ ¦
                                              ̱Ž ’èÇÊ       4577   vanished, disappeared                  êÿ±
                                                                                                              È




                                                                                                            180
                                                                                                                   



Surah-18: Al-Kahf                                            181                                          Part: 15

4578   bound to vanish                             ë ÿ±
                                                  ¢†  È         4596   pp. doomed to destruction           ° ¦
                                                                                                             ¦Å ’°÷
4579   turned, withdrew                                ¢
                                                       ¦

                                                        û          4597   drives them out,            ö  è¬È
                                                                                                        ÿÄ	 
4580   side                                    û³
                                              ¤Ž¢                        removes them
                                                                   4598   rolled up, gathered up                è èó
                                                                                                               ¢† 	 Š
4581   disposition, way                       ¨ôï Ë
                                              ˆ Š 	 ¢
                                                                   4599   We divided (into parts)               ü Âç
                                                                                                               ¢’ë Š
 Ruku'        9      v: 7         9        ¸ï°
4582   ap. helper, backer                          Â Û
                                                  ¦ Ž Š         4600   at intervals                       
 ÷
                                                                                                             ®’ð
4583   spring, fountain                        ß
                                              ¢ ¦ü           4601   they fall down                  À ¼
                                                                                                          È ÌÂ 	 
4584   to gush forth, rushing out              ´ «
                                              ¦ Ž ’è           4602   in prostration,                     ¾´Ç
                                                                                                             ¦  
                                                                          fall down upon forehead
4585   you make fall             ¶ ¼ ²      Ö	 «
                                            Š ìÈ               4603   chins, faces                        À¢Š ̯È
                                                                                                                ë¢
4586   pieces (sr.       ¨è ï
                         ˆ Š È	 )                 èÈï
                                                  ¢†  	           4604   they weep             Ä ½ §     Àð
                                                                                                          È Œ ¦
4587   face to face                                 ¦ë
                                                   † ŽŠ          4605   whichever                             ÷ ¢
                                                                                                               ¢ ¢
È
4588   shining gold                          »Â ±
                                             Æ  »É               4606   ni. be not loud (voiced)              « ó
                                                                                                           ´¢Š
4589   you ascend / mount                              «
                                                   ë           4607   ni. be not low (voiced)      ç ¼« ó
                                                                                                     ª	 ¢ ¢Š
4590   to climb, to ascend                          ë°
                                                     	É           4608   in between                             ú ¥
                                                                                                                  
                                           ¸ï°
 Ruku'        10     v: 9        10
                                                                                                              îó
                                                                                                               	¯
                                                                                                                   ¦


                                                                   4609   these
       in piece and quiet                   ú ü	 ÷
                                              ø’Ø
                                                                                                              † Ž
                                                                                                               ¦Ç
4591
                                                                   4610   way / path / course
       man, mortal                                   
                                                    ÂÌ¥
                                                                                        ¦Ç
                                                                                       ò )
4592
                                                                          (pl.:
       fg. extinguished, abated                     ¦»
                                                  ª
                                                                                                                 ¾¯
                                                                                                                 ËÉ
4593
                                                                   4611   humiliation, weakness
4594   burning flame, blazing flame                 àÇ
                                                  ¦ 	           Ruku'         12    v: 11   12    ¸ï°
 15th Part         1/2      Ì 	 M È ¸ 
                            ÄÀó¦ À¢ ¦Ç     Ä
                                              ³   æÐû




4595   stingy, niggardly,                           ° ¬Š
                                                   ¦Å ë                   ^                È Ç
                                                                                 æ Šð’ó¦ ɨ° `
       miserly person                                                                  The Cave
 Ruku'        11     v: 7        11        ¸ï°
                                                                            Surah 18: Al-Kahf




                                                                                                              181
                                                                                                            



  Surah-18: Al-Kahf                                   182                                             Part: 15

                                                                   will dispose of,                       
                                                                                                        ’ž 
                                         ú °ï ÷
                                          		 ¢
                                                            4628
4612    (sb, pl) those who dwell /
                                                                   will make easy
        remain
                                                                   comfort and ease                     ìç ÷
                                                                                                       ¢† Š Â	
                                            Þ» ¥
                                             	 ¢
                                                            4629
4613    ap. one who kills /
        frets to death                                      4630   fg. rose                             àô×
                                                                                                      ª Š Š
4614    foot-steps, following after            ¯
                                             °¢Š ¦¦


                                                            4631   fg. declines, moves away            É Â¦ 
                                                                                                       °È Ä«
4615    barren dust / mound         ±Â³ ¾ àÏ
                                   ¦Å   ¦ 	           4632   right side                   ú ø © ¯
                                                                                                Ž 	 ’ó¦È ¦È
4616    the cave                         æð
                                         	  Š ’ó¦          4633   fg. set                              ¥ Âã
                                                                                                      ª Š
4617    inscription                          ö ë°
                                              	 È         4634   fg. turns away                     µÂ «
                                                                                                      É Ž ’ì
4618    a group of youths                     ˆ ¬	
                                              ¨ ç          4635   left side                ¾ øÌ © ¯
                                                                                            Ê ¢  ó¦È ¦È
4619    im. facilitate, dispose of              ÿ
                                              ’ž          4636   wide space, spacious part           Æ  ´Š
                                                                                                       ¨ ç
4620    dl. two parties                      ¥·
                                          úÄ	           4637   ap. person who                      ¾	 ÷
                                                                                                      ¦ ËÂ
4621    best able to                         ¢
                                         Ð·È                     guides / leads to right way
                                                             Ruku'       2      v: 5       14      ¸ï°
        compute (calculate)
4622    they remained                           °Ž
                                             ¦Œ¦óŠ        4638   awake                                Ûì¢
                                                                                                       ¢† ¢Š È
4623    time period                           ¾÷¢
                                             ¦  È         4639   asleep                               Æ Œ É
                                                                                                        ® ë°
 Ruku'       1      v: 12     13       ¸ï°                 4640   we give turn                         O ì
                                                                                                       ¤ôŠ û
4624    We braced / made firm                ü ¥°
                                            ¢’ØÈ          4641   ap. stretching forth                ÖÇ ¥
                                                                                                       ˆ 	 ¢
4625    enormity (in disbelief)             ØØË
                                           ¢† Š            4642   dl. its both forelegs              þ ß °¯
                                                                                                      	  ¦È Ê
4626    im. pl. you have                   ¬ Ĭ ¦
                                         ö’ó ßÊ        4643   threshold                          ¾ ÏÂ
                                                                                                       	 È
        forsaken / withdrew
4626a   to forsake ,to separate,          ¾Ä¬ ¦
                                          È  ßÊ
                                                            4644   you looked at                     ª ôצ
                                                                                                      àŠ M Ê
        to withdraw                                         4645   you turned back                     ª óÂ
                                                                                                        MÈ
4627    then take                              Âç
                                             ÌÂÉ ’˜Š        4646   in flight                             ° Âç
                                                                                                        ¦Å ¦ 	
        refuge / accommodation
                                                            4647   pv. you would be filled              	÷
                                                                                                       ª’ ô




                                                                                                       182
                                                                                                                        



Surah-18: Al-Kahf                                                 183                                          Part: 15

4648   coin, money                                      °Â
                                                       ¼Ê È             4665   fine silk                           ¾Ç
                                                                                                                 ̲ ü
4649   let him behave with                           Øô¬ó
                                                   æM Š 	            4666   thick silk brocade                ¬ ¦
                                                                                                                ¼ ¦ÇÊ
       care and courtesy                                                       inter woven with gold
4650   discover, make known                        M  	 Ì
                                                   ÀÂà                  4667   raised couches / thrones            Ÿ °¢
                                                                                                                  î	¦È È
4651   we made (it) known                             û°¢
                                                     ¢ŠßÈ            Ruku'        4    v: 9        16      ¸ï°

4651a ni. debate   not / argue not                  ° ø« ó
                                                    Ê ¢ ¢Š           4668   we surrounded                        ü è·
                                                                                                                   ¢’èŠ 
4652   debate, argument                                Â
                                                      Å ¦ 	÷           4669   dl. both                              ¬ï
                                                                                                                    ¢’ô	
 Ruku'      3      v: 5          15                  ¸ï°               4670   between the two                  ¢  Š¢Š 	
                                                                                                                 ø ó ô»
4653   refuge                                       ¾  ÷
                                                   ¦ ¸¬’ô             4671   argues, disputes                   °Ê ¸
                                                                                                                  É Â¢ 
4654   we made (him/it) heedless                      üè ¢
                                                     ¢’ôŠ ’ãÈ          4672   more powerful and honored              È
                                                                                                                      Äߢ
4655   beyond all bounds,                               ×Âç
                                                       ¢†  Œ           4673   men                                     Âèû
                                                                                                                      ¦ Š 
      exceeding bounds
 15th Part 3/4            ÄÀó À ¸¦Ç
                          Ì 	 M¦ È ¢      Ä
                                               ³          

                                                   ¸¢¥°¦ ¨¯   ¯
                                                                        4674   that it will perish                ŽÌÀÈ
                                                                                                                 ¾ ¦« ¢
4656   walls or roofs of a tent                     ® ÂÇ
                                                   ¼Ê ¦               4675   less                                   M ŠÈ
                                                                                                                      òë¢
4657   they cry / ask for                         ° ä¬
                                               ¦Œ	 È             4676   thunderbolt (by way                û¦ ·
                                                                                                                 ¢¢È
                                                                               of reckoning)
       help / water
4658   pv. they will be                                  ¯ä
                                                      ¦Œ¢          4677   smooth hillside,              ìó± ¾ àÏ
                                                                                                            ¢† ŠÈ ¦ 	 
                                                                               slippery earth
       helped / given water
4659   melted brass,                                    ò÷
                                                        ˆ             4678   dry out, to go underground           °ã
                                                                                                                   ¦Å Š
       dregs of burning oil                                             4679   protection, patronage                ¨ óÂ
                                                                                                                    Œ ¢ŠÈ
4660   will burn / scald                            ÌĎ Ì
                                                                        Ruku'        5    v: 13       17         ¸ï°
4661   resting place, couch                          ìè« ÷
                                                    ¢† Š            4680   dry stubble, dry twigs             ø Ìÿ
                                                                                                                 ¢ 	 
4662   pv. they will be adorned                     À ô¸
                                                    È M            4681   expectation, hope                      ÷¢
                                                                                                                      † È
4663   armlets, bracelets                            °Â Ç¢
                                                     È Ê ¢ È           4682   ap. fg. leveled plain                ±° ¥
                                                                                                                   ¨È Ê ¢
4664   robes, garments                                    ¥ ¯
                                                         ¢¢	




                                                                                                                   183
                                                                                                              



Surah-18: Al-Kahf                                     184                                            Part: 15

4683   we did not                       °® äû ó
                                        È Ê ¢ öŠ        4695    junction of             ú  ¦ Þø ÷
                                                                                            Ž  ¸’ó¦  ´
       leave out / behind                                           two seas
4684   pv. set / brought before             ӎ ß
                                         ¦             4696    I will go on                         	 ÷È
                                                                                                        Ô ¢
4685   pv. is placed / laid upon            ÞÓÂ
                                            	 É            4697    for years                              ¦ì·
                                                                                                          ¢Œ 
4686   ap. pl. fearful, dreadful        ú 	 	 ÷
                                         ìèÌ            4698    fish       (pl.:   Æ ¢	 )
                                                                                       À ¬ ·           ©·
                                                                                                        Æ 
4687   does not leave anything           °Ê ä ó
                                         É ®¢ ¢Š        4699    as in a tunnel                         ¥ÂÇ
                                                                                                          ¢ 
 Ruku'      6       v: 5      18        ¸ï°                4700    we betook refuge                      ¢È È
                                                                                                           ü ¢
4688   aides, helpers                        Ôß
                                          ¦¾             4701    rock                                 Ï
                                                                                                       ¨ ¼
4689   destruction, barrier                  ì ¥ ÷
                                            ¢† Ž          4702    retracing, following                ÐÐë
                                                                                                       ¢  Š
4690   those going to fall               ¦ ë¦ 
                                            à	 ÷            Ruku'         9       v: 11    21      ¸ï°
 Ruku'      7       v: 4      19        ¸ï°                4703    grievous, dreadful                     ¦ ÷Ê
                                                                                                            ¤
4691   contentious disputing                † 
                                            ¾³             4704    ni. do not lay / constrain        ÿ« ó
                                                                                                    ê	 ¢Š
4692   they refute /         µ ¬ ®       Ô	
                                       ¦ ·¾          4705    dl. they went on / proceeded        ¢Š Š Š ûÊ
                                                                                                         ìôØ ¦
       weaken
4693   refuge, escape                       Ÿ ÷
                                            † 	           4706    dreadful thing                  ¤  Ë
                                                                                                  ¦ ÷Ê¢†
 Ruku'      8       v: 6      20        ¸ï°                4706a   a thing prohibited /          Å’ð¢†
                                                                                                  ¦ û  Ë
4694   I will not cease / give up        ¬Â ¢ ó
                                         É  ¥È¢Š                 unheard of




                                                                                                         184
                                                                                                                    




  Surah-18: Al-Kahf                                        185                                               Part: 15




                                                                        two mountains
 ^ Part:16                   öŠóÈ¢Ⱦ¢Šë Ä `
                                               ³                 4719   names of two         « ³ « ³
                                                                                             È  ’˜÷È È  ’˜
4706b   you will not be able to       Þ ج « ó
                                       	 ÈúŠ                     tribes of wild people
                                                                 4720   tribute                              ³»
                                                                                                            ¢ Â
4707    dl. they asked          ¿ ¸ ¶      øà ¬ ¦
                                           ¢  ’ØÇÊ
        for food
                                                                 4721   barrier, rampart                        ¾Ç
                                                                                                               ¦
 
4708    they refused                                 ¥¢
                                                  ¦È          4722   im. pl. you help/assist                ü ߢ
                                                                                                            ¦	 È
4709    they entertain (as guest) /             èÔ
                                             ¦Œ                   (vn.:     ˆ ¢ Ê)
                                                                                  ¨û ߦ
        be hospitable
                                                                 4723   strong wall / barrier                  ÷°
                                                                                                              ¢ Ì®È
4710    wall                                      ¾³
                                                °¦ Ž            4724   blocks / plates of iron     ¾ ¾¸ Â¥±
                                                                                                    	 	  ’ó¦ É
4711    to seize by force,                      ¦ ã
                                               ¢Њ             4725   filled up,                         à ¢
                                                                                                              ¦

                                                                                                               Ç
        snatch forcibly
                                                                        made equal, leveled up
4712    oppressed                                êÿ°
                                                  È            4726   dl. (two) steep                   ú ç¾Ï
                                                                                                          Ž Š  
 Ruku'         10   v: 12        1             ¸ï°                     mountain sides

4713    way, means                                ¦¦Ç
                                                 ¢            4727   im. pl. blow           ­ » À   ¦ Œ ûÉ
                                                                                                              ¼è ¦
4714    black mud, murky water                    ø·
                                                ¨Š	             4728   molten copper                           ë
                                                                                                              ¦ ’Ø	
4715    unknown, unheard                          Â û
                                                 ¦ ’ð          4729   they could not                 ßØ ÷
                                                                                                    ¦ ¢Š Ǧ¢
4716    covering, shelter, protection            ÂÇ
                                                ¦ ¬	           4730   they were unable              ß Ø¬ ÷
                                                                                                   ¦ ¢Š Ǧ¢
4717    with him                                 þ ¾ó
                                                 	  Š         4731   to pierce / dig through                    ¦û
                                                                                                                  ¢’ì
4718    two high walls,                        ú ¾Ç
                                               Ž             4732   surges                               «ø
                                                                                                             É  




                                                                                                             185
Surah 19: Maryam                                  186                                             Part: 16

4733   to present, plain to view           Óß
                                          ¢ Â        4749   barren                                     Âë ß
                                                                                                         ¦ 	 ¢
4734   veil, cover                           Øã
                                           Å ¢Š 	       4750   of the same name                            øÇ
                                                                                                          ¢
	 
 Ruku'       11   v: 19      2        ¸ï°
                                                        4751   extreme, last                                  ¢
		
                                                                                                               §
                                             † 
                                             Äû
                                                                                                               ÿ
                                                                                                              ú
4735   entertainment (for guests)
                                                        4752   easy
                                     ú ÂÈ ˜
                                      Ž  »Š’ó¦
                                                                                                       î ó
                                                                                                        «öŠ
4736   the greatest /
                                                        4753   (you) were not
       worst losers
4737   works, deeds                         àÏ
                                           ¢ ü       4754   childhood                                   ¦Ï
                                                                                                          ¢
Ž
                                                                                                         ¸ï°
4738   paradise                            ®ç
                                        ²ÌÂÈ Â	         Ruku'        1    v: 15       4

                                                        4755   fg. drew aside / went aside               À¦¬ ¦
                                                                                                       Ì©Š ûÊ
4739   change, removal                    † 	
                                           ·
                                                        4756   appeared as,                               ò°ø«
                                                                                                          Š M 
4740   ink                                  ® ¾÷
                                           ¦Å ¦ 	             assumed the likeness of
4741   exhausted, consumed                    ¾èû
                                               	       16th Part         1/4             öóÈÈ
                                                                                             ¢¾
                                                                                            Š     
                                                                                                   ë
                                                                                                  ¢Š    Ä
                                                                                                          ³   Þ¥°




 Ruku'       12      v: 9    3             ¸ï°         4757   distant, remote                            ¢
	 Š
                                                                                                           Ðë
                                                                                                         ¼÷
                                                                                                       µ¢ 
                          È Ç
              öÂ÷ ɨ°
                                                        4758   pains of childbirth
              ^                  `
                                                        4759   the trunk of                 ô ü ¸ ³
                                                                                           ¨Š ¼ó¦Ê ’ÀŽ
                     Mary
                                                               the palm tree
       Surah 19: Maryam
                                                        4760   utterly forgotten             È ÷  û
                                                                                            ¢
Ê ü ¢È
4742   in secret, in low voice                è»
                                             ¢
	 
                                                        4761   rivulet, streamlet                           ÂÇ
                                                                                                          ¢
Ž 
4743   weakened, became feeble               úÿÂ
                                              È
                                                        4762   im. fg. shake                 ± ± Á       Äÿ
                                                                                                       ÌÄ 
4744   glisten with gray, [fired]         òà¬
                                          Š  ˦
       shining white hairs like flames                  4763   fresh ripe dates                   ¦×° ü³
                                                                                                 ¢Š É ¢
Ž 
4745   head                                  ²°
                                             Æ Ì¢È      4764   im. fg. cool, refresh                        Âë
                                                                                                          ÌÄ Š
4746   old age                                ¦ Ë
                                             ¢       4765   man, human being                           È ¤
                                                                                                         ¢
Ê ûÊ
4747   unblessed, unfortunate,                ìË
                                             ¢
	       4766   amazing, strange,                                Âç
                                                                                                              ¢
Ž Š
         unsuccessful                                          most unusual
4748   my heirs / successors              ó ÷
                                           	¦ 
Surah 20: Taa-Haa                                   187                                                Part: 16

4767   cradle                                 ¾÷
                                                       4785   assembly, council, company                      ¾û
                                                                                                                ¢
	 
4768   so long as I remained           ª® ÷
                                        ÷É ¢          4786   outward appearance                              °
                                                                                                               ¢ Ì Ê
4769   dutiful, good, kind                       ¥
                                                ¦
       4787   resort, return                                 ® Â÷
                                                                                                               ¦  
4770   presence, witness-box                   ÷
                                         ¾ Ì          4788   alone, single                                  ®ç
                                                                                                               ¦Å Š
4771   how clear a hearer!                    ø ¢
                                            Þ	 ÇÈ       4789   adversary, opponent                            ¾Ó
                                                                                                               ¦
 	
4772   how clear a seer!                       Т
                                             Â	 ¥È       Ruku'        5     v: 17       8                   ¸ï°



 Ruku'      2      v: 25      5              ¸ï°         4790   to incite                                       ¦ È
                                                                                                                  ±¢
4773   long time, a good while                  ô÷
                                               ¢
	       4791   delegation                                     ¾Â
                                                                                                               ¦ ’çÈ
4774   affectionate, gracious                  è·
                                              ¢
	        4792   thirsty                                       ®Â
                                                                                                              ¦Å Ì°Ê
4775   I separate / withdraw             ¾Ä¬ ¢
                                         É Ž ßÈ         4793   monstrous, terrible                              ®¤
                                                                                                                 ¦ Ê
 Ruku'      3      v: 10      6              ¸ï°
                                                          4794   in utter ruin, crashing                        ¦
 
                                                                                                                 ¾ÿ
                                           ß Ó¢
                                        ¦ ¢ È
                                                                                                                 ®Â
                                                                                                                ¦ É
4776   they wasted /
                                                          4795   affection, love
       neglected / missed
4777   destruction, deception,                   ã
                                                ¢
Š       4796   contentious                                      ¾ó
                                                                                                                 ¦
 Œ
       perdition                                          4797   whisper                                       Ä °
                                                                                                              ¦ ’ïÊ
4778   sure to come,              Ä © ¦      « ÷
                                            ¢
	’˜       Ruku'        6     v: 16       9                   ¸ï°

       must come to pass
4779   forgetful                               Èû
                                              ¢
Ê         16th Part          1/2      öó
                                                                                        ŠÈ¢ È
                                                                                             ¾    ¢Š
                                                                                                   ë    Ä
                                                                                                          ³   æÐû




                                           ¦Ø ¦
                                       ŽŠ ÏÊ
4780   be constant and
       patient
                             ° § ´